89FT5815 I Den I88s, I85s, I58sr, I55 by Motorola Solutions

exhibit
download
text

1 2 3

Ex8 User Manual 1 of 2 i58sr

Users Manual

pdf

1.29 MiB

May 07 2002

Motorola iDEN Digital Multi-Service Data-Capable Phone i58sr Phone Users Guide FIRST DRAFT

@NTN9865A@

NTN0000-O www.motorola.com/iden Table of Contents Introduction .......................................................................................... 7 Driving Safety Tips .........................................................................................9 Getting Started.................................................................................... 11 i58sr Phone Features .....................................................................................12 Battery ...........................................................................................................12 Turning Your i58sr Phone On/Off ...............................................................16 Enabling Security ..........................................................................................17 Security Features of the i58sr Phone.............................................................18 Status of Your i58sr Phone ...........................................................................29 My Information .............................................................................................30 Using T9 Text Input ......................................................................................31 Display Essentials ............................................................................... 37 Display Screen Elements...............................................................................37 Navigating Menus and Lists..........................................................................41 Main Menu Options.......................................................................................41 Phonebook........................................................................................... 45 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone.................46 Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers................................................46 Phonebook Icons ...........................................................................................46 VoiceRecord..................................................................................................47 Accessing Your Phonebook ..........................................................................48 About Phonebook Entries..............................................................................48 Pause Digit Entry...........................................................................................57 Plus Dialing ...................................................................................................58 Digital Cellular.................................................................................... 59 Making Phone Calls ......................................................................................59 FIRST DRAFT 1 Emergency Calling ........................................................................................64 Receiving a Phone Call .................................................................................64 Ending a Phone Call......................................................................................64 Recent Calls...................................................................................................65 Missed Calls ..................................................................................................69 Call Timers....................................................................................................69 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................70 Call Hold .......................................................................................................71 Three-Way Calling ........................................................................................72 Call Forwarding.............................................................................................73 Messages .............................................................................................. 79 Message Center .............................................................................................79 Voice Mail.....................................................................................................80 Using Voice Mail ..........................................................................................81 Text and Numeric Messaging........................................................................82 Net Alert........................................................................................................84 Using Your Phone as a Modem.....................................................................85 Private Calls........................................................................................ 87 Private Call ....................................................................................................87 Call Alerts......................................................................................................90 Group Call .....................................................................................................94 Datebook.............................................................................................. 99 Datebook Icons............................................................................................100 Viewing Your Datebook .............................................................................100 About Datebook Events...............................................................................102 Adding New Events.....................................................................................103 Editing Events .............................................................................................107 Deleting Events ...........................................................................................107 Datebook Event Reminders.........................................................................108 Customizing Datebook Set Up....................................................................108 2 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Memo ................................................................................................. 111 Adding a New Memo ..................................................................................111 Viewing a Memo .........................................................................................111 Editing a Memo ...........................................................................................112 Deleting a Memo .........................................................................................112 Java .................................................................................................... 113 Installing Java Applications ........................................................................114 Running Java Applications..........................................................................114 Downloading Java Applications..................................................................115 Java Memory ...............................................................................................115 Deinstalling Java Applications....................................................................116 Voice Record* ................................................................................... 117 About Voice Record....................................................................................117 Accessing Voice Record .............................................................................117 Recording a Voice Record ..........................................................................118 Playing a Voice Record...............................................................................118 Adding to a Voice Record ...........................................................................118 Labeling a Voice Record.............................................................................118 Deleting Voice Record ................................................................................120 Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record............................................................120 Voice Record Memory ................................................................................121 Customizing the i58sr Phone ........................................................... 123 Settings Menu..............................................................................................123 Shortcuts......................................................................................................145 Accessories......................................................................................... 149 Carrying Solutions.......................................................................................149 Batteries.......................................................................................................151 Travel Chargers ...........................................................................................152 Data Accessories .........................................................................................154 FIRST DRAFT 3 Other Important Information ......................................................... 159 Understanding Status Messages ..................................................................159 Safety and General Information ..................................................... 161 RF Operational Characteristics ...................................................................161 Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure ..............................161 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..............................................164 Medical Devices..........................................................................................164 Operational Warnings..................................................................................166 Operational Cautions...................................................................................167 Accessory Safety Information .....................................................................169 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products...............................171 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) ......175 Patent and Trademark Information..............................................................179 Index .................................................................................................. 181 4 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden IMPORTANT!

Read Safety and General Information on page 171 before using your i58sr phone. FIRST DRAFT 5 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Plantation, FL 33328 USA Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920 Hereby declares that the product:

Product Name: i58sr Model Number: H58XAH6RR7AN Conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device Date: July 1, 2002 interference in a residential Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

--Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

--Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected

--Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 6 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden C Introduction ongratulations on purchasing your Motorola iDEN i58sr multi-service, data-capable, digital, portable phone. Your i58sr phone offers:

Phonebook Your consolidated Phonebook holds up to 250 entries and allows you to store multiple contact numbers for each person, offering you various ways to communicate with your business and personal contacts. SIM Card Your phones SIM card holds all entries stored in your Phonebook. In addition, you have a PIN (Personal Identification Number) to keep your information safe and secure. Datebook Schedule and keep track of appointments using your phones Datebook feature. Messages The Message Center allows you to manage and access your Voice Mail, Text Messages and Net Alert all from the same inbox. Private and Group Calls You can use your phone as a two-way radio to communicate directly with business and personal contacts in your iDEN service area. Fax and Data Transfer for circuit data faxes and file transfers. J2METM With the JavaTM applications feature, you can choose from the many Java programs. Either download Java applications directly from the Internet, or try one of the pre-loaded applications. Customization Use the Settings, Shortcuts and, optional features* to customize your i58sr phone to meet your individual needs. Speakerphone* You can enjoy hands-free communication at the touch of a button. And Speakerphone is especially great for conference calls. Voice Activated Dialing* Your i58sr phone offers state-of-the-art Voice Activated Dialing.

*Optional Feature Please consult your provider for availability of purchase. For more information on these and other features of the i58sr phone, review this Users Guide. There is a Table of Contents in the front of the guide and an Index in the back of the guide to assist you in finding the specific information you want. NOTE:Some features of your i58sr phone are available only in the iDEN service area, and are indicated as such in this guide. FIRST DRAFT 7 NOTE:This guide describes the features of the i58sr phone as they were set up by Motorola. However, your carrier or your organization may have changed or added features. For more information, check with your carrier or your organization. 8 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Driving Safety Tips Driving Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies that benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:

1. Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 2. When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional 3. 4. 5. layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-free accessories available today. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility driving safely. 6. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and FIRST DRAFT 9 suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 8. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.1 9. Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10. Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.1 1. Wherever wireless phone service is available. www.motorola.com/iden 10 FIRST DRAFT Getting Started This section includes:

i58sr Phone Features Battery Turning Your i58sr Phone On/Off Enabling Security Receiving Over-the-Air Programming Security Features of the i58sr Phone Status of Your i58sr Phone My Information Using T9 Text Input Page 12 Page 13 Page 16 Page 17 Page 17 Page 18 Page 29 Page 30 Page 31 FIRST DRAFT 11 i58sr Phone Features Rubber Overmold Power Button/Status Light Speaker Key Volume Control Buttons Push-To-Talk Button (PTT) Headset Jack Option Key End/Home Key 4-Way Navigation Key End/Home Key Punctuation Key Back Key/Pause Dialing Overmolded Battery Cover for High Performance Battery SIDE VIEW Overmolded Battery Cover for Maximum Capacity Battery Next Word Key/International Plus Dialing BOTTOM VIEW Antenna Earpiece Display Menu Key Option Key Photosensor Send Key AlphaNumeric Keypad FRONT VIEW Microphone Accessory Connector www.motorola.com/iden 12 FIRST DRAFT Battery Battery Your i58sr phone comes with a Lithium Ion battery. After attaching the battery, you must charge it before you use it for the first time. See Charging Lithium Ion Batteries on page 161 for the charging times for your phones battery. The first time you charge your phones battery, charge for 30 minutes more than the time shown on page 161. After the initial charging, the battery can be charged in the time shown on page 161. Remove the battery from the protective plastic safety tray provided in the original packaging. When the battery is not attached to the phone store it in the original tray. Attaching the Battery 1 Remove the battery cover located on the back of the phone by pressing the battery cover release button and sliding the battery cover away from the antenna. 2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area. Press down on the bottom of the battery to secure it. 3 Replace the battery cover and push forward until you hear a click. FIRST DRAFT 13 Detaching the Battery 1 2 3 Ensure that the phone is powered off before attempting to detach the battery. Press the battery cover release button and slide the battery cover away from the antenna. Remove the battery by pushing the battery toward the antenna and lifting it out of the phone. Charging the Battery 1 With your phones keypad facing up, plug the chargers accessory connector into the left side of the accessory connector on the bottom of the phone. 2 3 If the charger has folding electrical prongs, flip open the prongs. Plug the charger into an electrical outlet. Your phones screen backlight will remain lit while the battery is charging. www.motorola.com/iden 14 FIRST DRAFT Battery Charging Status The battery strength indicator icon found on your phones display screen shows the charge amount remaining in the battery. Battery When Using Phone Icon Display Battery Strength a Low Battery b 11% to 40%

c 41% to 70%

d Fully Charged A short, chirp-like sound indicates a low battery. The icon flashes to indicate that you have approximately five minutes of talk time remaining. When Charging Battery Icon Display e 1 flashing bar f g d 1 flashing bar, 1 continuous bar 1 flashing bar, 2 continuous bars 3 continuous bars Battery Strength Low Battery 31% to 60%

61% to 90%

Fully Charged FIRST DRAFT 15 Turning Your i58sr Phone On/Off To power the phone on:

1 2 For optimal signal strength, extend the antenna. Press and hold p at the top of the phone until the status light glows red and a tone briefly sounds. 3 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen displays, enter your SIM PIN.

(For more information see SIM Card Personal Identification Number

(PIN) on page 18.) NOTE:The default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card

(see Changing the PIN on page 20). 4 Press B under OK. As your phone connects to the network, you will see a welcome message and a connecting message. When the Ready screen appears on the display, you are ready to use your i58sr phone!

A To power the phone off:

1 2 Press and hold p on the top of the phone until you see the message Powering Off. Push down the antenna. www.motorola.com/iden 16 FIRST DRAFT Enabling Security Enabling Security To utilize browser functionality from your service provider, you must enable security the first time you power on your phone or within 20 days of first activation of your phone. 1 When you power on your phone for the first time, after the Ready screen appears, you will be prompted to select OK to update your browser info. NOTE: If you press A under LATER, you will be prompted to enable security each time you power on your phone until you press A under OK. It is recommended that you do not choose LATER. a Press A under OK. 2 3 You are prompted to enable security. Press A under YES. A series of screens display. If you subscribe to your service provider plan, your home page displays. 4 Press e to return to the Ready screen. Receiving Over-the-Air Programming If you have been set up to receive Over-the-Air Programming by your service provider, you will receive your Private ID and Talkgroup lists for Private Call use, and your Personal Telephone Number via a Net Alert message. In order to receive your programming, you must have enabled security. Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will receive a Net Alert message containing your lists. To accept your phone programming:

1 You will receive a Net Alert with the message New Browser Message Receive Programming Info. 2 Press A under GOTO. FIRST DRAFT 17 3 You are prompted to accept changes to your phonebook. Press A under OK. 4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 5 You are prompted again to accept changes to your phonebook. Press A under OK. 6 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 7 Press e to return to the idle screen. SIM Card Keypad Lock Security Features of the i58sr Phone The i58sr phone comes with two levels of security protection:

Your phone comes with a built-in level of security protection through the use of the SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card stores all your Phonebook information. Since this information is stored on the SIM card, not in your phone itself, you can remove the information by removing the SIM card. The SIM card is located in the SIM Card Holder on the back of the phone, underneath the battery. You can verify that the SIM card is in place by removing the battery and viewing the SIM card through the SIM card cover. See Removing/Inserting the SIM Card on page 23 for information on locating the SIM card. If there is no SIM card in your phone, notify your sales representative. NOTE:Except for making emergency calls, your phone will not function without the SIM card. SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your SIM card is protected by a PIN. Each time the phone is powered on, you must enter your PIN. You can change or disable your PIN if desired. NOTE:Disabling your PIN enables anyone to use your phone. If you disable your PIN, you must still keep the SIM card in the phone to make calls. www.motorola.com/iden 18 FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i58sr Phone Entering the SIM PIN Depending on your Service Provider, your phone may or may not require you to enter a SIM PIN when you first use your phone. If your phone is required to enter a PIN, your default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card (see Changing the PIN on page 20). P IMPORTANT:

Incorrectly entering your PIN three times causes the SIM card to be blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider. For more information, see Unblocking the PIN on page 21 1 From the Enter SIM PIN screen, enter your four- to eight-digit PIN. An asterisk appears for each character entered. NOTE:Other than emergency dialing, you will be unable to use any of the phone functions, including receiving phone calls, until you enter the PIN. 2 Press B under OK. If you enter an incorrect PIN, the message SIM PIN incorrect: Try again appears on your phones screen. After three consecutive incorrect attempts, the SIM card is blocked. The phone does not allow you to attempt to enter your PIN again, even after powering the phone off and back on. If this happens, see Unblocking the SIM PIN on page 21. FIRST DRAFT 19 Changing the PIN 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. B C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to New Passwords. Press B under SELECT to access the New Passwords screen. 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN and press B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. 7 At the Enter New SIM PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN Code screen, re-enter the new SIM PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. www.motorola.com/iden 20 FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i58sr Phone Unblocking the SIM PIN If you forget your PIN and unsuccessfully enter it three times, access to your phone will be blocked. NOTE:Before you begin, obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code from your service provider, then read and understand the PIN unblocking sequence. In entering the key press sequence, each key press must occur within 5 seconds of the prior key press. IMPORTANT:

If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK code ten times, the SIM card is permanently blocked and must be replaced. If this happens, all data will be lost. You will get a message to contact your service provider.Call Nextel Customer Care for assistance. If the SIM card is blocked, the i58sr phone only allows outgoing Emergency calls. To unblock the PIN:

1 2 3 4 5 Press * * 0 5 s. Enter the PUK code. Press s. Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press s. Re-enter your SIM PIN and press s. If you entered the codes properly, the SIM Unlocked screen displays. FIRST DRAFT 21 Disabling/Enabling the PIN Requirement When the PIN requirement is enabled, you are prompted to enter your PIN each time you turn on your phone. Until a valid PIN is entered, you can use the phone only to make emergency calls. After the PIN is accepted, the phone registers on the network and the Ready screen displays. When the PIN requirement is disabled, the phone can be used without entering a PIN. NOTE:If you disable the PIN requirement, you remove protection of personal data on your SIM card. Anyone can then use your phone and access your personal data. 1 At the Ready screen, press mand then press R to scroll to Settings. P B 2 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden 22 FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i58sr Phone 3 Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN. Press B under SELECT to access the SIM PIN screen. 5 Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the SIM PIN requirement;

Off disables the SIM PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. Removing/Inserting the SIM Card NOTE:To avoid loss or damage, do not remove your SIM card unless absolutely necessary. IMPORTANT:

If you remove your SIM card and insert another SIM card into your phone, the following information is erased when you use the phone with the new SIM card:

Datebook events, the Recent Call list, Voice Record, voice names for Phonebook entries and shortcuts, call forwarding settings, call filtering settings in styles, Net Alert alerts, and information stored in memo. FIRST DRAFT 23 1 With phone powered off, remove the battery cover and battery. See Detaching the Battery on page 14. 2 With the antenna facing away from you, and the back of the phone exposed and facing up, locate the SIM cover and gently push it forward. 3 Lift the SIM cover up. 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 www.motorola.com/iden 24 FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i58sr Phone 4 5 To remove the SIM card, very carefully lift it out of its holder. Do not touch the gold-colored areas of the SIM card. NOTE:Protect the SIM card as you would any delicate object. When the SIM card is not in the phone, you should store it in something protective, such as a mailing envelope. To insert the SIM card, very carefully place it in its holder with the gold contact side facing down and the cut corner on the card properly aligned with the cut corner of the holder. Close the SIM card cover and slide it down until you hear a click. 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 Keypad Lock The i58sr phone includes a Keypad Lock feature that enables you to quickly lock the phones keypad to avoid inadvertently pressing keys or placing calls. Once Keypad Lock is activated, you can only perform the following tasks:

Turn your phone on and off Unlock the keypad Receive incoming calls, messages, and alerts. NOTE:Emergency calls cannot be placed while Keypad Lock is activated. Before locking your phones keypad, you may want to read this entire section to learn how to respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts. FIRST DRAFT 25 Activating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Locked displays on your phone. D Whenever a key is pressed while in Keypad Lock mode, the unlock instructions display briefly. Receiving Incoming Calls When you receive an incoming phone call (see Receiving a Phone Call on page 64), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press B under YES or press s to answer the call. Or, Press A under NO or press e to send the call to Voice Mail and reactivate Keypad Lock. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. www.motorola.com/iden 26 FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i58sr Phone Receiving Private Calls When you receive an incoming Private call, Talkgroup call, or call alert (see Private Call on page 91), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press and hold the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. Receiving New Voice Mail When you receive new Voice Mail (see Voice Mail on page 84), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Voice Mail Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under CALL to access Voice Mail. 2 Once you have finished, press e to exit Voice Mail. The Recent Calls list displays. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. FIRST DRAFT 27 Receiving New Text Messages When you receive new Text Messages (see Text and Numeric Messaging on page 86), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Text Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under READ to read the message. Press B under SAVE or DELETE. 2 Once you have finished, press A under EXIT to reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. Receiving New Net Alert When you receive new Net Alert, Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Browser Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under GOTO. Press A under View. Press A under OK or Reply. 2 Once you have finished, press e until you reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. www.motorola.com/iden 28 FIRST DRAFT Deactivating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Unlocked displays briefly. Status of Your i58sr Phone E Status of Your i58sr Phone Your i58sr phone has a status light that displays around the power button. The status light indicates the status of your connection. Status Light Indicator i58sr Phone Status Flashing Red Signing on to the network. Please wait. Solid Red Flashing Green No service or out of coverage area. In service/Ready to use. Solid Green In use. FIRST DRAFT 29 My Information You can select My Info from the main menu to display or edit the following:

Name enter your name in this field. Private ID your Private ID is displayed in this field. Your Private ID is the number that others use to contact you using Private calls. Phone Numbers of Lines 1 and 2 your phones numbers are displayed in these fields. You can edit the phone numbers displayed on the My Information screen, but this does not change your phone numbers. Carrier IP This field displays your phones carrier assigned IP address. IP Addresses these fields display the IP addresses you use to access the Internet with your phone. Circuit Data Number (Ckt) your circuit data number is in this field. Viewing/Editing My Information 1 2 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to My Info. Press B under SELECT. The My Information screen displays. 3 Use S to scroll through the fields. 4 To edit the displayed information, press B under CHANGE. Edit information as desired, and press B under OK to save the changes. To return to the Ready screen, press A under EXIT. www.motorola.com/iden 30 FIRST DRAFT Using T9 Text Input Using T9 Text Input Your i58sr phone has embedded software, called T9 Text Input, that makes typing on a phone keypad much like typing on a computer keyboard: it eliminates the traditional multi-tap method of text entry. As you type, you press only one key per letter. T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its linguistic database of approximately 60,000 words and proper names. You may also store additional words you frequently use in your own user database, which is incorporated into the T9 database. T9 Text Input is available when you are typing information into your Phonebook and Datebook. T9 Text Input Entry Modes Four text entry modes are available in T9 Text Input: Alpha, Word, Symbols, and Numeric. When you are using T9 Text Input, an icon in the top right corner of your phones display screen (next to the battery strength indicator icon) indicates the T9 Text Input entry mode you are using:

Icon T9 Entry Mode Name Used For... w

, Alpha Word Symbols Numeric Standard multi-tap keypad text entry. Entering words and punctuation with one key-

press per character. Entering punctuation and symbols such as @ or ?. Entering keypad numbers. Choosing a Text Entry Mode When you are using Phonebook or Datebook, you select your text entry mode from a menu available whenever the phone is displaying a screen that requires you to enter text (for example, the Name screen or Title screen). FIRST DRAFT 31 To choose a text entry mode:

1 2 3 From any screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. A check mark appears next to the current text entry mode. When you access a screen that requires text input, the default text entry mode is Alpha. Press S to highlight the T9 Text Input text entry mode you want to use. Press B under SELECT. The phone returns to the text entry screen. The text entry mode you selected is now active. Using Alpha Mode To enter text while in Alpha text entry mode to enter letters, numbers, and symbols:

Press any button on the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters, numbers, and symbols on that key. Type a letter then press Q to activate Caps Lock or type a letter then press R to deactivate Caps Lock. Pause briefly to leave the currently displayed character in place and move on to the next place in the text entry field. Press P to create a space in the text entry field. Press A under DELETE to delete one character. Press and hold A under DELETE to delete an entire entry. Using Word Mode In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters on the keypad button you press and arranges them to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its database and will display the most commonly used matching word. www.motorola.com/iden 32 FIRST DRAFT Using T9 Text Input Special Key Functions Some of your phones keys assume different functions while in T9 Text Input Word mode. Backspace and Erase Press A under DELETE once to backspace or to erase a single character. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the entire text entry field. Space Press R once to accept a word and insert a space when entering text. Next Word in Database Press 0 to display more words in the database that match the keystroke sequence you entered. Shift and Caps Lock Press # to make the next letter typed uppercase (Shift), to make all subsequent letters types uppercase (Caps Lock), or to go back to lowercase letters. These icons appear in the top row of your display screen:

$ for Shift to uppercase x for Caps Lock When neither of these icons appear, letters typed are lowercase. NOTE:T9 Text Input automatically makes the first letter of a sentence uppercase. Punctuation In Word mode, T9 Text Input uses Smart Punctuation to quickly apply basic rules of grammar to insert the correct punctuation within a word and at the end of a sentence. Press 1 to insert punctuation. One of eight basic punctuation symbols will be inserted (. , - @ : ? ;). Press 0 to change the inserted punctuation symbol to another of the eight basic punctuation symbols. Press R to accept the punctuation and continue typing. NOTE:Additional punctuation symbols are available in Symbols mode. FIRST DRAFT 33 Enter a Word To enter a word using Word mode:

1 2 3 Choose Word as your text entry mode. Type a word by using one key-press per desired letter. For example, to type test press 8 3 7 8. The displayed word may change as you type it. Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to the end of the word before editing. If the word that appears is not the desired word, press 0 to change the word on the display to the next most likely word in the database. Repeat until the desired word appears. If the desired word does not appear, you can add it to the database of words using the instructions in Adding Words to the User Database on page 34. Adding Words to the User Database To add words to the T9 database:

1 2 3 4 Change from Word text entry mode to Alpha text entry mode. Type the word using Alpha text entry mode. Return to Word text entry mode. Press R to add a space. The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is now in the database. NOTE: You cannot store alphanumeric combinations, such as Y2K. www.motorola.com/iden 34 FIRST DRAFT Using T9 Text Input Choosing a Language To change the language of the database T9 Text Input chooses common words from:

1 2 3 4 5 From any screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. Press S to scroll to Languages. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the language of the database you want T9 Text Input text use. Press B under SELECT. Using Numeric Mode To use Numeric text entry mode, choose Numeric as your text entry mode and press the number buttons on your keypad to enter numbers. Using Symbols Mode To use Symbols text entry mode:

1 2 3 Choose Symbols as your text entry mode. A row of 32 symbols appears along the bottom of your phones display screen, just above the display option and menu icon. (Press T to view the complete row.) Press T to highlight the symbol you want to enter into the text entry field. Press B under SELECT to enter the symbol. FIRST DRAFT 35 www.motorola.com/iden 36 FIRST DRAFT Display Essentials Your i58sr phones display screen tells you what you need to know as you use your phone. This section includes:

Display Screen Elements Navigating Menus and Lists Main Menu Options Page 37 Page 41 Page 42 Display Screen Elements Any time your phone is powered on, the display screen provides you with information and options. Status Status Status Status Status Status icon icon icon icon icon icon rows rows rows rows rows rows The Ready Screen The Ready screen displays any time the phone is powered on, but not engaged in some activity. The Ready screen consist of elements common to many of the screens your phone displays:

status icons text display area menu icon display options USER TIP:You can always access the Ready screen by pressing e. optionsA Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu icon icon icon icon icon icon Display Display Display Display Display Display options options options options options Text Text Text Text Text Text display display display display display display area area area area area area Status Icons Status icons provide you with information about your phone and its functions. These icons are context sensitive; meaning, the icons that appear depend on the task you are performing. FIRST DRAFT 37 Status icons appear in the two rows at the top of the display screen. Some appear at all times. Others appear only when your phone is engaged in certain activities or when you have activated certain features. Icon abcd efgd opqr s 01 GHI JKL c h

Y Z

Indicates... Battery Strength icons remaining battery charge. More bars on the battery indicate a greater charge. See the table on page 15 for detailed information about the meaning of each battery strength icon. Signal Strength icons strength of the network signal. More bars next to the antenna indicate a stronger signal. Active Line icons currently active phone line; 0 indicates Line 1 is active; 1 indicates Line 2 is active. Call Forward icons phone is set to forward calls. See Call Forwarding on page 73 for more information. Phone In Use phone is connected on an active call. Private In Use number being called is a Private ID. Talkgroup In Use phone is active on a talkgroup call. Packet Data Ready phone is ready to receive data through a data cable. Packet Data Activity phone is transmitting data. Mobile IP phone is ready to access the Internet. www.motorola.com/iden 38 FIRST DRAFT

l

. y B

w#,!

$x Display Screen Elements Secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a secure connection. Non-secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a non-secure connection. Roaming phone is searching for network connections outside your local area. Text Message you have one or more Text Messages or Net Alert messages. Voice Mail you have one or more Voice Mail messages. FaxMail you have one or more FaxMail messages. Ring/Vibe icons you have customized the way in which the phone is set to notify you when you receive calls and other types of messages. See Ring Style and Notification Type on page 135 for more information. T9 Text Input icons you are using T9 Text Input to enter text. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for more information. TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications The icon of the main menu feature currently in use always appears in the top left of the status icon rows. For a list of the main menu icons, see Main Menu Options on page 42. FIRST DRAFT 39 Text Display Area On the Ready screen, the text displayed in this area is determined by your wireless communications provider. When you access other screens, this area displays menu options, messages, names, phone numbers, and other information. The number of lines of text displayed in the text display area depends on which display view is selected Standard view, Compressed view, or Zoom view.

(For more information, see Setting Text Display on page 145.) In Standard view, five lines of text are displayed. NOTE:Standard view is the default display setting. Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Menu Icon This menu icon S appears on any screen from which a menu can be accessed. To access a menu, press the menu key on your keypad. This key has the menu icon printed on it. Menus are context sensitive. The menu that appears depends on the screen you access it from and the items on the menu apply to the task you are currently performing. Pressing the menu key from the Ready screen accesses the main menu. Display Options Two display options appear at the bottom of most screens. These options enable you to perform a wide variety of actions, including changing, saving and viewing information, running programs, and canceling previous actions. You activate a display option by pressing the option key below it. The Ready screen display options provide quick access to two main menu features. By default, the Phonebook (PHBK) and Messages (MESG) display options appear on the Ready screen. You can control which display options appear on the Ready screen using the phones Personalize feature in the Settings menu (see Changing Ready Screen Options on page 140). The display options on screens other than the Ready screen cannot be customized. www.motorola.com/iden 40 FIRST DRAFT Navigating Menus and Lists Navigating Menus and Lists The i58sr phone is menu driven. By navigating menus, you access submenus which lead to all of the functions and features that are built into your phone. Use the menus to store calls, manage your Phonebook and Datebook, change your phone settings, browse the Internet, and more. Some features include lists of names, numbers, or other information. These list items can be accessed the same way menu options are. To access the items in a menu or list, scroll through using the four-way navigation key near the center of your keypad. Scroll down by pressing the lower portion of the navigation key R. Scroll up by pressing the upper portion of the navigation key Q. Holding down the appropriate part of the navigation key speeds up scrolling. If you continue scrolling after you have reached the bottom or top of a menu or list, you wrap-around to the opposite end. If more items appear in a menu or list than can be displayed in the text area, a down arrow or up arrow appears in the left side of the screen indicating that more options may be accessed by scrolling up or down. Down arrow Up arrow B S FIRST DRAFT 41 Main Menu Options By default, the main menu options appear in the order determined by your service provider. You can change the order in which they appear by using the Personalize feature (see Reordering Main Menu on page 140). To access the main menu, press m from the Ready screen:

Menu Item Use to ... Net F Java m Settings

( VoiceRecord*

b Phonebook R Messages

; Call Forward

= Datebook O Memo z Call Timers Browse the Web. Run pre-installed and download custom Java applications on your phone. Customize your phone: Ring/Vibe, In Call Setup, Security, Personalize, Initial Setup, Phone Setup, Voice Volume, and Talkgroup Settings. Record personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls to play back at a later time. Store and retrieve a list of stored entries for calling, editing, viewing and deleting. Receive, store, access and manage Voice Mail, FaxMail, Text Messages, and Net Alert. Settings for forwarding calls in various situations. Schedule and organize events, by the day or the month, such as appointments and meetings. Input and store numbers to access later. Display the duration of phone calls, private or group calls, circuit data use, and Kilobytes sent and received. www.motorola.com/iden 42 FIRST DRAFT j Recent Calls n Shortcuts U My Info v Styles*

: Call Alert Main Menu Options Access a list of the last 20 sent, received, or missed calls. Calls can be made from this list. Associate a menu option with a number on the alphanumeric keypad for quick and easy access. View the name, Private ID, phone numbers for lines 1 and 2, IP address, and circuit data number of your phone. Create or edit a group of settings and save them as one for use in different environments. Store received call alerts to respond to at your convenience.

[icon pending] GPS Find your phones exact geographical location.

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. To choose the highlighted Main Menu selection, press B under SELECT. To exit the Main Menu (and return to the Ready screen), press A under EXIT or press e. FIRST DRAFT 43 www.motorola.com/iden 44 FIRST DRAFT Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store up to 250 frequently used names and numbers. When you store information in your Phonebook, it is saved on your SIM card. If you move your SIM card to another SIM-based Motorola iDEN phone, you can access information in your Phonebook from that phone. NOTE:If you use a different SIM card in your phone, some information stored in the phone will be lost. See Removing/Inserting the SIM Card on page 24. This section includes:

Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Phonebook Icons Voice Names*

Accessing Your Phonebook About Phonebook Entries Viewing Phonebook Entries Sorting Phonebook Entries Adding Phonebook Entries Editing Phonebook Entries Deleting Phonebook Entries Pause Digit Entry Plus Dialing Page 46 Page 46 Page 46 Page 47 Page 48 Page 48 Page 49 Page 49 Page 51 Page 56 Page 57 Page 57 Page 58

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. FIRST DRAFT 45 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone If you plan to use the information stored in your Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or any other GSM phone, you must purchase CompanionPro. Go to www.motorola.com\iden or your service providers web site for more information. You can use CompanionPro to make the Phonebook information saved to your i58sr phones SIM card accessible in this type of phone. Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Your Phonebook can store multiple phone numbers to a single name. For example, you can enter someones name into your Phonebook once and then assign that persons home, office, mobile phone and fax numbers to the name. Each number stored in your Phonebook is automatically assigned a Speed Dial number that corresponds to its location in your Phonebook. Each phone number uses one Speed Dial location, even if it is assigned to the same name as other phone numbers. The phone number stored in location 1 is assigned Speed Dial number 1, the phone number stored in location 2 is assigned Speed Dial number 2, and so forth, to location 250. Phonebook Icons Icons that appear to the right of entries in your Phonebook convey information about those entries. When you enter a phone number in your Phonebook, you can designate the phone numbers type using any of the following icons:

W h q Q L b Mobile Private Work Main Home Pager www.motorola.com/iden 46 FIRST DRAFT Voice Names*

K n iP Z Fax Talkgroup IP (Internet Protocol Address) Other NOTE:The Mobile icon automatically appears to the right of the first phone number assigned to a name unless you choose another icon. For more information on entering phone numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. The picker arrows appearing around the phone number type icon indicates multiple phone numbers stored under one name:

ef pickers The Voice Name* icon appearing to the left of one of the phone number type icons indicates that a voice name is associated with the Phonebook entry:

p Voice Name

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. Voice Names*

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. A voice name is an audio recording you make by speaking into your i58sr phone that you assign to a number in your Phonebook. You can then dial the number by speaking the words you recorded into the phone. See step 6 of Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51 for more information on creating a voice name. FIRST DRAFT 47 Accessing Your Phonebook If PHBK is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press B under PHBK. If PHBK is not one of your display options:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. USER TIP:You can also access the Phonebook by pressing m while your phone is in a phone call or private call. This brings you to the Phonebook screen. From this screen, you can view, sort, add, edit, and delete Phonebook entries, check Phonebook capacity, or make calls. About Phonebook Entries Each Phonebook entry may contain the following information:

The name associated with the entry. Typically, this is the name of the person whose number you are storing in the Phonebook. The type of number to be stored: Mobile, Private, Work, Main, Home, Pager, Fax, Other, or Talkgroup. If you dont choose a type, the number is assigned type Mobile, unless a Mobile number has already been assigned to the name. The phone number to be stored. Every Phonebook entry must contain a phone number. This number may be any type of phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup number. A Speed Dial number. You may accept the default Speed Dial number or assign a different one. A voice name audio recording for voice-activated dialing. (This is an optional feature. Contact your carrier for further details.) www.motorola.com/iden 48 FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries Viewing Phonebook Entries Names with more than one number assigned to them appear with ef surrounding the icon to the right of the name. For example, if you had stored a home and work number for Joe Smith, the entry for Joe Smiths home phone number would look like this:

Joe Smith eLf When the name is highlighted, press T to scroll to the icons representing each of the numbers assigned to that name. To view any of the phone numbers assigned to a name:

1 2 From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the name associated with the phone number you want to see. Press T to view the icons representing the phone numbers assigned to that name. 3 When the icon representing the number you want to view is displayed, press B under VIEW. If there is a Private ID or a Talkgroup number stored for the person, press m. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. 4 Press S to view the other numbers stored for this name. Sorting Phonebook Entries You can sort your Phonebook entries by:

Name the name you entered for the entry. Speed No. the Speed Dial location of the entry. Voice Name* all entries with voice names appear at the top of the list. NOTE:Private calls cannot be made from the Phonebook when sorted by Speed Dial location.

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. FIRST DRAFT 49 To sort your Phonebook list:

1 2 3 4 From the Main Screen screen, press m and scroll down R to view the Phonebook Menu screen.

Press R to scroll to Sort By. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the desired sorting method: Name, Speed #, or Voice Name*

*.Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. 5 Press B under SELECT. Checking Phonebook Capacity Your Phonebook can store up to 250 numbers of any kind. To see how many entries are stored in your Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Phonebook screen, Press m to view the Phonebook Menu screen. Press R to scroll to Capacity. Press B under SELECT. The Capacity screen shows how many storage spaces in you Phonebook are in use and how many are empty. www.motorola.com/iden 50 FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries Adding Phonebook Entries Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Phonebook Entry Details screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Entry Details screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Entry Details screen. Only a phone number is required for a valid Phonebook entry. After you have entered a phone number and any other information you wish to include, you can press A under DONE to save the Phonebook entry. To cancel a Phonebook entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. To add a Phonebook entry:

1 Access the Entry Details screen:

From the Main Screen screen, press m. Then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT To add a [New Entry], press B under SELECT. 2 If you want to assign a name to your Phonebook entry:

With the Name field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Name screen, enter the name using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for information about entering text into this field. When you are finished, press B under OK. H I The Entry Details screen returns with the Type field highlighted. FIRST DRAFT 51 3 If you want to assign a phone number type other than Mobile to your Phonebook entry:

With the Type field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Type Editor screen, press R to scroll to the type of phone number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. 4 Assign a phone number to your Phonebook entry:

With the # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Type the number using the alphanumeric keypad. For phone numbers, use the 10-digit format. To delete a digit, press A under DELETE. J K The Entry Details screen returns with the # field highlighted. See Pause Digit Entry on page 57 and Plus Dialing on page 58 for information on using these features when storing phone numbers in you Phonebook. NOTE:The number can be up to 20 characters long. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Entry Details screen returns with the Speed # field highlighted. www.motorola.com/iden 52 FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries 5 The default Speed Dial number assigned to the Phonebook entry is displayed in the Speed # field. This is always the next available Speed Dial location. If you want to assign the phone number to a different Speed Dial location:

With the Speed # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to delete the current Speed Dial number. L Type the new Speed Dial number using the alphanumeric keypad. When you are finished, press B under OK. 6 If you want to assign a voice name* to the number:

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. With the Voice Name field highlighted, press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. M An ) icon appears in the Voice Name field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP: For best results, record in a quiet environment. FIRST DRAFT 53 7 If you want to store more phone numbers to the name associated with this Phonebook entry:

Press R to scroll to MORE at the bottom of the Entry Details screen and then press B under SELECT. A new Type field appears for the additional number. U Enter the information for the additional phone number using step 3 through step 7. NOTE:Each name in your Phonebook may have up to seven phone numbers one Private ID associated with it. 8 When you have entered all the information you wanted in this Phonebook entry, press A under DONE. N Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly Your phone gives you two ways to store phone numbers quickly: from the Ready screen and from the Recent Calls list. To store a number from the Ready screen:

1 2 From the Ready screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the number you want to store. Press m to access the Dialing Menu screen. www.motorola.com/iden 54 FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries 3 With Store Number highlighted, press B under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen. 4 5 6 7 8 To store to a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen will display with the number entered in the field. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field. From the Entry Details screen, press S to scroll to the first Type field. From the Type Editor screen, press S to scroll to the selection that you want to assign to the phone number. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. Press A under DONE. To store a number from the Recent Calls list:

1 2 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the 10-digit telephone number you want to store. Press B under STORE. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. FIRST DRAFT 55 3 4 5 6 To store a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the type of number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. Press A under DONE. To store a Private ID from the Recent Calls list:

1 Press R to scroll to the Private ID number you want to store. Note:

The Store option for Private ID numbers (e.g., 123*123*1234), will not display in the Recent Calls list. 2 With the Private ID highlighted, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Store. Press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. Follow steps 3-6 in To store a number from the Recent Calls list (listed on the previous page). Editing Phonebook Entries 1 2 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to edit. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. www.motorola.com/iden 56 FIRST DRAFT Pause Digit Entry 3 4 5 Press R to scroll to Edit. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51 to edit the various fields. Deleting Phonebook Entries 1 2 3 4 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete Contact or Delete Number. Delete Contact deletes the name and all numbers associated with that name. Delete Number deletes the number associated with the icon that is currently displayed in the Phonebook list for the name. The name and all the other numbers will remain. Press B under SELECT. A warning screen displays requiring you to confirm the deletion. Pause Digit Entry When storing a number, you can program your phone so that it will not only dial a number but also pause before entering another series of numbers such as a personal identification number (PIN) or password. This feature is particularly useful for accessing automated services such as voice mail and banking systems from your i58sr phone. Heres how it works. Lets say you have a company voice mail account that you frequently check while traveling. And, to access that account you must do the following:

Dial your work number;

Press # while the voice mail greeting is being played; and Enter your PIN to access your messages. FIRST DRAFT 57 You can program your phone to enter all of the above information for you. All you have to do is separate each entry with a pause. If you were to program your phone to automatically input the above information, the stored data would look like this 17035551234P#P1234. In this example, the first eleven digits represent the number that must be dialed to access your voice mail. The P represents a 3 second pause. The # interrupts your greeting. The second P represents another 3 second pause. The last four digits represent your PIN. You can use this feature not only to enter PINs and passwords but also to have the phone automatically select menu options (i.e., press 1 to hear messages). To create a three-second pause follow the steps below:

Press and hold * for two seconds. The pause symbol (P) will appear on the display screen. NOTE:You can enter up to 20 characters in a single entry, stored or dialed. NOTE:If you use a system that will not let you enter an option until the automated message has played in its entirety, you can program your phone to pause for more than 3 seconds. For example, performing the above step twice will program two pauses and cause your phone to wait 6 seconds before entering the next set of numbers. Plus Dialing This feature enables you to place an international call from most countries without entering the local international access code. Use Plus Dialing for all Phonebook entries if you plan to travel outside the United States. Begin by following the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. Before you type the phone number to be stored:

1 2 3 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE:The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. Follow the rest of the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. www.motorola.com/iden 58 FIRST DRAFT Digital Cellular The i58sr phone enables you to make and receive domestic and international phone calls, make emergency calls, and be notified of a missed call. This section includes:

Making Phone Calls Emergency Calling Receiving a Phone Call Ending a Phone Call Recent Calls Call Waiting Hands Free SpeakerPhone*

Call Timers Call Hold Three-Way Calling Call Forwarding Page 59 Page 64 Page 64 Page 64 Page 65 Page 70 Page 68 Page 70 Page 71 Page 72 Page 73

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. Making Phone Calls Your i58sr phone provides the following features for making phone calls:

Direct Dial Phonebook Recent Calls Speed Dial Turbo Dial Last Number Redial TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications. FIRST DRAFT 59 Using Direct Dial 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, use the keypad to enter the number you want to call. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. NOTE:See Plus Dialing on page 58 for information on making international calls. If you make a mistake:

To clear one digit, press A under DELETE. To clear all digits, press and hold A under DELETE. To cancel, press e. Making Calls from the Phonebook After you have entered phone numbers into your Phonebook, you can use these numbers to make phone calls. For information on entering numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. To make calls from the Phonebook:

1 From the Ready screen, if PHBK is one of your display options, press A under PHBK. Or, From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press R to scroll through the names in your Phonebook. Or, Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the first letter of the name and press R to scroll through the names beginning with that letter. Stop when the name of the person you want to call is highlighted. www.motorola.com/iden 60 FIRST DRAFT Making Phone Calls 3 If more than one number is stored for the person you want to call, ef appears around the icon to the right of the persons name. Press T to scroll through the icons representing the numbers stored for that person. Or, Press B under VIEW to view all the numbers stored for this person. Then press R to scroll to the number you want to call. Or, If there is a Private ID or a Talkgroup number stored for this person, press m. When the Phonebook Menu appears, press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. Then press R to scroll to the number you want to call. For more information on assigning multiple numbers to one person, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. 4 5 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Making Calls from the Recent Calls List Your phone stores the numbers of the last 20 calls you received or sent in the Recent Calls list. 1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to Recent Calls is not the first item on the list, press S to scroll to it. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press S to scroll the list received or sent recent calls until you reach the desired call. FIRST DRAFT 61 3 To view additional information about the call:

Press B under VIEW. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. 4 5 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Using Speed Dial Each phone number stored in your Phonebook is assigned a Speed Dial number. You can use the Speed Dial number to quickly place a call. 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, enter the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone number you want to call. Press #. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Using Turbo Dial Turbo Dial allows you to call the numbers in your Phonebook associated with Speed Dial numbers 1 through 9 by pressing and holding the corresponding numeric key on the keypad. Press and hold a number (keys 1 through 9). NOTE:Turbo Dial cannot be accessed while the browser is active, nor while Keypad Lock or SIM Lock is active. www.motorola.com/iden 62 FIRST DRAFT Making Phone Calls Last Number Redial Press and hold s to redial the last number you called. Making TTY Calls NOTE:This feature may not be offered by your service provider. You can use your phone to make calls using a TTY device. When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the TTY mode you last selected. You can change the TTY mode during a call. For more information on choosing a TTY mode, see Setting TTY Mode on page 146. To make a call using a TTY device:

Q 1 2 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the jack on the phone. (To locate the jack, see page 12.) Connect the other end of the cord into your TTY device. Enter the phone number you wish to call and press. Placing International Phone Calls When making an international call, you can either enter the international access code directly (011 in the United States) or use Plus Dialing. You can make international calls from your Phonebook if you have stored the numbers with Plus Dialing. See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51 and Plus Dialing on page 58 for more information. NOTE:Your service default is International Calls Restricted. Therefore, you must call Customer Care to obtain international dialing access. FIRST DRAFT 63 To make an international call using Plus Dialing:

1 2 3 4 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE:The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Emergency Calling Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency calls can be made even when the SIM card is blocked or not in the phone. To place a call in an emergency, dial 911s. You will be connected to the nearest emergency dispatch center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. NOTE:If you have enabled the Keypad Lock feature, you must unlock the phones keypad before any call can be made, including 911 emergency calls. Receiving a Phone Call Incoming calls are indicated by a ring, vibration or backlight illumination. Press s or any key on the keypad or press B under YES to answer the call. Ending a Phone Call Press e to hang up. www.motorola.com/iden 64 FIRST DRAFT Recent Calls Recent Calls The Recent Calls feature stores the phone numbers of the 20 most recent calls you have made and received, including private and talkgroup calls. You can access Recent Calls to:

view your recent calls store numbers to the Phonebook delete recent calls call numbers on the Recent Calls list NOTE:The Recent Calls list displays briefly after you end a call. Viewing Recent Calls To view your Recent Calls list:

1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to scroll to Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press S to scroll the list of recent calls. If the number of the recent call is stored in your Phonebook, the name associated with the phone number appears on the Recent Calls list. For private calls, Talkgroup calls, and numbers stored in your Phonebook, an icon appears to the right of the name of number indicating the Phonebook type of the number used in the call. See Phonebook Icons on page 46 for more information about Phonebook types. For phone calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

N indicates an incoming call a indicates an outgoing call V indicates a missed call. (Missed calls appear on your Recent Calls list only if you have Caller ID.) FIRST DRAFT 65 For private calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

h indicates a Private Call

% indicates a Group Call Getting Detailed Information About Recent Calls To get more information about a recent call:

1 2 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want more information on. Press B under VIEW. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. The screen that appears displays information such as the name associated with the phone number of the recent call, the phone number, the date, time, and duration of the call. Storing a Recent Call Number to the Phonebook To store a number from the Recent Calls list to the Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the number you want to store. Press B under STORE. This displays the Phonebook Entry Details screen with the # field filled in with the number of the recent call. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow applicable the instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. www.motorola.com/iden 66 FIRST DRAFT Recent Calls Calling From the Recent Calls List See Making Calls from the Recent Calls List on page 61. Deleting Recent Calls To delete a recent call:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want to delete. Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. To delete all calls on the Recent Calls list:

1 2 3 4 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. Accessing Voice Record* From Recent Calls You can access the Voice Record feature from Recent Calls and use it to record spoken messages that you can listen to later

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase.. 1 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. FIRST DRAFT 67 2 3 Press S to scroll to New Voice Record. Press B under SELECT. Hands-Free Speakerphone*

This feature provides the convenience of a hands-free solution, allowing you to hold impromptu meetings and place safer phone calls. The speakerphone option

(SPEAKER) is available whenever you are on an active phone.

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. NOTE:During speakerphone operation, you may either speak or listen, but you cannot do both at the same time. To turn the speakerphone on:

While on an active call, press B under SPEAKER. While speakerphone is on, Spkrphone On appears in the text display area. To turn the speakerphone off:

Press B under SPEAKER. Mute Use the Mute feature to listen to incoming audio without allowing sound from your phones microphone to be transmitted over the phone line. To turn mute on:

Press B under MUTE. While mute is on, UNMUTE appears as a display option. To turn mute off:

Press B under UNMUTE. www.motorola.com/iden 68 FIRST DRAFT Missed Calls Missed Calls Missed calls are shown on the display screen with the missed call icon V. Call Timers Call Timers measure the duration of your phone calls, Private or Group calls, and circuit data use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone. The Call Timers menu displays the following options:

Last Call displays the duration of your most recent phone call. Phone Reset keeps a running total of your phone call minutes, until you reset it. Phone Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your phone calls. Prvt/Grp Reset keeps a running total of all of your Private and Group call minutes, until you reset it. Prvt/Grp Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your Private and Groups calls. Circuit Reset keeps a running total of all of your circuit data use, until you reset it. Circuit Lifetime displays the total minutes of all of your circuit data use. Kbytes Reset keeps a running total of the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone, until you reset it. To view the Call Timers menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Timers. Press B under SELECT. To view or reset a Call Timers option:

1 From the Call Timers menu, press S to scroll to the Call Timers option you want to view or reset. FIRST DRAFT 69 2 3 Press B under SELECT. If the feature does not include an option to reset or you do not wish to reset the option, press A under DONE when you are finished viewing. To reset a feature, press B under RESET. When the confirmation screen appears, press A under YES to confirm the reset. NOTE:The values displayed by Call Timers are not intended for billing purposes. Call timers are estimates only. Call Waiting Call Waiting allows you to receive a second call while you are talking on the phone. You can switch between calls so you never have to miss a call. By default, Call Waiting is always on unless you turn it off for a specific call. If youre on a call and you receive a second call, you will:

Hear a tone; and See a message on your display informing you of another incoming call. e Accepting Calls Press B under YES. The first call is placed on hold. To end the active call and accept the second call, press e. www.motorola.com/iden 70 FIRST DRAFT Call Hold Switching Between Calls When you accept a second call while you are talking on the phone, your display shows the name or number of each call. An icon appears to the left of each name or number indicating that the call on hold V or active D. Press B under SWITCH to switch between calls. Declining Calls Press A under NO. If you subscribe to Voice Mail, the call will be forwarded to your Voice Mail box. Ending the Active Call Press e. Turning Off Call Waiting If you do not want to be interrupted during a call, you can turn Call Waiting off prior to making/receiving a call. 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings, and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to In Call Setup and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Call Waiting and press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT. Call Waiting is now disabled for the next call. It will automatically reset to On when you hang up. Call Hold When you are on an active call, you can place the call on hold and make a second call. FIRST DRAFT 71 To place an active call on hold:

1 2 3 4 Press m to access the Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Hold. Press B under SELECT. If you have not placed a second call, you can resume this call by pressing B under RESUME. To place a second call while the first call is on hold:

Enter the second phone number you want to call and press s to place the second call. Or, access the number from your Phonebook:

Press m and then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. To place the call, see Making Calls from the Phonebook on page 60. To toggle between the two calls:

Press B under SWITCH. To end the active call:

Press e. The call on hold becomes active. Three-Way Calling Using Three-Way Calling, you can combine two ongoing phone calls into one conversation. While on an active call, you can make a second call and combine the two calls. When you place or receive a phone call, the 3-WAY option appears in the bottom right-hand corner of the display screen. www.motorola.com/iden 72 FIRST DRAFT To make a three-way call:

Call Forwarding Place or receive a phone call. 1 2 While in a call, press mto access Call Menu. 3 4 5 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. The first call will be placed on hold. Enter the second phone number you want to call and press s to place the second call. Or, access the number from your Phonebook:

Press m and then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. To place the call, see Making Calls from the Phonebook on page 60. 6 After you reach the second individual, press m. 7 8 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. Both calls will appear on your display. Call Forwarding Call Forwarding forwards calls to the number you designate. The following Call Forwarding options are available:

Off No calls are forwarded. All Calls When this option is turned on, all calls will be sent automatically to a number you specify. Detailed Choosing this option enables you to forward calls you missed to different numbers, or to Voice Mail, depending on why you missed each call:

Busy your phone is engaged in other activities. No Answer you do not answer. The phone will ring 4 times before forwarding the call. Unreachable your phone is out of coverage or powered off. FIRST DRAFT 73 NOTE:For you to receive Voice Mail messages, the All Calls option must be set to Off and the Detailed options must be set to your Voice Mail access number. Your Voice Mail access number is the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number followed by 6245. This is the default setting. You can forward Line 1 and Line 2 independently. When your phone is set to forward all calls, one of the following icons appears on the top row of your display screen to indicate the call forwarding option you have chosen:

Icon Indicates... G H I J K L Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. NOTE:Call Forwarding must be set to Detailed with the Voice Mail access number to receive Voice Mail messages. This is the default setting. Turning On Call Forwarding 1 2 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 74 FIRST DRAFT Call Forwarding 3 At the Call Forward screen, the Forward field is highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. 4 5 6 7 Press S to scroll to All Calls. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. To activate a call forwarding number:

If you have never used Call Forwarding before, the Forward screen appears. To enter a call forwarding number, type the number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. Or, If you have used Call Forwarding before, the call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE to access the Forward screen. To forward your calls to this number, press B under OK. To forward your calls to a different number, press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. Type the new number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. Your calls will now be forwarded to the number that you selected. Turning Off Call Forwarding 1 2 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field highlighted. FIRST DRAFT 75 3 4 Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT.

You will now receive all calls on your phone. When you are unavailable, your calls will be forwarded according to your Detailed call forwarding settings. By default, the Detailed option is set to forward your calls to Voice Mail. Setting Call Forwarding to Voice Mail In most cases, turning off Call Forwarding restores your ability to receive Voice Mail messages when you are unavailable (see Turning Off Call Forwarding on page 77). If you have completed those steps but are still not able to receive Voice Mail messages, you can reset Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. For you to receive Voice Mail messages, Call Forwarding must be set to Detailed with your Voice Mail access number:

1 2 3 4 5 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field set to Detailed. Press R to scroll to the If Busy field and press B under CHANGE. The call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE. If this is your Voice Mail access number (the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number followed by 6245), go to step 7. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. www.motorola.com/iden 76 FIRST DRAFT Call Forwarding 6 7 8 Enter your Voice Mail access number. Your Voice Mail access number is the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number, followed by 6245. (For example 7035556245.) Press B under OK. Repeat step 3 through step 7 for the If No Answer field and the If Unreachable field. 9 When finished, press A under EXIT. FIRST DRAFT 77 www.motorola.com/iden 78 FIRST DRAFT The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Message Center Voice Mail Text and Numeric Messaging Net Alert Using Your Phone as a Modem Messages Page 83 Page 84 Page 86 Page 88 Page 89 Message Center The Message Center enables you to access all messaging services through one screen. To access the Message Center:

If MESG is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press B under MESG. If MESG is not one of your display options:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Messages. Press B under SELECT. The Message Center screen displays the number of messages you have in each message service Voice Mail (Voice Mail), Text Msgs (Text and Numeric Messages), and Net Alert. FIRST DRAFT 83 To access any message service:

1 2 From the Message Center screen, press R to scroll to the message service you want to access. Press B under the display option on the right. This option varies depending on the message service selected. Voice Mail New Message Indicators When you receive a new message:

New Voice Mail Message will display on the screen. f Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under CALL or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Transferring Calls to Voice Mail Press A under NO while your phone is ringing to transfer incoming calls directly to Voice Mail. www.motorola.com/iden 84 FIRST DRAFT Using Voice Mail Logging Into Voice Mail 1 From the Ready screen, press B under MESG to open up the Message Center screen. 2 Voice Mail should be highlighted to indicate that it is selected. If it isnt highlighted, press S to scroll to the Voicemail field. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Using Voice Mail A g 3 Press B under CALL to log into your Carriers Voice Mail System. Calling displays as you are connected to the network. FIRST DRAFT 85 Text and Numeric Messaging With Text and Numeric Messaging, your phone will:

Allow numeric messages up to 20 characters in length and text (alpha) messages up to 140 characters in length. Accept your messages even if you are unavailable, if your phone is turned off, or if you are busy on another call. Alert you of a new text or numeric message, even if you are on another call. Store a message if you are making a Private or Group call and deliver it upon completion of the call. Store the message if you are outside of the coverage area and deliver it as soon as you are back in a coverage area. Attempt continuous delivery of messages until successful, for up to 7 days. With Text and Numeric Messaging, your phone will:

Refer to text and numeric messages as Text Messages. Stamp the message with the time and date the message was left. Store up to 16 messages at a time, that will remain until you delete them. NOTE:Mail Waiting, Memory Full displays when 16 message registers are full. (Messages must be erased before you can receive others.) Allow for Auto Call Back of a phone number that is included within a message, by pressing s. If the message contains two phone numbers, Auto Call Back will dial the last number. www.motorola.com/iden 86 FIRST DRAFT Text and Numeric Messaging New Messages Indicators When you receive a new message:

New Text Message will display on the screen. i Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under READ or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Accessing New Messages When you receive a message, you can view it immediately or later:

View a Message Immediately 1 2 3 Press B under READ. The message displays. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. Viewing a Message Later Press A under EXIT. The . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. FIRST DRAFT 87 Viewing Stored Messages 1 2 3 4 5 In the Message Center screen, press S to scroll down to Text Msgs. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Press B under SELECT. The Text Msg Inbox screen appears. Press S to scroll to the message you want to read and press B under READ. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. from your i58sr Phone from a web site provided by your service provider from any email application Net Alert With Net Alert, you can send text and numeric messages in any of three ways:

When you receive a new message:

Words will display on your phones display screen indicating that you have a Net Alert message. (The exact words displayed are determined by your service provider.) Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until your press B to access the message or press A to exit the screen. If you choose to exit the screen and view the message later, the . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. You can view new or stored Net Alert messages at any time by access the Message Center. For more information, see Message Center on page 83. www.motorola.com/iden 88 FIRST DRAFT Using Your Phone as a Modem Using Your Phone as a Modem NOTE: Some features may be network dependent or subscription only, and may not be available in all areas. Contact your service provider for more information. You can use your i58sr phone as a modem for data transfer from your laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer. This is particularly useful when there is no wired phone line (wall jack) available. You simply attach a data cable (available separately) to your phone and your computer. From that point, your phone is your modem. This allows you to send or receive time-critical information such as email, a field service report, or files. In addition, you can also send or receive faxes. This type of wireless connection uses one of two types of data connection:

circuit-switched data and packet data. Circuit-switched data is typically used for sending and receiving faxes and for transferring large files. Packet data is used for small file transfers such as email. To use these services, you must install the iDEN Wireless Data Services software (available separately). For more information on setting up your computer and your i58sr phone for Packet and Circuit Data calls, see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide and contact your carrier. TTY Users You can use your phone and computer in TTY mode. Your computer screen and keyboard replace the standard TTY device. For more information, please see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide. FIRST DRAFT 89 www.motorola.com/iden 90 FIRST DRAFT Private Calls The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Private Call Call Alerts Group Call Page 91 Page 93 Page 98 Private Call There are two ways to reach an individual using Private calls. You can enter the persons Private ID number then press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. Or, you can store the persons name and Private ID number, then recall the number from your Phonebook. Whether you dial the persons Private ID directly or store it in your Phonebook, you must have the individuals Private ID to use Private calls. To learn how to store names and numbers, see Phonebook on page 45. USER TIP:To find out your own Private ID number, see My Information on page 30. Making a Private Call from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you are trying to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call from the Phonebook If you have stored a persons Private ID in your Phonebook, you can use your Phonebook to make a Private call to that person:

1 2 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 91 3 4 5 From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll through the names until the desired name is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call from the Recent Call List 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll through the names and numbers until the desired name or Private ID number is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Receiving a Private Call When you receive a Private call, your phone emits a chirping sound and Private in Use appears on the screen. The Private ID or the name of the caller (if stored in your Phonebook) displays. Press and hold the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Storing Private IDs For information store Private ID numbers to your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51. www.motorola.com/iden 92 FIRST DRAFT Call Alerts For information on how to quickly store Private ID numbers, see Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly on page 54. 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll through the names and numbers until the desired name or Private ID number is highlighted. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Making Calls Using Voice-Activated Dialing If you have recorded a voice name for a Private ID in your Phonebook, Adding Phonebook Entries (see Page 48), you can use this voice name to call the number 1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the Private ID you want to call. 3 Your phone will play the name back to you. Press the PTT button. USER TIP:If you have difficulty making phone calls using a voice name, try assigning a longer voice name to the number. For example, if the voice name Joe fails to place a call to Joe Smiths number, try assigning the voice name Joe Smith to the number. Call Alerts You can send a call alert, which lets recipients know that you would like to talk with them. When you send an alert, the recipient will receive a series of beeps and your name or Private ID will appear on the display. FIRST DRAFT 93 Placing a Call Alert from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you want to call. Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen displays. Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. Placing a Call Alert from the Phonebook 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll down to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the Phonebook entry for the person you want to alert. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen appears. V Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. www.motorola.com/iden 94 FIRST DRAFT Call Alerts Ready to Alert Screen Ready to Alert is used to confirm your request for the alert and to prompt you to push the PTT button:

If you press the PTT button, the call alert is sent, and the phone displays the Recent Calls screen. For call alerts placed from the keypad, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Dial screen with the previously entered number displayed. For call alerts placed from the Phonebook, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Phonebook screen. If you do nothing, the phone will revert to the Ready screen. Receiving Call Alerts When you receive a call alert, your phone emits a chirp and displays the name or number of the caller. You can answer, queue, or clear the call alert:

To answer a call alert, press the PTT button. To queue a call alert, press B under QUEUE. To clear the call alert, press A under CLEAR. Call Alert Queue Call alert queuing enables you to save call alerts in a list, or queue. To store a call alert in the call alert queue, press B under QUEUE when you have received an incoming call alert. Accessing the Call Alert Queue 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. The Call Alert Queue screen displays. FIRST DRAFT 95 Viewing Call Alert Date and Time To find out the date and time a call alert was received:

1 2 3 4 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the desired call alert. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to View. Press B under SELECT. Sorting Call Alerts To sort your call alerts by the order they were received:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press S to scroll to Sort By. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to First on Top or Last on Top. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 96 FIRST DRAFT Call Alerts Responding to a Call Alert From the Queue 1 2 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. You can respond by sending a call alert or placing a Private call. To send a call alert, press B under ALERT and then press the PTT button. Or, To place a Private call, press the PTT button. The call alert will be removed from the queue. Deleting a Call Alert From the Queue To delete a call alert from the queue:

1 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. 2 3 4 5 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete Press B to SELECT. all call alerts. To delete all call alerts from the queue:

1 2 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. FIRST DRAFT 97 Press B to SELECT. 3 4 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete the entry. Group Call In a Group call, you can communicate instantly with a group of people that you have previously set up as a Talkgroup. Your sales representative must set up your Talkgroups by providing you with a Talkgroup number for each Talkgroup. After you have the number, you can assign each Talkgroup number a name and store it in your phone (see Naming a Talkgroup on page 98). Talkgroups appear on your display as numbers or programmed names such as SALES TEAM or Talkgrp 5. Your phone can store up to 30 Talkgroups. You can initiate or participate in Group calls for Talkgroups that have been created for you and that are stored in your Phonebook. Naming a Talkgroup 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to New Entry. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Enter the information as you would any other Phonebook entry. (See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 51.) When you get to Type, make sure that you select Talkgroup. Enter the Talkgroup name or number. 7 8 When you have completed the Entry Details, press A under DONE. www.motorola.com/iden 98 FIRST DRAFT Group Call Making a Group Call from the Keypad 1 2 3 Press # and then enter the Talkgroup number of the group that you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone or press B under ALERT, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Group Call from the Phonebook 1 2 3 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone or press B under ALERT, and speak. The phones of the people in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Group Call from the Recent Calls List 1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone or press B under ALERT, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Receiving a Group Call When you receive an incoming Group call, your phone emits a chirp. To respond to a Group call:

FIRST DRAFT 99 1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Joining a Talkgroup To receive Group calls from a Talkgroup, you must first join the Talkgroup. You may only belong to one Talkgroup at a time. When you join a new Talkgroup, you no longer belong to your previous Talkgroup. To join an ongoing Talkgroup:

1 Using the keypad, press # then enter the Talkgroup number. Or, From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Or, If the Talkgroup you want to join is on your Recent Call list, go to the Recent Call screen and press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. 2 Press B under JOIN. Group-Silent Programming Group-Silent programming enables you to silence incoming Group alerts and communication. Turning Group-Silent On or Off 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Tkgrp Settings. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 100 FIRST DRAFT Group Call 4 With the Silent field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. 5 6 Press S to scroll to On or Off. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 101 www.motorola.com/iden 102 FIRST DRAFT

exhibit
download
text

1 2 3

Ex8 User Manual 2of 2 i58sr

Users Manual

pdf

1.21 MiB

May 07 2002

Assisted Global Positioning System Your phones AGPS feature uses information from satellites orbiting the Earth to calculate the exact geographical location, or position, of your phone. When you make an emergency call, your phones position is automatically transmitted to emergency workers to help them locate you. You can use the AGPS feature to view your phones position at any time. Java applications loaded on your phone can also read your phones position. You can set your AGPS privacy options to control which, if any, Java applications are permitted to read your phones position. You can even remove the GPS option from your main menu, so that your phones position is only calculated for use by emergency workers when you make an emergency call. This section includes:

Page 103 Page 104 Page 105 Page 106 Page 107 Accessing the AGPS Feature Viewing Your Position Setting Privacy Options Setting Data Flow Removing GPS from the Main Menu Accessing the AGPS Feature To the AGPS feature:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to GPS. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 103 Viewing Your Position To view your AGPS position:

1 2 3 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Position. Press B under SELECT. To view the entire displayed screen, press S to scroll. This displays the following information about the last time your phones position was calculated:

the time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date that the position was last calculated. the position, expressed as latitude and longitude. the number of satellites used to calculated the position. the estimated accuracy of the calculated position (for example, the calculated position may be accurate within 50 feet of your phones actual position). To calculate your phones position again:

Press B under RFRSH. The Position screen displays the updated information. To cancel a position calculated before it is completed::

Press e. Each time your phones position is calculated, the latest position information is stored in your phone and remains there even when your phone is powered off. You will see this information the next time you view the Position screen. If you received a phone call, Private call, or any kind of alert while attempting the calculate your phones position, the Position screen will disappear, but your phone will continue to calculate its position. The next time you view the Position screen, the new position information will be displayed. www.motorola.com/iden 104 FIRST DRAFT Setting Privacy Options Setting Privacy Options Your AGPS privacy options control whether Java applications on your phone may read your phones GPS position.You may set your phone to one of three AGPS privacy option:

Restricted No Java applications may read your phones position. Unrestricted All Java applications may read your phones position, without notifying you. By Permission When a Java application attempts to read your phones position, you will be prompted to give permission. To set your AGPS privacy options:

1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Privacy. Press B under SELECT. If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled, enter your GPS PIN. (See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 105 for more information.) Press S to scroll to the privacy setting you want. Press B under SELECT. Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy option can be protected by a PIN. When you receive your phone, the GPS security feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If you turn this feature on, you will be required to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. To turn the GPS security feature on of off:

1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 105 4 5 Press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the GPS PIN requirement;

Off disables the SIM PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE:When your receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. To change your GPS PIN:

Press B under SELECT. 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 4 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press Press R to scroll to New Passwords and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old GPS PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE:When your receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 7 At the Enter New GPS PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New GPS PIN Code screen, re-enter the new GPS PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. Setting Data Flow You can control NMEA data flow through the accessory connector at the bottom of your phone. Each time you power your phone on, NMEA data flow is automatically set to Off. www.motorola.com/iden 106 FIRST DRAFT To set NMEA On, or set it back to Off without powering off the phone:

Removing GPS from the Main Menu 1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Interface. Press B under SELECT. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to On or Off. Press B under SELECT. Removing GPS from the Main Menu If your remove the GPS option from your main menu, you will not be able to view your phones position and no Java application will be able to read your phones position. Your phones position will only be available to emergency workers, only when you make on emergency call. If information on how to remove the GPS option from your main menu, go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate. FIRST DRAFT 107 www.motorola.com/iden 108 FIRST DRAFT Datebook The Datebook is a calendar in your i58sr phone that enables you to schedule and organize events, such as appointments and meetings. Schedules can be created and viewed for specific days, and reminder alarms can be set so that you never miss important events. You can view upcoming events by week or by day. The Datebook stores and manages 250 events over a 13-month period (12 months ahead and 1 month back). NOTE:The time and date format and the year used in Datebook can be set by you. Before using Datebook for the first time, ensure that the current year is correct. See Initial Setup on page 142 for more information. This section includes:

Datebook Icons Viewing Your Datebook About Datebook Events Adding New Events Editing Events Deleting Events Datebook Event Reminders Customizing Datebook Set Up Page 110 Page 110 Page 112 Page 113 Page 117 Page 117 Page 118 Page 118 FIRST DRAFT 109 Datebook Icons There are several icons commonly used in the Datebook application:

Symbol Description C f j I G Event without a start/

end time More options are available Recurring Appointment Datebook Alarm Used to move through fields when setting a time and date. Viewing Your Datebook To access your Datebook:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Datebook. Press B under SELECT. Information in your Datebook can be viewed in three ways: by the week, by the day, or by the event. This information is structured hierarchically. When you access the Datebook, it displays the current week. You can select a day to view and display the events of that day. When the events of a day are displayed, you can select an event to view and display details of that event. www.motorola.com/iden 110 FIRST DRAFT Viewing Your Datebook Days of week Displayed week Eventsc Viewing a Week When you access your Datebook, the current week is displayed. You can scroll to other weeks by pressing S. The dates of the displayed week appear at the top of the text area of your phones screen. Below the dates are letters indicating the days of the week. When you access your Datebook, the current day is highlighted. You can scroll to other days by pressing T. Below each letter is a 12-hour time window for each day. Scheduled events are shown within the time window in black. A small bar between the letter and the time window indicates an event on that day that does not have a time of day associated with it, such as a birthday. Viewing a Day To view a day in your Datebook:

1 With a week displayed, select the day you want to view by pressing T until the letter for that day is highlighted. 2 Press B under VIEW. The day and date appear at the top of the text display area. Events for the day selected are listed by time. Events without times are displayed at the top of the list with a bullet to the left of them. FIRST DRAFT 111 Viewing Event Details To view the details of an event:

1 2 3 Select and view the day containing the event you want to view. Press S to scroll to the event. Press B under VIEW. This displays event details such as day of week, time, title, duration, alarm time, and repeat cycle. For more information about events, see About Datebook Events on page 112. Viewing Today You can easily go to the current day when viewing your Datebook:

1 While viewing any week, day, or event, press m. This displays the Datebook Menu with Go to Today highlighted. 2 Press B under SELECT. About Datebook Events Each Datebook event may contain the following information:

The title you assign to the event. You can enter a title using the phones alphanumeric keypad or choose from a list of commonly used titles. A title is required for every event (maximum of 128 characters). Additional text following the events title. The start time and duration of the event. The date of the event. An option to repeat the event in your Datebook. An alarm to notify you of the event before it begins. The style you want your phone to use when the event occurs. See Customizing the i58sr Phone on page 133 for more information. www.motorola.com/iden 112 FIRST DRAFT Adding New Events Adding New Events Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Event Form screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Event Form screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Event Form screen. Only a title and a date are required for a valid event. To cancel a Datebook event entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. To add a Datebook event:

1 Access the Event Form screen:

While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to New. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen displays with the Title field highlighted. b 2 With the Title field highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access the Title screen. 3 Assign a title to the event:

Press B under BROWSE to choose from a list of commonly used event titles. Press S to scroll to the title you want and press B under SELECT. Or, Type the title using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for information about entering text into this field. You can also enter a description of the appointment or any other text. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Event Form screen returns with the Start field highlighted. FIRST DRAFT 113 4 If you want to assign a time of day to the event:

With the Start field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Start screen, enter the time the event will begin. Type in the start time, or press S to scroll through the hours, minutes, and am, pm, or 24 hour clock. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Duration field highlighted. 5 After you have assigned a start time to the event, you can specify the duration of the event. The default duration is one hour. To assign a different duration:

With the Duration field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Duration screen, press R to scroll to the desired duration. If you select None, the event will have a duration of zero minutes. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen returns with the StartDate field highlighted. 6 The default date assigned to an event is the day that was highlighted when you accessed the Event Form screen to add the event. To assign a different date:

With the StartDate field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the StartDate screen, enter the date of the event:

Type in the date, or press S to scroll through the months, days, and years. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Repeat field highlighted. www.motorola.com/iden 114 FIRST DRAFT Adding New Events 7 If you want the event to recur in your Datebook, assign a repeat cycle to it:

With the Repeat field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. NOTE:When Repeat is set to none or yearly, it will not be possible to access the Repeat End field. From the Repeat screen, press S to scroll to the desired repeat cycle. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen returns with the RepeatEnd field highlighted. Press B under CHANGE and enter the date on which you want the event to stop repeating. When you have finished, press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Alarm field highlighted. 8 If you want to set an alarm to remind you that the event is approaching:

With the Alarm field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Press B under SELECT. Y From the Alarm screen, press S to scroll to the desired alarm option. FIRST DRAFT 115 9 If you want your phone to change to a style you have defined when the event occurs (see Customizing the i58sr Phone on page 133):

With MORE highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Style field appears. Press B under CHANGE. From the Style screen, you see a list of styles you have created. Press S to scroll to the desired style. Press B under SELECT. 10 When you have entered all the desired information about the event, press A under DONE. h X www.motorola.com/iden 116 FIRST DRAFT Editing Events Editing Events 1 If you are viewing the week containing the event:

Press B under EDIT. Or, If you are viewing the day containing the event:

Press m to display the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press then B under SELECT. 2 Follow the applicable instructions in Adding New Events on page 113, to edit the various fields. Deleting Events 1 View the day containing the event and press S to scroll to the event you want to delete. Or, View the details of the event you want to delete. Press m. The Datebook Menu displays. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. If the event is a recurring event, the Delete Event screen appears:

To delete only the occurrence of the event you select in step 1, leave This Event Only highlighted. To delete all occurrences of the event, press R to highlight Repeat Events. Press B under SELECT. If the event is a recurring event, a confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. 2 3 4 5 FIRST DRAFT 117 Datebook Event Reminders If you have set an alarm to remind you that a Datebook event is approaching, your phone sounds an audible alarm and displays a reminder. NOTE:You must have the Time and Date display turned on to receive event reminders. This is the default setting. When a Datebook event reminder appears on the screen:

Or, Press A under VIEW to view more information about the Datebook event. Press A under EXIT to dismiss the event reminder. F Customizing Datebook Set Up Datebook allows you to customize some of its set up features:

DailyBegin sets the beginning time of the 12-hour day your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. Reminder controls the behavior of alarms you have set in Datebook:

Active Only sets Datebook to ignore alarms that occur when your phone is powered off. Delayed If Off sets Datebook to delay alarms that occur when your phone is powered off until your phone is next powered on. Weekday sets the first day of the week your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. DeleteAfter controls how long your Datebook waits to delete an event after it has occurred. www.motorola.com/iden 118 FIRST DRAFT Customizing Datebook Set Up To customize your Datebook set up:

1 While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. 2 3 Press S to scroll to Setup and then press B under SELECT Press R to scroll to any of the set-up features. Press B under CHANGE. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. FIRST DRAFT 119 www.motorola.com/iden 120 FIRST DRAFT Memo The Memo application provides you with a place to store a numeric note in your i58sr phone. This section includes:

Adding a New Memo Viewing a Memo Editing a Memo Deleting a Memo Page 121 Page 121 Page 122 Page 122 Adding a New Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. The Memo screen displays. Type your numeric memo using the phones keypad. Press B under STORE. Viewing a Memo 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 121 Editing a Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Type the new number. You can delete a digit by pressing A under DELETE. To all the digits, press and hold A under DELETE. Press B under STORE. Deleting a Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Press and hold A under DELETE. Press B under STORE. www.motorola.com/iden 122 FIRST DRAFT Voice Record*

The Voice Record feature of your i58sr phone enables you to record and play back personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls on your i58sr phone.

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. This section includes:

About Voice Record Accessing Voice Record Recording a Voice Record Playing a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record Labeling a Voice Record Deleting a Voice Record Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Voice Record Memory Page 123 Page 123 Page 124 Page 124 Page 125 Page 125 Page 126 Page 126 Page 127 About Voice Record Your phone can store up to 20 Voice Records, with a total time of about three minutes, depending on available memory. Accessing Voice Record To access the Voice Record feature:

1 From the Ready screen, press m. FIRST DRAFT 123 2 3 Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT. Recording a Voice Record NOTE:Recording of phone calls is subject to varying State and Federal laws regarding privacy and recording of phone conversations. To record a personal message as a Voice Record:

1 2 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to [New VoiceRec]. Press B under RECORD and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 3 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. To record the incoming portion of a call as a Voice Record:

1 While on an active call, press m. 2 3 Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT to record the incoming portion of the call. Your own voice will not be recorded. 4 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. Playing a Voice Record 1 2 3 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to play. Press B under PLAY. To stop the Voice Record while it is playing, press A under BACK. www.motorola.com/iden 124 FIRST DRAFT Adding to a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record After you create a Voice Record, you can record more at the end of the existing Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to add to. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Add To. Press B under SELECT and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 5 When you are finished recording, press B under STOP. Labeling a Voice Record When you create a Voice Record, it is labeled with the time and date it was recorded. After a Voice Record has been recorded, you can re-name it with a custom label. To label a Voice Record:

1 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to name. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. 2 3 4 At the Enter Label screen, enter a label for the Voice Record using the Press R to scroll to Label and press B under SELECT. alphanumeric keypad. 5 Press B under OK. FIRST DRAFT 125 Deleting a Voice Record To delete a Voice Record:

1 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to delete. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. 2 3 4 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. To delete all unlocked Voice Record:

From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. 1 2 3 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. Press R to scroll to Delete All and press B under SELECT. Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Locking a Voice Record prevents it from being deleted. When a Voice Record is locked, the locked icon M appears next to it. To lock or unlock a Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to lock or unlock. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Lock or Unlock. Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden 126 FIRST DRAFT Voice Record Memory Voice Record Memory Typically, you can store 20 Voice Record with a total time of about three minutes. To check the amount of memory available for Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Memory. Press B under SELECT to display the Memory Meter screen. The memory meter shows the amount of Voice Record memory space currently in use. It fills in from left to right as your Voice Record memory space fills up. From the Memory Meter screen, you can free more Voice Record memory space by pressing B under DELETE to delete all unlocked Voice Record. A confirmation screen displays. Press A under YES to confirm. NOTE:Because Voice Record is stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Java applications, using a large amount of memory to store Java applications reduces the space available for Voice Record. When this occurs, deleting Java applications from your phones memory frees memory space for Voice Records. For more information about Java applications stored in your phone, see Java on page 129. FIRST DRAFT 127 www.motorola.com/iden 128 FIRST DRAFT Java The Java feature of your i58sr phone runs programs, or applications, written in the Java 2 Micro Edition programming language. The phone comes with Java applications downloaded and ready for installation. You can choose to order or purchase Java applications and download them into your phone via the Internet. For more information, see Downloading Java Applications on page 131. This section includes:

Accessing Java Menu Installing Java Applications Running Java Applications Downloading Java Applications Java Memory Deinstalling Java Applications Page 129 Page 130 Page 130 Page 131 Page 131 Page 132 IMPORTANT:

To avoid personal injury, do not play games on your i58sr phone when operating machines or driving vehicles. Accessing Java Menu To access the Java menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Java Apps. Press B under SELECT. The Java menu displays all of your Java applications. FIRST DRAFT 129 Installing Java Applications To install a Java application:

1 2 3 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the desired application. To determine whether the application needs to be installed, look at the display options on the screen. If the display option is RUN or SELECT, the application is already installed and ready to run. See Running Java Applications on page 130. If the display option is INSTALL, press B under INSTALL to install the application. The screen will display a series of installation steps. A checkmark will appear as each step is completed. This may take several minutes. When your phone has finished installing the application, press A under DONE. Running Java Applications To run an application:

1 2 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the application you want to run. Press B under RUN or SELECT. NOTE: If you receive an incoming phone call, the Java application will be suspended. To suspend a running application:

Press e. www.motorola.com/iden 130 FIRST DRAFT Downloading Java Applications To resume a suspended application:

Press B under RESUME. To stop running an application:

Press e and then press A under EXIT. Downloading Java Applications You can customize your phone by ordering additional Java applications via the iDEN Update Website. Please go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of applications available and downloading instructions. You can download these applications by connecting your phone to a PC using a data cable and the iDEN Update Software Application. NOTE: This is network subscription dependent feature. Please check with your Service Provider for availability. Java Memory In order to download, store and run the application of your choice, you must have enough Data and Program memory available in your phone. Data memory refers to the memory needed to download an application to your phone. Program memory refers to the memory needed to install and run an application on your phone. To check how much memory your phone has available for Java applications:

1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press S to scoll to Java Apps. Press B under SELECT. From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to Java System. Press B under SELECT. Press B under NEXT to go to the Java System screen. The Data Space and Prog. Space information will be available. FIRST DRAFT 131 You may free more Data Memory and Program Memory space by deinstalling an application that you do not wish to use. Deinstalled applications that were obtained from iDEN Update may be redownloaded at a later time at no cost. For information on deinstalling, see Deinstalling Java Applications on page 132. NOTE: Java applications are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Voice Records. Using a large amount of data memory to store Voice Records reduces the data memory available for downloading of Java applications. When this occurs, deleting Voice Records from your phones data memory space will free memory space for Java applications. Deinstalling Java Applications To remove a Java application from your phone:

1 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to the application you want to remove. Press m. Press R to scroll to DEINSTALL. 2 3 4 5 Press A under YES. A warning screen displays. Press A under OK. 6 When your phone has finished deinstalling the application, press A Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. under DONE. www.motorola.com/iden 132 FIRST DRAFT Customizing the i58sr Phone You can customize your i58sr phone to fit the way you want to use it. This section includes:

Settings Styles Shortcuts Page 133 Page 150 Page 155 Settings Using Settings, you can set or change a wide variety of your phones features. To access Settings:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. From the Settings screen, you can access these Settings options:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings or vibrates when you receive calls and messages. Phone Setup sets call-answering features, turns off non-telephone features, chooses which phone line is used, and sets your network ID. In Call Setup sets call timer, message notification, and call waiting features. Security sets security features including phone lock, keypad lock, and SIM PIN. Personalize controls which features are most accessible when you turn on your phone. Initial Setup sets a variety of display features including the language displayed, the size of the characters on the text screen, time and date formats, current year, backlight, status light, and scrolling. Also turns auto redial on or off and sets baud rate. FIRST DRAFT 133 VoiceVolume sets the volume of your phones earpiece and speaker. Tkgrp sets certain Talkgroup options. Service Status shows the status of your phones services. To access any of these options:

1 From the Settings screen, press R to scroll to the option you want to access. Press B under SELECT. 2 3 With the Type field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 Press R to scroll to the notification type you want to assign to the feature. 5 To assign the notification type, press B under SELECT. Many of these options have other options within them. Press S to scroll through the lists of options, and press A to select and modify options and the features, according to the instructions on your phones screen. For some options, you can also press T to select sub-options. In screens that show lists of options for a setting, a check mark to the left of the option indicates the current option for the setting. Ring/Vibe Ring/Vibe enables you to control how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and messages. You can set ring volume, choose ring styles, and use the VibraCall Alert feature which enables you to set your phone to alert you to calls and messages by vibrating. Main Options Ring/Vibe provides these main options:

Ringer Vol sets ring volume. Keypad Vol sets volume of sounds associated with keypad actions. Mail Vol sets volume of Text Message, Voice Mail, and Net Alert notifications. www.motorola.com/iden 134 FIRST DRAFT Settings Headset choosing the HdsetOnly option prevents sound from being emitted from the phones speaker when the headset is being used. VibeAll choosing On sets the phone to vibrate for all calls, messages, and alerts; choosing Off enables you set the type of notification for each these features. Ring Style and Notification Type When you set VibeAll to On, your phone vibrates to notify you of all types of calls, messages, and alerts. When you set VibeAll to Off, the following features display after VibeAll on the Ring/Vibrate screen, enabling you to set notification options for each:

To set VibeAll to Off or On:

Line 1 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 1. Line 2 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 2. Pvt/Grp sets type of notification for Private and Group calls. Call Alert sets the ring style and type of notification for call alerts. Text Msgs sets type of notification for Text Messages. Reminder sets type of notification for Datebook reminder alarms. Voicemail sets type of notification for Voice Mail messages. Netmail sets type of notification for Net Alert messages. 1 2 3 4 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, press S to scroll to the VibeAll:. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to Off or On. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 135 The following icons appear on the second row of your display screen to indicate the options you have chosen:

Icon

Indicates... Vibrate All phone is set to vibrate when you receive all types of calls, messages, and alerts; the VibeAll option is On. Vibrate On phone is set to vibrate when you receive phone calls. Vibrate Then Ring phone is set to vibrate and then ring when you receive phone calls. Silent phone is set not to ring. Notification Types When you set a notification type, you have these options:

Ring the phone rings to notify you. Vibe the phone vibrates to notify you. Vibe/Ring the phone vibrates and then rings to notify you. This option is only available for calls on Line 1 and Line 2. Silent the phone does not ring to notify you. To set a notification type:

1 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features on the Ring/Vibrate screen after VibeAll. Press B under SELECT. 2 3 With the Type field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 Press R to scroll to the notification type you want to assign to the feature. 5 To assign the notification type, press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 136 FIRST DRAFT Settings Ring Styles When you set a ring style, you can choose from any of nine pre-set ring styles. To set a ring style:

1 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features that allow you to set a ringer style: Line1, Line2, or Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. 2 3 With the Style field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 5 To assign the ring style, press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the ring style you want to assign to the feature. USER TIP:To hear the ring style you have selected, press the volume button on the side of your phone. Phone Setup Phone Setup sets some basic phone features. Access Phone Setup to set the following options:

Line enables you to choose Line 1 or Line 2 as the active line for outgoing calls. AutoAns sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail, unless you are out of coverage or on the line. Any Key when turned on, enables you to answer calls by pressing any key on the alphanumeric keypad. Phone Only when turned on, prevents your phone from making or receiving Private calls or Group calls. Network ID enables you to set the phones network IDs and their roaming options. FIRST DRAFT 137 In Call Setup In Call Setup sets the in-call timer, message notification, and call-waiting features. The In Call Timer option turns the following features on and off:

Display the duration of the current call displays on the phones screen. Minute Beep an audible beep occurs every minute of an active call. The Notifications option controls message notification during calls:

Msg Mail Only notifies you of mail messages only; all other types Receive All notifies you of all types of messages during calls. of message notifications are delayed until the call has ended. Delay All delays notification of all messages until the call has ended. Call Waiting enables you to turn off call waiting for the next call. After you hang up, call waiting is turned back on. Security Security allows you to set security features:

Phone Lock sets an optional code that locks your phone. Keypad Lock displays instructions for locking and unlocking your phones keypad. SIM PIN enables and disables your phones SIM PIN requirement. New Passwords enables you to change your phones security code, phone unlock code, and SIM PIN. Master Reset allows your service provider to reset your service in the event of a security or provisioning problem. Using Phone Lock The Phone Lock feature enables you to prevent your phone from being used unless an Unlock code is typed into the keypad. The Unlock code is required to enable the phone lock feature, to unlock the phone, and to set a new Unlock code. Contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. www.motorola.com/iden 138 FIRST DRAFT Settings Phone lock provides two options for locking the phone:

Lock Now locks the phone immediately after you set the option. Auto Lock locks the phone the next time the phone is powered on. Setting Keypad Lock The i58sr phone includes a keypad lock feature that enables you to lock your phones keypad to avoid inadvertantly pressing or replacing calls. See Keypad Lock on page 25 for more information on locking the keypad. Enabling and Disabling SIM PIN The SIM PIN option enables and disables the feature that requires a SIM PIN code to be typed into the phone to access the information on the SIM card and to make or receive calls. See SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) on page 18 for more information. Setting New Passwords The New Passwords option enables you to set three types of passwords that control access to your phone:

Unlock Code this code is used to control access to the phone using Phone Lock. It is also required to access the Master Clear and Feature Reset features. If you want to use any of these features, contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. Security Code this code is used to access the Master Reset feature under the direction of your service provider. It can also be used to override your Unlock code under the direction of your service provider. SIM PIN this code is used to access the information on your SIM card and to make or receive calls. When you get your phone, your SIM PIN is 0000. You should change this to a SIM PIN known only to you as soon as your get your phone. For information on changing your SIM PIN, see Changing the PIN on page 20. Using Master Reset The Master Reset option is provided for use only under the direction of your service provider. It resets your service. FIRST DRAFT 139 Personalize Personalize contains three options that control which major features are easiest to access when you turn on your phone:

Main Menu changes the order of the items on your main menu. Keys controls which main menu items appear above the two option keys on the Ready screen. Power Up App sets any of the programs on the main menu to run when you turn on your phone. Reordering Main Menu 1 From the Personalize screen with Main Menu highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Reorder Menu screen. Press B under GRAB. Press S to scroll to the main menu option you want to move. 2 3 4 5 When the item is where you would like it to appear in the main menu, Press S to move the option up or down in the list. press B under INSERT. 6 7 Repeat step 2 through step 5 for all main menu items you want to move. Press A under DONE. Changing Ready Screen Options Two options from the main menu always appear on your Ready screen above the left and right option keys. Each option can be accessed by pressing the corresponding option key. www.motorola.com/iden 140 FIRST DRAFT Settings Your phone arrives with Phonebook (PHBK) assigned to the left option key

(B) and Messages (MESG) assigned to the right option key (B). You can assign any Main Menu option you want to the option keys. 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Keys. Press B under SELECT. The Keys screen shows the option assigned to each option key (Left and Right). To change the option assigned to the left option key, press B under CHANGE while Left is highlighted. Press R to scroll to the option you want to assign to the left option key. Press B under SELECT. To change the option assigned to the right option key, press R to highlight Right and press B under CHANGE. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the right option key. Changing Power-Up Program Your phone is set to display the Ready screen when it is powered on. You can set the phone to display the main screen of any main menu option when it is powered on. 1 2 3 4 5 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Power Up App. Press B under SELECT. The Power Up App screen shows the name of the program or screen that currently appears when the phone is powered on. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the option you want to appear when the phone is powered on. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 141 Initial Setup Initial Setup enables you to control a variety of your phones features that you may want to modify when you first get your phone:

Time/Date Format sets the format in which the time and date display on your phone. Year sets the current year. NOTE: Changing the current year may affect stored Datebook events. Datebook stores events 12 month ahead and one month after the current date. Events outside this range will be deleted. See Datebook on page 109 for more information. Auto Redial turns the automatic redial feature on and off. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. Sensor controls the photo sensor to activate the backlight when your phone is in poor lighting conditions. Status Light controls whether the status light is on when the phone is on. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. Contrast controls how light or dark the screens appears. Scroll sets how you can scroll lists and menus. Language sets the language that your phone displays. Master Clear returns all settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Feature Reset returns all settings to their original defaults. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates with a laptop computer, PC, or similar device. TTY Setup sets TTY options. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device. TTY Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates when connected to a TTY device. Alert Timeout controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. Return to Home controls how long the Recent Calls screen displays before returing to the Ready screen after phone and private/group conversations. www.motorola.com/iden 142 FIRST DRAFT Settings Changing Time and Date Format Your phone displays times in 12-hour-clock format (12:00 am through 11:59 pm) or 24-hour-clock format (0:00 through 23:59). It displays dates in month/

day format or day/month format. NOTE:If you turn the time and date display off, no times are associated with calls on your Recent Calls list, and the alarm feature of your Datebook is disabled. To set the time and date format, or turn time and date display on or off:

1 2 From the Initial Setup screen with Time/Date Format highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Time/Date Format screen. To change the time format:

With Time Format highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access Time Format screen. Press S to highlight the time format you want. Press B under SELECT. 3 To change the date format:

Press S to highlight Date Format, and press B under CHANGE to access Date Format screen. Press S to highlight the date format you want. Press B under SELECT. 4 To turn the time and date format on or off:

Press R to highlight Display, and press B under CHANGE to access Display screen. Press S to choose Off or On. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 143 Setting Auto Redial When Auto Redial is set to On, if you receive a System Busy, Try Later message while making a call, the phone will redial the number automatically. You will hear a ring-back tone when a successful call is placed. When Auto Redial is set to Off, you must press and hold s to redial the last number dialed. Setting Backlight Timer The backlight illuminates the display when you receive or make calls. You can set the amount of time that the backlight stays on to 5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds, or set it to stay on continuously or stay off at all times. 1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Backlight. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired backlight option. Press B under SELECT. Setting Photo Sensor To conserve battery power, the photosensor will disable the backlight when you are in good lighting conditions. To force the backlight to come on every time a key is pressed, you can turn the photosensor off. NOTE: Setting the Backlight to come on continuously while the Photosensor is turned on will drain your battery power. 1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Sensor. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired option. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 144 FIRST DRAFT Settings Adjusting Status Light The status light is part of your phones power button. It illuminates when the phone is on. You can turn the status light feature on or off from the Initial Setup screen. Setting Text Display You can set your phones text display area to show more text using smaller characters or less text using larger characters. The size and amount of text displayed depends on the view selected:

To set the text display view:

Standard view five lines of text, 14 characters per line. Compressed view seven lines of text, 18 characters per line. Zoom view four lines of text, 11 characters per line. 1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Display:. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. NOTE:Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Setting Scrolling You can set your phone to scroll through menus and lists in either of two ways:

Up/Down when you reach the bottom or top of list or menu scrolling stops until you scroll in the other direction. Wrap Around when you reach the bottom or top or a list or menu scrolling wraps around and continues at the other end of the lists of menu. You can set the scrolling style from the Initial Setup screen, using the Scroll option. FIRST DRAFT 145 Changing Display Language You can customize the i58sr phone to display menus in English, French, Spanish, or Portuguese. The default language is English. To change the display language:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Language. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the language you want your phone to display. Press B under SELECT. Master Clear Master Clear returns all your phones settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. Feature Reset Feature Reset returns all your phones settings to their original defaults. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. Setting Baud Rate You can set your phones baud rate from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Baud Rate option and then choose the baud rate you want, or choose Auto to set your phone to automatically choose the appropriate baud rate. Setting TTY Mode NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. TTY Setup enables you to set your options for using your phone with a teletypewriter (TTY) device. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device in TTY mode. Your phone supports the following TTY modes:

TTY for calls in which you type and read text on your TTY device. www.motorola.com/iden 146 FIRST DRAFT Settings VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) for calls in which you speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY device. HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) for calls in which you type text on your TTY device on listen to voice replies on your phones speaker. You can set your TTY mode using your phones Settings menu at any time, or by issuing commands from your TTY device while on an active call. To set your phones TTY mode using your phones Settings menu:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Setup. Press C under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired TTY mode; Off, TTY, VCO, or HCO. Press C under SELECT. To set your phones TTY mode from your TTY device, issue one of the following commands while on an active call:

VCO please to select VCO mode. HCO please to select HCO mode. HCO off please to turn off HCO mode. IMPORTANT:

When you are using HCO, the sound coming from your phone speaker may be uncomfortably loud. Use caution when putting the phone to your ear.

(For information on setting your phones speaker volume, see Alert Timeout on page 148.) NOTE: TTY device manufacturers proprietary feature such as Turbo-

Code, High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by your phone. These features must be turned off or disabled to use your TTY device with your phone. Setting TTY Baud Rate NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. By default, your phones TTY baud rate is set to 45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within the US. To make calls outside the US, set your TTY baud rate to 50.0. FIRST DRAFT 147 To change the TTY baud rate:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Baud. Press C under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the baud rate for your location. Press C under SELECT. Alert Timeout Alert timeout controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. The display will continue to show the alert information even though the Call Alert tone has stopped. You can set your phones alert timeout rules from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Alert Timeout option and then choose the desired interval. (No Alert Tone, 5 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Continuous. Return to Home You can control the amount of time that the recent call screen displays after a call. You can set different timeouts (30 seconds, 1 min, 5 min, or 10 min) for phone calls and Nextel Direct calls:

After Phone Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a phone call. After Prvt/Group Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a private or group call. To set the recent calls timeout.:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Return to Home. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 148 FIRST DRAFT Voice Volume Voice Volume sets the volume of the sound coming from your phones earpiece or speaker:

Settings 1 2 3 From the Voice Volume screen, highlight Earpiece Vol to set the earpiece volume, or press R to scroll to Speaker Vol to set the speaker volume. Press B under CHANGE. To select a volume level:

Press T to raise of lower the volume setting. Or, Press the Volume Control keys on the side of your phone. 4 Press B under OK. Tkgrp (Talkgroup) Settings Tkgrp Settings enables you to set certain Talkgroup options. See Group Call on page 98 for more information. Service Status The Service Status screen shows the status of your phones services. This screen is for information only; no options can be set. FIRST DRAFT 149 Styles*

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. This feature enables you to save a group of settings for call and message notifications, screen display, and call answering features. You save your selections as a style and access them at any time. You can use pre-set styles, such as Car & Meeting, or you can edit them or create your own styles. You can store up to ten styles. The Styles feature enables you to save a group of settings for call and message notification, screen display, and call answering features. You save your selections as a style and access them at any time. You can store up to ten styles. You may want to use this feature to create a style for use in your car, or in meetings, for example. Each style contains the following settings:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and other messages. See Ring/Vibe on page 134. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. See Setting Backlight Timer on page 144. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. See Setting Text Display on page 145. Call Filter enables you to set your phone to not ring or vibrate when you receive some of all calls, messages, and alerts. See Setting Call Filtering on page 153. Auto Answer sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail. Using the Styles feature, you can create styles, edit styles, view a styles properties, delete styles, activate any style you have created, or turn off the active style. To access the Styles Menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Styles. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 150 FIRST DRAFT Settings From the Styles Menu, you can:

activate a style or turn off the currently active style create a new style access the Styles menu for more Styles functions Creating a Style When you create a style, you give it a name and set the features of that style. The name of the style then appears on the Styles Menu. To create a style:

From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to [New Style]. 1 2 3 Assign a name to the style you are creating:

Press B under SELECT. In the Name screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the name you want to give the style. As you type, you can delete a letter by pressing A under DELETE. To create a space, press P once. Press B under OK. In the New screen, press R to scroll through the settings for each style option. To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 4 5 6 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. FIRST DRAFT 151 Editing a Style To change the settings of a style:

1 2 3 4 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to edit. Press m to access the Styles menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press B under SELECT. To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 5 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. Activating a Style When you access the Styles Menu, a check mark appears to the left of the name of the style that is currently active on your phone. If no style is active, the check mark appears next to Off. To activate a style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to activate. Press B under SELECT. The style immediately becomes active on your phone. www.motorola.com/iden 152 FIRST DRAFT Settings Turning Off a Style To turn off a style without activating another style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll Off. Press B under SELECT. Using the Styles Menu When you highlight a style on the Styles Menu, you can then access the Styles menu for additional Styles functions. To access the Styles menu, press m from the Styles menu. The Styles menu provides the following options:

View view settings of the highlighted style. Change activate the highlighted style. Edit edit the settings of the highlighted style. New create a new style. Delete delete the highlighted style. Delete All delete all styles. Setting Call Filtering The Call Filter feature enables you to control which calls, messages, and alerts your phone responds to, and which it ignores. From the Call Filter screen, you set separate filtering options for phone calls, Private and Group calls, alerts, and messages:

Phone sets filtering options for phone calls. Prvt/Grp sets filtering options for Private and Group calls. Alerts sets filtering options for call alerts. Notifications sets filtering options for messages. Setting Phone Call Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone responds to all calls, no calls, or only calls from some or all numbers in your Phonebook:

FIRST DRAFT 153 Off sets your phone notify you of all calls. All sets your phone to ignore all calls. All Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from the numbers stored in your Phonebook. Some Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from numbers you select from your Phonebook. You may choose up to five Phonebook entries. To choose Phonebook entries that you want your phone to respond to calls from:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Call Filter screen, press R to scroll Phone:. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll Some Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. The entries stored in your Phonebook appear. To select a Phonebook entry as one you want to your phone to respond to calls from, press S to scroll the Phonebook entry and press B under SELECT. A check mark appears next to each selected Phonebook entry. You may select up to five Phonebook entries. To remove a selected Phonebook entry from the list, press S to scroll the name and press B under SELECT. 7 When you have selected the Phonebook entries you want, press A under DONE. Setting Private and Group Call Filtering Setting Prvt/Grp to On sets your phone to ignore all Private and Group calls. Setting Prvt/Grp to Off sets your phone to respond to all Private and Group calls. Setting Alert Filtering Setting Alerts to On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts. Setting Alerts to Off sets your phone to respond to all call alerts. www.motorola.com/iden 154 FIRST DRAFT Shortcuts Setting Message Notification Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone to notify you of some types of messages, all types of messages, or no messages:

Off allows your phone to notify you of all messages. Voice Messages allows your phone to notify you of Voice Mail messages. Text Messages allows your phone to notify you of Text Messages messages. All prevents your phone from notifying you of all messages. Call Filter can prevent your phone from ringing or vibrating when you receive a message. Your display screen will still indicate that you have messages. Shortcuts The Shortcuts feature enables you to access most menu or sub-menu options in your phone by pressing a numeric button on the keypad or speaking a voice name for the shortcut. You create the shortcut to the menu by assigning a number to it and then access the menu by pressing the number. Creating a Shortcut 1 Navigate to the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. For example, if you wanted to create a shortcut to Ring/Vibe:

From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Setting. Press B under SELECT. Ring/Vibe is now highlighted in the Settings screen. Press and hold m for about 2 seconds. 2 3 A confirmation screen displays showing the name of the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. To proceed with assigning the shortcut, press A under YES. FIRST DRAFT 155 4 A screen displays showing the assigned shortcut number. If you want to change the shortcut number:

Press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to erase the assigned number. Enter the desired number on your keypad and press B under OK. 5 If you want to record a voice name for that shortcut:

Press R to highlight the Voice field. Press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the shortcut. Speak clearly into the microphone. An ) icon appears in the Voice field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP:For best results, record in a quiet environment. 6 Press A under DONE. Using a Shortcut To use a shortcut to access a menu:

1 2 Or, 1 2 From the Ready screen, press m. Press the number assigned to the shortcut. You have 2 seconds to do this after pressing m. From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. www.motorola.com/iden 156 FIRST DRAFT Shortcuts 3 4 5 Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the shortcut you want to use. Press B under GOTO. Or, if you have assigned the shortcut a voice name*:

1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Say the voice name assigned to the shortcut into your phones microphone. 3 Your phone will play the voice name back to you.

*Optional feature. Please consult your service provider for availability of purchase. Using the Shortcut Menu The Shortcut Menu enables you to manage your shortcuts with the following options. To access the Shortcut menu:

New Entry view instructions for assigning a shortcut. Edit edit a shortcut name and key number. Reorder assign existing shortcuts to different key number. Delete delete any highlighted Shortcut. Delete All delete all stored Shortcuts. 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. Press B under SELECT. Press m. FIRST DRAFT 157 www.motorola.com/iden 158 FIRST DRAFT Accessories To order additional accessories, log on to our Web site at: www.motorola.com/

iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. This section includes information on the following accessories included with your phone:

Carrying Solutions Batteries Travel Chargers Data Accessories Carrying Solutions Swivel Carry Clip Page 159 Page 161 Page 162 Page 164 The Swivel Carry Clip provides a convenient means by which to carry your i58sr phone with you. It consists of the Phone Clip and the Belt Clip. Phone Clip Belt Clip FIRST DRAFT 159 Using the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Attach the Phone Clip to the phone. USER TIP:Start with the antenna side of the clip. Slide the Belt Clip onto the Phone Clip until you hear it click. 2 3 Attach the Swivel Carry Clip (Phone Clip and Belt Clip) to your belt. 4 To release phone from belt clip, push the button on the top of the belt clip. Removing the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Hold the phone securely in your left hand. 2 3 Curl the right hand index finger and place the outer edge of the finger against the knob of the Phone Clip. Place the thumb of your right hand on the side of the phone, directly below the left side of the Phone Clip. www.motorola.com/iden 160 FIRST DRAFT Batteries 4 5 Squeeze the right hand thumb and index finger together until the clip snaps out of the retaining slot on the left side Remove the clip. Batteries For best results, charge the batteries within the temperature range of 10oC to 40oC (50oF to 104oF). Prolonged charging is not recommended. For battery charging guidelines, see Table below. Charging Lithium Ion Batteries Table 1 provides the approximate time to fully charge a battery using a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger. Check the kit number on your battery and charger to determine the appropriate charging time. Table 1: Battery Charging Times MOTOROLA BATTERIES Kit Number Description/Chemistry SNN5717 Slim Li Ion SNN5705*

High Performance Li Ion SNN5706 Extra Capacity Li Ion SNN5716*

Maximum Capacity Li Ion Charging Time to 100%

Mid-Rate Rapid Charger Charger

(SPN4940) or

(SPN4716)

(SPN4808) 4 hours 2 hours 30 minutes 2 hours 30 minutes 2 hours 30 minutes 3 hours 5 hours 7 hours 8 hours

* These batteries are available with rubber overmolded battery covers. NOTE:Charging times are based on a fully discharged battery. FIRST DRAFT 161 For optimal battery life, use a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger with your Motorola iDEN Lithium Ion battery. Other chargers may not fully charge your Lithium Ion battery. Battery Operating Instructions Extreme temperatures will degrade battery performance. Do not store your battery where temperatures exceed 60C (140F) or fall below -20C (4F). Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate and without use, will lose about 1% of its charge per day. The battery capacity will be degraded if stored for long periods while fully charged. If long term storage is required, store at half capacity. The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion chargers will provide optimum performance. Other chargers may not fully charge your iDEN Lithium Ion battery or may yield reduced number of lifetime charge cycles. If the battery appears inoperative, the internal protection circuitry may have been activated. Remove the battery from the phone and put it into the charger for several minutes to reset the circuitry. When batteries are not in use, always store them in the plastic safety tray. Travel Chargers Using one of the Travel Chargers listed below, you can charge a battery from an AC outlet. On one end of the Travel Charger, an accessory connector attaches to the bottom of the phone. At the other (AC outlet) end of the device, there is a compact housing that contains the plug-in power supply. TRAVEL CHARGERS Kit Number SPN4940 SPN4716 SPN4808 Description Mid-Rate Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Rapid Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Mid-Rate Economy Travel Charger NOTE:Additional adaptor plugs to accommodate various International power outlets can be purchased separately for the multi-voltage Travel Chargers. www.motorola.com/iden 162 FIRST DRAFT Accessory Connector Travel Chargers Accessory Connector Using the Travel Charger 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 If you have either the Mid-Rate Multi-Voltage Travel Charger or the Rapid Multi-Voltage Travel Charger, flip open the prongs, and plug the Travel Charger transformer into an AC wall outlet. Or If you have the Mid-Rate Economy Travel Charger, plug the Travel Charger transformer into an AC wall outlet. Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Operating Specifications Input voltage range: 90-264 VAC @ 50/60 Hz. Operating temperature range: 0C to +50C Economy Travel Charger (U.S. Only) Input voltage range: 90-120 VAC @60Hz. Operating temperature range: 0C to +50C FIRST DRAFT 163 Data Accessories Universal Serial Bus (USB) Your user will be able communicate with USB capable laptop and desktop computers. USB capable i58sr phone supports both RS232 communications and USB communications (with USB mother devices). The i58sr phone will automatically detect whether an RS232 or USB cable has been connected to it and will utilize the appropriate protocol accordingly. No other action is required by the user in order to select between USB or RS232 serial communications. USB Cable iDEN PC applications will support USB drivers for the following operating systems only:

Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows ME www.motorola.com/iden 164 FIRST DRAFT Data Accessories RS232 Data Cable The RS232 Data Cable facilitates quick and easy data synchronization between your i58sr phone and a PC. This cable accommodates both circuit and packet data applications. The cable also features a charging port. Any applicable phone charger may be used to charge the phone simultaneously. Port for charging source Using the Data Cable 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Insert the data plug directly into your PC or one of the many other data compatible iDEN accessories. FIRST DRAFT 165 Dual Port Adapter Cable The Dual Port Adapter Cable enables in-vehicle communications and charging of the i58sr phone via the Hands-Free Car kit, while being simultaneously connected for data operations. C A R K I T D A T A Using the Dual Port Adapter Cable 1 2 3 Insert the flat end of the Dual Port Adapter Cable cord into the bottom connector of the i58sr phone. Make sure the Motorola logo is facing upward. Insert the round end of the RS232 Data Cable into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Data. Insert the Hands-Free Car Kit into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Car Kit. www.motorola.com/iden 166 FIRST DRAFT Data Accessories PDA Converter Plugs The PDA (Pocket Digital Assistant) plug is a convenient way to connect your i58sr phone to many types of PDA devices, both PC and Windows CE compatible. Below is the list of adapters which can be used with your i58sr phone:

Item Number NTN6546 NKN6547 NTN8993 Description Palm IIITM/VIITM Cable Adapter Palm VTM Cable Adapter Generic Pocket Digital Assistant (PDA) -Male-

Female Serial Adapter (Not Shown) NTN6546 and NTN6547 Type Plug Using the PDA Converter Plug 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the PDA converter. FIRST DRAFT 167 3 4 Connect other end of PDA converter to the mating connector of the PDA device. If you are using the NTN8993 PDA adapter, connect the other end of the adapter to the PDAs supplied data synchronization cradle and place the PDA into the cradle. NOTE:Please see the label on the bottom of your Dual-Pocket Desktop Charger for more information regarding battery charging status. www.motorola.com/iden 168 FIRST DRAFT Other Important Information This section includes the following topics:

Understanding Status Messages Safety and General Information Limited Warranty Information Patent and Trademark Information Page 169 Page 171 Page 187 Page 195 Understanding Status Messages The following table lists and describes the status messages. Status Messages Message Description Number Not in Service The number that you entered is not valid. User Not Available User Not Authorized Please Try Later User Busy in Private User Busy in Data Service Restricted Service Not Available The phone that you called is either busy, out-

of-coverage, or turned off. Please try again later. The person that you called has not purchased this service. This service is temporarily not available. Please try again later. The phone that you called is busy in a Private call. The phone that you called is busy in a Dial-Up call. This service was restricted by your service provider, or this service was not purchased. This feature is not available on the current network. FIRST DRAFT 169 Status Messages Message Description System Busy Try Later Service Conflict Please Try Again Self Check Error Self Check Fail PIN Blocked Call Your Provider Insert SIM Check SIM Card Wrong PIN Wrong Code Enter PIN Enter Unlock Code New Browser Message Memory Full!

The system is experiencing heavy traffic. Please try again later. This service cannot be enabled because an incompatible service has already been turned on. An error occurred. Please try again. A fault was detected with your phone. If this error recurs, note the error code and contact Customer Care. An operational fault was detected with your phone. Note the numeric code, turn your phone off, and contact Customer Care. The incorrect PIN was entered three consecutive times. You will be unable to place or receive calls on your i58sr phone. Call your service provider to have them obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code. Your SIM Card is not being detected. Please check to ensure that you have inserted the SIM Card. Please check your SIM Card to make sure it has been inserted properly. You have entered an incorrect PIN number. Your phone will not accept a SIM card that is not from your carrier. Please enter your 4-8 digit SIM Pin code. Auto Phonelock is activated. Enter your unlock code. Warns of low memory for Net Alerts 170 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden RF Operational Characteristics Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE PORTABLE RADIO. RF Operational Characteristics Your radio product contains a radio frequency transmitter to convey the information you wish to send as well as occasional automatic signals used to sustain connection to the wireless network, and a receiver which enables you to receive communication and connection information from the network. PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply with the following RF exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999. Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications

(Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2001 ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular and PCS product certification. To assure optimal radio product performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

FIRST DRAFT 171 Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your radio product as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Two-way radio operation When using your radio product as a traditional two-way radio, hold the radio product in a vertical position with the microphone one to two inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the lips. Body-worn operation To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your body when transmitting, always place the radio product in a Motorola approved clip, holder, holster, case or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a Motorola approved body-worn accessory and are not using the radio product in the intended use positions along side the head in the phone mode or in front of the face in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the antenna and the radio product are kept the following minimum distances from the body when transmitting Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5 cm) Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5 cm) Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio product and may violate FCC regulations. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio product is IN USE. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the radio product to operate at a higher power level than needed. 172 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, visit our website at www.mot.com/iden, or look in the accessory section of this manual. ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5815 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.24 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.267 W/kg during voice transmission using Phone Mode and 0.50 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.) While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://

www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5815. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. ______________________________________

* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. FIRST DRAFT 173 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE:Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio product must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association (AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio product and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6 inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the radio product is turned ON. Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radio products may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. www.motorola.com/iden 174 FIRST DRAFT Medical Devices Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio products in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using the radio product while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. FIRST DRAFT 175

W A R N I N G Operational Warnings For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not place a portable radio product in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio product prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless it is a radio product type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved). Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. NOTE: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio product when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. 176 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Operational Cautions

C a u t i o n Operational Cautions Antennas Do not use any portable radio product that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Cleaning and Drying Considerations Using a leather carry case may help protect the surfaces and help prevent liquids

(e.g., rain) from entering into the interior of the radio product. This product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit. If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a dryer as this will damage the radio product and void the warranty. Instead, do the following:

1. 2. Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped) from radio product. 3. 4. Shake excess liquid from radio product. Place the radio product and battery in an area that is at room temperature and has good air flow. Immediately power off the radio product. FIRST DRAFT 177 5. Let the radio product, battery dry, and SIM card for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery and/or powering on the radio product. If the radio product does not work after following the steps listed above, contact your dealer for servicing information. Clean the external surfaces of the radio product with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of dishwashing detergent and water. Some household cleaners may contain chemicals that could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners. Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio product. 178 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Accessory Safety Information Accessory Safety Information IMPORTANT:

SAVE THESE ACCESSORY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Before using any battery or battery charger, read all the instructions for and cautionary markings on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which may include a separate wall-mounted power supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product using the battery. Do not expose any battery charger to water, rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or in-vehicle use only.

W A R N I N G To reduce the risk of injury, charge only the rechargeable batteries listed in the Accessories section of this manual. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and damage. To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug, pull by the plug rather than the cord when you disconnect the battery charger from the power source outlet. Do not operate any battery charger with a damaged cord or plug replace them immediately. Battery chargers may become warm during operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the touch, unplug it from the power outlet immediately and discontinue its use. Use of a non-recommended attachment to a battery charger may result in a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons. Make sure the battery charger power cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or subjected to damage or stress. An extension cord should not be used with any battery charger unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure that:

The pins on the plug of the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the plug of the charger. The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition. The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100 feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet. FIRST DRAFT 179 Do not operate any battery charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or has been damaged in any way; take it to a qualified service technician. Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to a qualified service technician when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire. Maximum ambient temperature around the power supply or transformer of any battery charger should not exceed 40C (104F). The output power from the power supply or transformer must not exceed the rating given on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger. The disconnection from the line voltage is made by unplugging the power supply from the AC receptacle. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any battery charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. For optimum charging performance, turn off the radio product while charging it in any battery charger. U.S.F.D.A. Update on Mobile Phones 180 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden U.S.F.D.A. Update on Mobile Phones The U.S. Food and Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The following summarizes what is known and what remains unknownabout whether these products can pose a hazard to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential risk. This information may be used to respond to questions. Why the concern?

Mobile phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (i.e., radiofrequency radiation) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF), considered non-significant, when in the stand-by mode. It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether, to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some research has been done to address these questions, no clear picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that they are unsafe. However, the available scientific evidence does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated with the use of mobile phones. What kinds of phones are in question?

Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones, the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned close to the user's head during normal telephone conversation. These types of mobile phones are of concern because of the short distance between the phones antennathe primary source of the RFand the persons head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in which the antenna is located at greater distances from the user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower than that from hand-held phones, because a persons RF exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source. The safety of so-called cordless phones, which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not been questioned. FIRST DRAFT 181 How much evidence is there that hand-held mobile phones might be harmful?

Briefly, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing scientific evidence is conflicting and many of the studies that have been done to date have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have yielded conflicting results. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study, mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one type of cancer developed more than twice as many such cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had already been treated with cancer-causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals to the RF virtually continuouslyup to 22 hours per day. For the past five years in the United States, the mobile phone industry has supported research into the safety of mobile phones. This research has resulted in two findings in particular that merit additional study:

1. In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers looked for an association between mobile phone use and either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma (a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically significant association was found between mobile phone use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of types of gliomas were considered together. It should be noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in this study was less than three years. 2. When 20 types of glioma were considered separately, however, an association was found between mobile phone use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the same sample that this association occurred by chance. Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact, the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to bear on the accuracy and repeatability of these results.(1) 182 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden U.S.F.D.A. Update on Mobile Phones 3. Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile phone RF on genetic material. These included tests for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations, chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are conflicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.(2) FDA is currently working with government, industry, and academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these industry-funded research findings. Collaboration with the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association

(CTIA) in particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research recommendations and scientific oversight of new CTIA-funded research based on such recommendations. Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in the literature:

1. Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while they performed cognitive function tests. There were no changes in the subjects ability to recall words, numbers, or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were able to make choices more quickly in one visual test when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals. This was the only change noted among more than 20 variables compared.(3) 2. In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be on the side of the head where the mobile phone was used. Because this occurred in only a small number of cases, the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically significant.(4) FIRST DRAFT 183 In summary, we do not have enough information at this point to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA continues to work with all parties, including other federal agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding questions about the safety of mobile phones. What is known about cases of human cancer that have been reported in users of hand-held mobile phones?

Some people who have used mobile phones have been diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000 people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1 million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer would be expected each year among those 80 million people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose because of the phone, or whether it would have happened anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a particular form of cancer is greater among people who use mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One way to answer that question is to compare the usage of mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use of mobile phones among appropriately matched people without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The current case-control study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of information. What is FDAs role concerning the safety of mobile phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:

support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones;

184 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden U.S.F.D.A. Update on Mobile Phones design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best possible information on what is known about possible effects of mobile phone use on human health. At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:

The National Institute of Health also participates in this group. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Health and Safety Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration In the absence of conclusive information about any possible risk, what can concerned individuals do?

If there is a risk from these productsand at this point we do not know that there isit is probably very small. But if people are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example, time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives. Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy conversations on conventional phones and reserving the hand-

held models for shorter conversations or for situations when other types of phones are not available. People who must conduct extended conversations in their cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that places more distance between their bodies and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, they could switch to:

a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside the vehicle, a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or built into a separate package, or a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone carried at the waist. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that mobile phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the radiofrequency energy from these products, taking the simple precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk. FIRST DRAFT 185 Where can I find additional information?

For additional information, see the following websites:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program (select Information on Human Exposure to RF Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters): http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety . World Health Organization (WHO) International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs & As): http://www.who.int/emf United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board: http://

www.nrpb.org.uk . Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA): http://

www.wow-com.com . U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/ . References:

1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use and Malignant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science Symposium;1999 June 20;

Long Beach, California. 2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999, Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished results. 3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim, E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8, 1999. 4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH. Use of cellular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999. 186 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products N O T E :

This Warranty applies within the fifty (50) united states and the District of Columbia I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications FIRST DRAFT 187 to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. 188 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-453-0920 for warranty service location information. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLAS normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. FIRST DRAFT 189 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 190 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) N O T E :

This Warranty applies in Singapore and the Philippines. I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories (manufactured by or under license from MOTOROLA) Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications FIRST DRAFT 191 to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. IV. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 192 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment). f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the local type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from use of the products in connection with non-MOTOROLA equipment. V. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, FIRST DRAFT 193 that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or sued in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages arising from any claim of patent infringement or alleged infringement. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 194 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden Patent and Trademark Information Patent and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. 2002 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under one or more of the U.S. patents listed in the Users Guide. Microsoft and, Microsoft WEB Explorer, are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic Communications. T9 Text Input Patent and Trademark Information This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Direct Protect is a trademark of Signal Insurance Company. All other product or service names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective trademark owners. FIRST DRAFT 195 196 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden A Accessories 161 batteries 163 Data cable 91, 167, 168 Dual Port Adapter Cable 168 Swivel Carry Clip 161 Travel Charger 164 Accessory safety information 181 Adapter cable 168 Additional Health and Safety 183 Alpha mode, text entry 34 Auto Redial 146 B Backlight timer 146 Battery 163 attaching 15 charge strength 17 charging 16 detaching 16 operating 164 Baud rate 148 C Call Alert Queue 97 Call alerts 95 from Phonebook 96 receiving 97 Call Filtering 155 Call Forwarding 75 turning off 77 turning on 76 Call Hold 73 Call Timers 71, 72 Call Waiting 72, 140 Index accepting calls 72 declining calls 73 ending active calls 73 switching between calls 73 turning off 73 Charge strength 17 Circuit data 91 Circuit data number 32 CompanionPro 48 Connection status 31 Customizing Java applications 133 Customizing phone 135 D Datebook events 114 Data cable 91, 167, 168 Datebook 111 event reminders 120 set up 120 viewing 112 viewing a day 113 viewing a week 113 viewing event details 114 viewing today 114 adding 115 deleting 119 editing 119 Datebook icons 112 Dialing menu 56 Digital cellular 61 Direct dial 62 Display options 42 changing 142 Driving safety 11 197 email 91 sending and receiving 90 Entering text, see Text entry Faxes sending and receiving 91 G Getting started 13 Group calls 100 E F I Icons context sensitive 39 Datebook 112 main menu 44 Phonebook 48 status 39 In Call Setup 140 Initial Setup 144 Initial SIM PIN number 21 International calls 60, 65 IP Address 32 J Java applications 131 deinstalling 134 downloading 133 installing 132 memory 133 K Keypad Lock 141 L Language 148 M Memory Main menu 45 icons 44 options 44 reordering 142 Making call alerts 96 Making phone calls 61 Making Private calls 93 Master Reset 141 Memo 123 adding 123 deleting 124 editing 124 viewing 123 Java 133 Voice Record 129 Menu icon 42 Menus 42, 43, 56 main menu 45 Shortcut 159 Styles menu 153, 155 Message Center 85 Messages 85 Net Alert 90 text and numeric 88 voice mail 86 Messages, Net Alert receiving 90 receiving 89 viewing 89 Missed Calls 71 Modem, phone as 91 Motorola 10 Mute 70 My Information 32 Messages, text and numeric 198 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden N P Net Alert 90 Notifications 140 setting 138 Numeric mode, text entry 37 Packet data 91 Password security code 141 SIM PIN 141 unlock code 141 Patent information 197 Pause digit entry 59 Personalize 142 Phone modem 91 off 18 on 18 status 31 Phone calls 61 ending 66 from Phonebook 62 from Recent Calls list 63 international calls 65 receiving 66 speed dial 64 Turbo Dial 64 Phone Lock 140 Phone Setup 139 Phonebook 47 capacity 52 CompanionPro 48 making call alerts 96 making calls 62 Private calls 93 storing Recent Calls 68 Phonebook entries 50 adding 53 deleting 59 editing 58 sorting 51 viewing 51 Plus dialing 60 Power button 18 Powering phone on or off 18 Private calls 93 from Phonebook 93 from Recent Calls list 94 making 93 receiving 94 voice names 95 Private ID 93 R Radio frequency 173 Ready screen 39 Recent Calls 63, 67 deleting 69 details 68 Private calls 94 storing to Phonebook 68 viewing 67 Recent Calls list storing numbers from 57 Ring styles 139 Ring/Vibe 136 S Safety accessory 181 electromagnetic interference medical devices 176 radio frequency 173 176 FIRST DRAFT 199 Scrolling 147 Security 20, 140 Settings 135 In Call Setup 140 Initial Setup 144 Personalize 142 Phone Setup 139 Ring/Vibe 136 Security 140 VoiceVolume 150, 151 Shortcuts 157 creating 157 using 158 SIM card 20, 47 inserting and removing 25 unblocking 23 SIM PIN 20, 141 changing 22 default 21 disabling 24 enabling 24 entering 21 Speed Dial numbers 48, 55, 64 Status light 31, 147 Status messages 171 Status of connection 31 storing numbers Recent Calls list 57 activating 154 creating 153 turning off 155 Swivel Carry Clip 161 Symbols mode, text entry 37 Styles T T9 Text Input 33 also see Text entry Talkgroups 100 joining 102 naming 100 Text entry Text and numeric messages 88 Text display area 42 size 147 Alpha mode 34 Numeric mode 37 Symbols mode 37 Word mode 34 Three-Way Calling 74 Time and date format 145 Trademark information 197 Travel Charger 164 TTY devices 91 making calls 65 setting baud rate 149 setting mode 148 Turbo Dial 64 Turning phone on or off 18 Two-way radio, see Private calls Typing text, see Text entry U V Unblocking SIM PIN 23 Viewing Datebook 112 Voice Activated dialing 95 also see Voice names Voice Mail 86 logging in 87 receiving messages 86 transferring calls to 86 creating 55, 158 Voice names 49 200 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden making calls 95 Phonebook 55 shortcuts 158, 159 Voice Record 69, 125 adding 127 deleting 128 labeling 127 locking 128 memory 129 playing 126 recording 126 W Warranty 193 Word mode, text entry 34 FIRST DRAFT 201 202 FIRST DRAFT www.motorola.com/iden

exhibit
download
text

1 2 3

Ex8 User Manual i88s

Users Manual

pdf

1.61 MiB

May 07 2002

Motorola iDEN Digital Multi-Service Data-Capable Phone i88s Phone Users Guide FIRST DRAFT

@NNTN4487A@

NNTN4487A www.motorola.com/iden Table of Contents Introduction .......................................................................................... 7 Driving Safety Tips .........................................................................................9 Getting Started.................................................................................... 11 i88s Phone Features ......................................................................................12 Battery ...........................................................................................................13 Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off ................................................................15 Enabling Security ..........................................................................................17 Receiving Over-the-Air Programming..........................................................17 Security Features of the i88s Phone ..............................................................18 Status of Your i88s Phone.............................................................................30 My Information .............................................................................................30 Using T9 Text Input ......................................................................................31 Display Essentials ............................................................................... 37 Display Screen Elements...............................................................................37 Text Display Area .........................................................................................40 Call Information Icons...................................................................................40 Navigating Menus and Lists..........................................................................41 Main Menu Options.......................................................................................43 Phonebook ........................................................................................... 45 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone.................46 Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers................................................46 Phonebook Icons ...........................................................................................46 Voice Names .................................................................................................47 Accessing Your Phonebook ..........................................................................47 About Phonebook Entries..............................................................................48 Pause Digit Entry...........................................................................................56 Plus Dialing ...................................................................................................58 FIRST DRAFT 1 Digital Cellular.................................................................................... 59 Making Phone Calls ......................................................................................59 Emergency Calling ........................................................................................65 Receiving a Phone Call .................................................................................65 Ending a Phone Call ......................................................................................65 Recent Calls...................................................................................................65 Missed Calls ..................................................................................................69 Call Timers....................................................................................................69 Hands-Free Speakerphone.............................................................................70 Mute...............................................................................................................70 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................71 Call Hold .......................................................................................................72 Three-Way Calling ........................................................................................74 Call Forwarding.............................................................................................75 Messages .............................................................................................. 79 Message Center .............................................................................................79 Voice Mail.....................................................................................................80 Using Voice Mail ..........................................................................................81 Text and Numeric Messaging........................................................................82 Net Alert ........................................................................................................84 Using Your Phone as a Modem.....................................................................85 Private Calls ........................................................................................ 87 Private Call....................................................................................................87 Call Alerts......................................................................................................90 Group Call .....................................................................................................94 Assisted Global Positioning System .................................................. 99 Accessing the AGPS Feature ........................................................................99 Viewing Your Position................................................................................100 Setting Privacy Options...............................................................................101 Setting Data Flow........................................................................................102 Removing GPS from the Main Menu..........................................................103 2 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Datebook............................................................................................ 105 Datebook Icons............................................................................................106 Viewing Your Datebook .............................................................................106 About Datebook Events...............................................................................108 Adding New Events.....................................................................................109 Editing Events .............................................................................................113 Deleting Events ...........................................................................................113 Datebook Event Reminders.........................................................................114 Customizing Datebook Set Up ....................................................................114 Memo ................................................................................................. 117 Adding a New Memo ..................................................................................117 Viewing a Memo .........................................................................................117 Editing a Memo ...........................................................................................118 Deleting a Memo .........................................................................................118 Voice Record ..................................................................................... 119 About Voice Record....................................................................................119 Accessing Voice Record .............................................................................119 Recording a Voice Record ..........................................................................120 Playing a Voice Record ...............................................................................120 Adding to a Voice Record ...........................................................................121 Labeling a Voice Record .............................................................................121 Deleting a Voice Record .............................................................................122 Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record............................................................122 Voice Record Memory ................................................................................123 Java .................................................................................................... 125 Installing Java Applications ........................................................................126 Running Java Applications..........................................................................126 Downloading Java Applications..................................................................127 Java Applications and AGPS ......................................................................127 Java Memory ...............................................................................................129 FIRST DRAFT 3 Customizing the i88s Phone............................................................. 131 Settings ........................................................................................................131 Styles ...........................................................................................................147 Shortcuts......................................................................................................153 Accessories......................................................................................... 157 Wearable Carrying Solutions ......................................................................157 Batteries.......................................................................................................159 Travel Chargers ...........................................................................................161 Data Accessories .........................................................................................163 Other Important Information ......................................................... 169 Understanding Status Messages ..................................................................169 Safety and General Information ..................................................... 171 RF Operational Characteristics ...................................................................171 Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure ..............................171 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..............................................174 Medical Devices..........................................................................................174 Operational Warnings..................................................................................176 Operational Cautions...................................................................................177 Accessory Safety Information .....................................................................179 The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones.........................181 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products...............................187 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) ......191 Patent and Trademark Information..............................................................195 Index .................................................................................................. 197 IMPORTANT!

Read Safety and General Information on page 171 before using your i85s phone. 4 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Plantation, FL 33328 USA Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920 Hereby declares that the product:

Product Name: i88s Model Number: H58XAH6RR7AN Conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device Date: July 1, 2002 interference in a residential Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

--Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

--Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

--Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 5 6 www.motorola.com/iden Introduction C ongratulations on purchasing your Motorola iDEN i88s multi-service, data-capable, digital, portable phone. Your i88s phone offers:

Voice Activated Dialing Your i88s phone offers state-of-the-art Voice Activated Dialing. Speakerphone You can enjoy hands-free communication at the touch of a button. And Speakerphone is especially great for conference calls. Phonebook Your consolidated Phonebook holds up to 250 entries and allows you to store multiple contact numbers for each person, offering you various ways to communicate with your business and personal contacts. SIM Card Your phones SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card holds all entries stored in your Phonebook. In addition, you have a PIN (Personal Identification Number) to keep your information safe and secure. Datebook Schedule and keep track of appointments using your phones Datebook feature. Messages The Message Center allows you to manage and access your Voice Mail, Text Messages and Net Alert all from the same inbox. Private and Group Calls You can use your phone as a two-way radio to communicate directly with business and personal contacts in your iDEN service area. Voice Record Voice Record enables you to record and play back personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls on your i88s phone. Fax and Data Transfer* for circuit data faxes and file transfers. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 85. J2METM With the JavaTM applications feature, you can choose from the many Java programs. Either download Java applications directly from the Internet, or try one of the pre-loaded applications. Customization Use the Settings, Styles and Shortcuts features to customize your i88s phone to meet your individual needs. FIRST DRAFT 7

For more information on these and other features of the i88s phone, review this Users Guide. There is a Table of Contents in the front of the guide and an Index in the back of the guide to assist you in finding the specific information you want. NOTE: Some features of your i88s phone are available only in the iDEN service area, and are indicated as such in this guide. NOTE: This guide describes the features of the i88s phone as they were set up by Motorola. However, your carrier or your organization may have changed or added features. For more information, check with your carrier or your organization. 8 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Driving Safety Tips Driving Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies that benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:

1. Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call with-

out taking your attention off the road. 2. When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional 3. 4. 5. layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motor-

ola Original hands-free accessories available today. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary respon-

sibility driving safely. 6. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distract-

ing. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 8. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emer-

gency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.1 FIRST DRAFT 9 9. Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 10. Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no seri-

ous hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.1 1. Wherever wireless phone service is available. 10 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT This section includes:

i88s Phone Features Battery Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off Enabling Security Status of Your i88s Phone My Information Using T9 Text Input Getting Started Page 12 Page 13 Page 15 Page 17 Page 30 Page 30 Page 31 FIRST DRAFT 11 i 88s Phone Features Speaker Key Volume Control Buttons Push-To-Talk

(PTT) Button Headset Jack Power Button Status Light Option Key 4-Way Navigation Key End/Home Key Punctuation Key Back/Pause Dialing Key Microphone Antenna Earpiece Display Option Key Menu Key Photosensor Send Key Alpha Numeric Keypad Next Word/

International Plus Dialing Key SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW Power Button Status Light Accessory and Data Cable Connector TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW 12 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Battery Battery Your i88s phone comes with a Lithium Ion battery. After attaching the battery, you must charge it before you use it for the first time. See Charging Lithium Ion Batteries on page 160 for the charging times for your phones battery. The first time you charge your phones battery, charge for 30 minutes more than the time shown on page 160. After the initial charging, the battery can be charged in the time shown on page 160. Remove the battery from the protective plastic safety tray provided in the original packaging. When the battery is not attached to the phone store it in the original tray. Attaching the Battery 1 Remove the battery cover located on the back of the phone by pressing the battery cover release button and sliding the battery cover away from the antenna. Release Button 2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area. Press down on the bottom of the battery to secure it. 3 Replace the battery cover and push forward until you hear a click. FIRST DRAFT 13 Detaching the Battery 1 2 3 Ensure that the phone is powered off before attempting to detach the battery. Press the battery cover release button and slide the battery cover away from the antenna. Remove the battery by pushing the battery toward the antenna and lifting it out of the phone. Charging the Battery 1 With your phones keypad facing up, plug the chargers accessory connector into the left side of the accessory connector on the bottom of the phone. 2 3 If the charger has folding electrical prongs, flip open the prongs. Plug the charger into an electrical outlet. Your phones screen backlight will remain lit while the battery is charging. 14 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off Battery Charging Status The battery strength indicator icon found on your phones display screen shows the charge amount remaining in the battery. When Using Phone Icon Display Battery Strength a Low Battery b 11% to 40%

c 41% to 70%

d Fully Charged A short, chirp-like sound indicates a low battery. The icon flashes to indicate that you have approximately five minutes of talk time remaining. When Charging Battery Icon Display e f g d 1 flashing bar 1 flashing bar, 1 continuous bar 1 flashing bar, 2 continuous bars 3 continuous bars Battery Strength Low Battery 31% to 60%

61% to 90%

Fully Charged Turning Your i 88s Phone On/Off To power the phone on:

1 2 For optimal signal strength, extend the antenna. Press and hold p at the top of the phone until the status light glows red and a tone briefly sounds. FIRST DRAFT 15 3 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen displays, enter your SIM PIN.

(For more information see SIM Card Personal Identification Number

(PIN) on page 18.) NOTE: The default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card

(see Changing the SIM PIN on page 20). 4 Press B under OK. As your phone connects to the network, you will see a welcome message and a connecting message. When the Ready screen appears on the display, you are ready to use your i88s phone!

A To power the phone off:

1 2 16 Press and hold p on the top of the phone until you see the message Powering Off. Push down the antenna. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Enabling Security Enabling Security To utilize browser functionality from your service provider, you must enable security the first time you power on your phone or within 20 days of first activation of your phone. 1 When you power on your phone for the first time, after the Ready screen appears, you will be prompted to select OK to update your browser info. NOTE: If you press C under LATER, you will be prompted to enable security each time you power on your phone until you press C under OK. It is recommended that you do not choose LATER. a 2 Press A under OK. 3 You are prompted to enable security. Press C under YES. A series of screens display. If you subscribe to your service provider plan, your home page displays. 4 Press e to return to the Ready screen. Receiving Over-the-Air Programming If you have been set up to receive Over-the-Air Programming by your service provider, you will receive your Private ID and Talkgroup lists for Private Call use, and your Personal Telephone Number via a Net Alert message. In order to receive your programming, you must have enabled security. Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will receive a Net Alert message containing your lists. To accept your phone programming:

1 You will receive a Net Alert with the message New Browser Message Receive Programming Info. 2 Press A under GOTO. FIRST DRAFT 17 3 You are prompted to accept changes to your phonebook. Press A under OK. 4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 5 You are prompted again to accept changes to your phonebook. Press A under OK. 6 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 7 Press e to return to the idle screen. Security Features of the i 88s Phone The i88s phone comes with two levels of security protection:

SIM Card Keypad Lock Your phone comes with a built-in level of security protection through the use of the SIM card. The SIM card stores all your Phonebook information. Since this information is stored on the SIM card, not in your phone itself, you can remove the information by removing the SIM card. The SIM card is located in the SIM Card Holder on the back of the phone, underneath the battery. You can verify that the SIM card is in place by removing the battery and viewing the SIM card through the SIM card cover. See Inserting/Removing the SIM Card on page 24 for information on locating the SIM card. If there is no SIM card in your phone, notify your sales representative. NOTE: Except for making emergency calls, your phone will not function without the SIM card. SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your SIM card is protected by a PIN. Each time the phone is powered on, you must enter your PIN. You can change or disable your PIN if desired. NOTE: Disabling your PIN enables anyone to use your phone. If you disable your PIN, you must still keep the SIM card in the phone to make calls. 18 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Security Features of the i88s Phone Entering the SIM PIN Depending on your Service Provider, your phone may or may not require you to enter a SIM PIN when you first use your phone. If your phone is required to enter a PIN, your default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card (see Changing the SIM PIN on page 20). P IMPORTANT:

Incorrectly entering your PIN three times causes the SIM card to be blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider. For more information, see Unblocking the SIM PIN on page 21 1 From the Enter SIM PIN screen, enter your four- to eight-digit PIN. An asterisk appears for each character entered. NOTE: Other than emergency dialing, you will be unable to use any of the phone functions, including receiving phone calls, until you enter the PIN. 2 Press B under OK. If you enter an incorrect PIN, the message SIM PIN incorrect: Try again appears on your phones screen. After three consecutive incorrect attempts, the SIM card is blocked. The phone does not allow you to attempt to enter your PIN again, even after powering the phone off and back on. If this happens, see Unblocking the SIM PIN on page 21. FIRST DRAFT 19 Changing the SIM PIN 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. B C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to New Passwords. Press B under SELECT to access the New Passwords screen. 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN and press B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. 7 At the Enter New SIM PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN Code screen, re-enter the new SIM PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. 20 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i88s Phone Unblocking the SIM PIN If you forget your PIN and unsuccessfully enter it three times, access to your phone will be blocked. NOTE: Before you begin, obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code from your service provider, then read and understand the PIN unblocking sequence. In entering the key press sequence, each key press must occur within 5 seconds of the prior key press. IMPORTANT:

If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK code ten times, the SIM card is permanently blocked and must be replaced. If this happens, all data will be lost. You will get a message to contact your service provider. If the SIM card is blocked, the i88s phone only allows outgoing Emergency calls. To unblock the PIN:

1 2 3 4 5 Press * * 0 5s. Enter the PUK code. Press s. Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press s. Re-enter your SIM PIN and press s. If you entered the codes properly, the SIM Unlocked screen displays. FIRST DRAFT 21 Disabling/Enabling the PIN Requirement When the PIN requirement is enabled, you are prompted to enter your PIN each time you turn on your phone. Until a valid PIN is entered, you can use the phone only to make emergency calls. After the PIN is accepted, the phone registers on the network and the Ready screen displays. When the PIN requirement is disabled, the phone can be used without entering a PIN. NOTE: If you disable the PIN requirement, you remove protection of personal data on your SIM card. Anyone can then use your phone and access your personal data. 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. P B 2 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. 22 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i88s Phone 3 Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN. Press B under SELECT to access the SIM PIN screen. 5 Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the SIM PIN requirement;

Off disables the SIM PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. FIRST DRAFT 23 Inserting/Removing the SIM Card IMPORTANT:

If you remove your SIM card and insert another SIM card into your phone, the following information is erased when you use the phone with the new SIM card:

Datebook events Recent Calls list Voice Record Voice names for Phonebook entries and Shortcuts Call Forwarding settings Call filtering settings in Styles Net Alerts Information stored in Memo Browser Bookmarks All Phonebook information will remain stored on your original SIM card. Do not touch the gold-colored areas of the SIM card. To avoid loss or damage, do not remove your SIM card from your phone unless absolutely necessary. 1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery cover and battery. See Detaching the Battery on page 14. 2 With the antenna facing away from you, and the back of the phone exposed and facing up, locate the SIM cover and gently push it forward. 24 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Security Features of the i88s Phone 3 Lift the SIM cover up. 4 5 To remove the SIM card, very carefully lift it out of its holder. Do not touch the gold-colored areas of the SIM card. NOTE: Protect the SIM card as you would any delicate object. When the SIM card is not in the phone, you should store it in something protective, such as a mailing envelope. To insert the SIM card, very carefully place it in its holder with the gold contact side facing down and the cut corner on the card properly aligned with the cut corner of the holder. Close the SIM card cover and slide it down until you hear a click. 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 FIRST DRAFT 25 Keypad Lock The i88s phone includes a Keypad Lock feature that enables you to quickly lock the phones keypad to avoid inadvertently pressing keys or placing calls. Once Keypad Lock is activated, you can only perform the following tasks:

Turn your phone on and off Unlock the keypad Receive incoming calls, messages, and alerts. NOTE: Emergency calls cannot be placed while Keypad Lock is activated. Before locking your phones keypad, you may want to read this entire section to learn how to respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts. Activating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Locked displays on your phone. D Whenever a key is pressed while in Keypad Lock mode, the unlock instructions display briefly. 26 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Security Features of the i88s Phone Receiving Incoming Calls When you receive an incoming phone call (see Receiving a Phone Call on page 65), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press B under YES or press s to answer the call. Or, Press A under NO or press e to send the call to Voice Mail and reactivate Keypad Lock. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. Receiving Private Calls When you receive an incoming Private call, Talkgroup call, or call alert (see Private Call on page 87), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press and hold the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. FIRST DRAFT 27 Receiving New Voice Mail When you receive new Voice Mail (see Voice Mail on page 80), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Voice Mail Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under CALL to access Voice Mail. 2 Once you have finished, press e to exit Voice Mail. The Recent Calls list displays. Press e or press B under EXIT to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. Receiving New Text Messages When you receive new Text Messages (see Text and Numeric Messaging on page 82), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Text Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under READ to read the message. Press B under SAVE or DELETE. 2 Once you have finished, press A under EXIT to reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. 28 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Security Features of the i88s Phone Receiving New Net Alerts When you receive a new Net Alert, Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Browser Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under GOTO. Press A under View. Press A under OK or Reply. 2 Once you have finished, press e until you reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. Deactivating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Unlocked displays briefly. E FIRST DRAFT 29 Status of Your i 88s Phone Your i88s phone has a status light that displays around the power button. The status light indicates the status of your connection. Status Light Indicator i88s Phone Status Flashing Red Signing on to the network. Please wait. Solid Red No service or out of coverage area. Flashing Green In service/Ready to use. Solid Green In use. My Information You can select My Info from the main menu to display or edit the following:

Name Enter your name in this field. Private ID Your Private ID is displayed in this field. Your Private ID is the number that others use to contact you using Private calls. Phone Numbers of Lines 1 and 2 Your phones numbers are displayed in these fields. You can edit the phone numbers displayed on the My Information screen, but this does not change your phone numbers. Carrier IP - This field displays your phones carrier assigned IP address. IP Addresses These fields display the IP addresses you use to access the Internet with your phone. Circuit Data Number (Ckt) Your circuit data number is in this field. Viewing/Editing My Information 1 2 30 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to My Info. Press B under SELECT. The My Information screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Using T9 Text Input 3 Use S to scroll through the fields. 4 To edit the displayed information, press B under CHANGE. Edit information as desired, and press B under OK to save the changes. To return to the Ready screen, press A under EXIT. Using T9 Text Input Your i88s phone has embedded software, called T9 Text Input, that makes typing on a phone keypad much like typing on a computer keyboard: it eliminates the traditional multi-tap method of text entry. As you type, you press only one key per letter. T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its linguistic database of approximately 60,000 words and proper names. You may also store additional words you frequently use in your own user database, which is incorporated into the T9 database. T9 Text Input is available when you are typing information into your Phonebook and Datebook. T9 Text Input Entry Modes Four text entry modes are available in T9 Text Input: Alpha, Word, Symbols, and Numeric. When you are using T9 Text Input, an icon in the top right corner of your phones display screen (next to the battery strength indicator icon) indicates the T9 Text Input entry mode you are using:

Icon T9 Entry Mode Name Used For... w

, Alpha Word Symbols Numeric Standard multi-tap keypad text entry. Entering words and punctuation with one key-press per character. Entering punctuation and symbols such as @ or ?. Entering keypad numbers. FIRST DRAFT 31 Choosing a Text Entry Mode You select your text entry mode from a menu available whenever the phone is displaying a screen that requires you to enter text (for example, the Name:

screen or Title: screen). To choose a text entry mode:

1 2 3 From any Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. A check mark appears next to the current text entry mode. When you access a Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, the default text entry mode is Alpha. Press S to highlight the T9 Text Input text entry mode you want to use. Press B under SELECT. The phone returns to the text entry screen. The text entry mode you selected is now active. Using Alpha Mode To enter text while in Alpha text entry mode to enter letters, numbers, and symbols:

Press any button on the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters, numbers, and symbols on that key. For example, to enter the letter Y, press 9 three times. Type a letter then press Q to activate Caps Lock or type a letter then press R to deactivate Caps Lock. Pause briefly to leave the currently displayed character in place and move on to the next place in the text entry field. Press P to create a space in the text entry field. Press A under DELETE to delete one character. Press and hold A under DELETE to delete an entire entry. Using Word Mode In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters on the keypad button you press and arranges them to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input matches 32 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Using T9 Text Input your keystrokes to words in its database and will display the most commonly used matching word. Special Key Functions Some of your phones keys assume different functions while in T9 Text Input Word mode. Backspace and Erase Press A under DELETE once to backspace or to erase a single character. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the entire text entry field. Space Press R once to accept a word and insert a space when entering text. Next Word in Database Press 0 to display more words in the database that match the keystroke sequence you entered. Shift and Caps Lock Press # to make the next letter typed uppercase (Shift), to make all subsequent letters types uppercase (Caps Lock), or to go back to lowercase letters. These icons appear in the top row of your display screen:

$ for Shift to uppercase x for Caps Lock When neither of these icons appear, letters typed are lowercase. NOTE: T9 Text Input automatically makes the first letter of a sentence uppercase. Punctuation In Word mode, T9 Text Input uses Smart Punctuation to quickly apply basic rules of grammar to insert the correct punctuation within a word and at the end of a sentence. Press 1 to insert punctuation. One of eight basic punctuation symbols will be inserted (. , - @ : ? ;). Press 0 to change the inserted punctuation symbol to another of the eight basic punctuation symbols. FIRST DRAFT 33

Press R to accept the punctuation and continue typing. NOTE: Additional punctuation symbols are available in Symbols mode. Enter a Word To enter a word using Word mode:

1 2 3 Choose Word as your text entry mode. Type a word by using one key-press per desired letter. For example, to type test press 8 3 7 8. The displayed word may change as you type it. Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to the end of the word before editing. If the word that appears is not the desired word, press 0 to change the word on the display to the next most likely word in the database. Repeat until the desired word appears. If the desired word does not appear, you can add it to the database of words using the instructions in Adding Words to the User Database on page 34. Adding Words to the User Database To add words to the T9 database:

1 2 3 4 34 Change from Word text entry mode to Alpha text entry mode. See Choosing a Text Entry Mode on page 32. Type the word using Alpha text entry mode. Return to Word text entry mode. Press R to add a space. The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is now in the database. NOTE: You cannot store alphanumeric combinations, such as Y2K. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Using T9 Text Input Choosing a Language To change the language of the database T9 Text Input chooses common words from:

1 2 3 4 5 From any Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. Press S to scroll to Languages. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the language of the database you want T9 Text Input text use. Press B under SELECT. Using Numeric Mode To use Numeric text entry mode, choose Numeric as your text entry mode and press the number buttons on your keypad to enter numbers. Using Symbols Mode To use Symbols text entry mode:

1 Choose Symbols as your text entry mode. A row of 32 symbols appears along the bottom of your phones display screen, just above the display option and menu icon. (Press T to view the complete row.) Press T to highlight the symbol you want to enter into the text entry field. Press B under SELECT to enter the symbol. 2 3 FIRST DRAFT 35 36 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Display Essentials Your i88s phones display screen tells you what you need to know as you use your phone. This section includes:

Display Screen Elements Status Icons Text Display Area Call Information Icons Menu Icon Display Options Navigating Menus and Lists Main Menu Options Page 37 Page 38 Page 40 Page 40 Page 41 Page 41 Page 41 Page 43 Display Screen Elements Any time your phone is powered on, the display screen provides you with information and options. The Ready Screen The Ready screen displays any time the phone is powered on, but not engaged in some activity. The Ready screen consist of elements common to many of the screens your phone displays:

status icons text display area menu icon icon rows A Status Menu icon Text display area Display options FIRST DRAFT 37

display options USER TIP: You can always access the Ready screen by pressing e. Status Icons Status icons provide you with information about your phone and its functions. These icons are context sensitive; meaning, the icons that appear depend on the task you are performing. Status icons appear in the two rows at the top of the display screen. Some appear at all times. Others appear only when your phone is engaged in certain activities or when you have activated certain features. Icon Indicates... abcd efgd opqrs 01 GHI JKL c h

Battery Strength icons remaining battery charge. More bars on the battery indicate a greater charge. See the table on page 15 for detailed information about the meaning of each battery strength icon. Signal Strength icons strength of the network signal. More bars next to the antenna indicate a stronger signal. Active Line icons currently active phone line; 0 indicates Line 1 is active; 1 indicates Line 2 is active. Call Forward icons phone is set to forward calls. See Call Forwarding on page 75 for more information. Phone In Use phone is connected on an active call. Private In Use number being called is a Private ID. Talkgroup In Use phone is active on a talkgroup call. 38 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Y Z

l

. y B u

Display Screen Elements Packet Data Ready phone is ready to receive data through a data cable. Packet Data Activity phone is transmitting data. Mobile IP phone is ready to access the Internet. Secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a secure connection. Non-secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a non-secure connection. Roaming phone is searching for network connections outside your local area. Text Message you have one or more Text Messages or Net Alert messages. Voice Mail you have one or more Voice Mail messages. FaxMail you have one or more FaxMail messages. Speaker Off phones speaker is off. Ring/Vibe icons you have customized the way in which the phone is set to notify you when you receive calls and other types of messages. See Ring Style and Notification Type on page 133 for more information. FIRST DRAFT 39 w#,!

$x

T9 Text Input icons you are using T9 Text Input to enter text. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for more information. TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications The icon of the main menu feature currently in use always appears in the top left of the status icon rows. For a list of the main menu icons, see Main Menu Options on page 43. Text Display Area On the Ready screen, the text displayed in this area is determined by your wireless communications provider. When you access other screens, this area displays menu options, messages, names, phone numbers, and other information. The number of lines of text displayed in the text display area depends on which display view is selected Standard view, Compressed view, or Zoom view.

(For more information, see Setting Text Display on page 143.) In Standard view, five lines of text are displayed. NOTE: Standard view is the default display setting. Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Call Information Icons Each of the following icons appear on the left side of the text display area providing you with information about your phones line or lines. Icon D E X Indicates... In Call - phone is on an active call. Incoming Call - phone is receiving an incoming call. Outgoing Call - phone is placing an outgoing call. 40 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Navigating Menus and Lists z

On Hold - phone has a call on hold. End Call - phone has ended the active call. Menu Icon This menu icon S appears on any screen from which a menu can be accessed. To access a menu, press the menu key on your keypad. This key has the menu icon printed on it. Menus are context sensitive. The menu that appears depends on the screen you access it from and the items on the menu apply to the task you are currently performing. Press m from the Ready screen to access the main menu. Display Options Two display options appear at the bottom of most screens. These options enable you to perform a wide variety of actions, including changing, saving and viewing information, running programs, and canceling previous actions. You activate a display option by pressing the option key below it. The Ready screen display options provide quick access to two main menu features. By default, the Phonebook (PHBK) and Messages (MESG) display options appear on the Ready screen. You can control which display options appear on the Ready screen using the phones Personalize feature in the Settings menu (see Changing Ready Screen Options on page 138). The display options on screens other than the Ready screen cannot be customized. Navigating Menus and Lists The i88s phone is menu driven. By navigating menus, you access submenus which lead to all of the functions and features that are built into your phone. Use the menus to store calls, manage your Phonebook and Datebook, change your phone settings, browse the Internet, and more. Some features include lists of names, numbers, or other information. These list items can be accessed the same way menu options are. FIRST DRAFT 41 To access the items in a menu or list, scroll through using the four-way navigation key N near the center of your keypad. Scroll down by pressing the lower portion of the navigation key R. Scroll up by pressing the upper portion of the navigation key Q. Holding down the appropriate part of the navigation key speeds up scrolling. If you continue scrolling after you have reached the bottom or top of a menu or list, you wrap-around to the opposite end (if the scroll setting is set to wraparound). If more items appear in a menu or list than can be displayed in the text area, a down arrow or up arrow appears in the left side of the screen indicating that more options may be accessed by scrolling up or down. Down arrow Up arrow B S 42 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Main Menu Options Main Menu Options By default, the main menu options appear in the order determined by your service provider. You can change the order in which they appear by using the Personalize feature (see Reordering Main Menu on page 138) To access the main menu, press m from the Ready screen:

Menu Item 7 Browser F Java m Settings

( VoiceRecord b Phonebook R Messages

; Call Forward

= Datebook O Memo z Call Timers Use to ... Browse the Web. Run pre-installed and download custom Java applications on your phone. Customize your phone: Ring/Vibe, In Call Setup, Security, Personalize, Initial Setup, Phone Setup, Voice Volume, and Talkgroup Settings. Record personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls to play back at a later time. Store and retrieve a list of stored entries for calling, editing, viewing and deleting. Receive, store, access and manage Voice Mail, FaxMail, Text Messages, and Net Alert. Settings for forwarding calls in various situations. Schedule and organize events, by the day or the month, such as appointments and meetings. Input and store numbers to access later. Display the duration of phone calls, private or group calls, circuit data use, and Kilobytes sent and received. FIRST DRAFT 43 j Recent Calls n Shortcuts U My Info v Styles

: Call Alert Access a list of the last 20 sent, received, or missed calls. Calls can be made from this list. Associate a menu option with a number on the alphanumeric keypad for quick and easy access. View the name, Private ID, phone numbers for lines 1 and 2, IP address, and circuit data number of your phone. Create or edit a group of settings and save them as one for use in different environments. Store received call alerts to respond to at your convenience.

[icon pending] GPS Find your phones exact geographical location. To choose the highlighted Main Menu selection, press B under SELECT. To exit the Main Menu (and return to the Ready screen), press A under EXIT or press e. 44 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store up to 250 frequently used names and numbers. When you store information in your Phonebook, it is saved on your SIM card. If you move your SIM card to another SIM-based Motorola iDEN phone, you can access information in your Phonebook from that phone. This section includes:

Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Phonebook Icons Voice Names Accessing Your Phonebook About Phonebook Entries Viewing Phonebook Entries Sorting Phonebook Entries Adding Phonebook Entries Editing Phonebook Entries Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly Deleting Phonebook Entries Pause Digit Entry Plus Dialing Page 46 Page 46 Page 46 Page 47 Page 47 Page 48 Page 48 Page 49 Page 50 Page 56 Page 54 Page 56 Page 56 Page 58 FIRST DRAFT 45 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone If you plan to use the information stored in your Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or any other GSM phone, you must purchase CompanionPro. Go to www.motorola.com/iden or your service providers web site for more information. You can use CompanionPro to make the Phonebook information saved to your i88s phones SIM card accessible in this type of phone. Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Your Phonebook can store multiple phone numbers to a single name. For example, you can enter someones name into your Phonebook once and then assign that persons home, office, mobile phone and fax numbers to the name. Each number stored in your Phonebook is automatically assigned a Speed Dial number that corresponds to its location in your Phonebook. Each phone number uses one Speed Dial location, even if it is assigned to the same name as other phone numbers. The phone number stored in location 1 is assigned Speed Dial number 1, the phone number stored in location 2 is assigned Speed Dial number 2, and so forth, to location 250. Phonebook Icons Icons that appear to the right of entries in your Phonebook convey information about those entries. When you enter a phone number in your Phonebook, you can designate the phone numbers type using any of the following icons:

W h q Q L b Mobile Private Work Main Home Pager 46 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Voice Names K Z n Fax Other Talkgroup For more information on entering phone numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. The picker arrows appearing around the phone number type icon indicates multiple phone numbers stored under one name:

ef pickers The Voice Name icon appearing to the left of one of the phone number type icons indicates that a voice name is associated with the Phonebook entry:

p Voice Name Voice Names A voice name is an audio recording you make that you assign to a number in your Phonebook by speaking into your i88s phone . You can then dial the number by speaking the words you recorded into the phone. See step 6 of Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50 for more information on creating a voice name. Accessing Your Phonebook If PHBK is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press A under PHBK. If PHBK is not one of your display options:

1 From the Ready screen, press m. FIRST DRAFT 47 2 3 Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. USER TIP: You can also access the Phonebook by pressing m while your phone is in a phone call or private call. This brings you to the Phonebook screen. From this screen, you can view, sort, add, edit, and delete Phonebook entries, check Phonebook capacity, or make calls. About Phonebook Entries Each Phonebook entry may contain the following information:

The name associated with the entry. Typically, this is the name of the person whose number you are storing in the Phonebook. The type of number to be stored: Mobile, Private, Work, Main, Home, Pager, Fax, Other, or Talkgroup. The phone number to be stored. Every Phonebook entry must contain a phone number. This number may be any type of phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup number. A Speed Dial number. You may accept the default Speed Dial number or assign a different one. A voice name audio recording for voice-activated dialing. Viewing Phonebook Entries Names with more than one number assigned to them appear with ef surrounding the icon to the right of the name. For example, if you had stored a home and work number for Joe Smith, the entry for Joe Smiths home phone number would look like this:

Joe Smith eLf When the name is highlighted, press T to scroll to the icons representing each of the numbers assigned to that name. 48 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

About Phonebook Entries To view any of the phone numbers assigned to a name:

1 2 From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the name associated with the phone number you want to see. Press T to view the icons representing the phone numbers assigned to that name. 3 When the icon representing the number you want to view is displayed, press B under VIEW. If there is a Private ID or a Talkgroup number stored for the person, press m. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. 4 Press S to view the other numbers stored for this name. Sorting Phonebook Entries You can sort your Phonebook entries by:

Name the name you entered for the entry. Speed # the Speed Dial location of the entry. Voice Name all entries with voice names appear at the top of the list. NOTE: Private calls cannot be made from the Phonebook when sorted by Speed Dial location. To sort your Phonebook list:

1 From the Phonebook screen, press m to view the Phonebook Menu screen.

2 Press R to scroll to Sort By. FIRST DRAFT 49

3 4 5 Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the desired sorting method: Name, Speed No., or Voice Name. Press B under SELECT. Checking Phonebook Capacity Your Phonebook can store up to 250 numbers of any kind. To see how many entries are stored in your Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Phonebook screen, press m to view the Phonebook Menu screen. Press R to scroll to Capacity. Press B under SELECT. The Capacity screen shows how many storage spaces in you Phonebook are in use and how many are empty. Adding Phonebook Entries Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Phonebook Entry Details screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Entry Details screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Entry Details screen. NOTE: Number and Type are required for a valid Phonebook entry. After you have entered a phone number and any other information you wish to include, you can press A under DONE to save the Phonebook entry. To cancel a Phonebook entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. 50 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries To add a Phonebook entry:

1 To access the Entry Details screen:

From the Phonebook screen with [New Entry] highlighted, press B under SELECT. Or, From the Phonebook screen, press m. Then press R to scroll to New and press B under SELECT. 2 If you want to assign a name to your Phonebook entry:

With the Name field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Name screen, enter the name using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for information about entering text into this field. When you are finished, press B under OK. H I The Entry Details screen returns with the Type field highlighted. 3 To assign the number type:

With the Type field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Type Editor screen, press R to scroll to the type of phone number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen returns with the

# field highlighted. J FIRST DRAFT 51 4 Assign a phone number to your Phonebook entry:

With the # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Type the number using the alphanumeric keypad. For phone numbers, use the 10-digit format. To delete a digit, press A under DELETE. K See Pause Digit Entry on page 56 and Plus Dialing on page 58 for information on using these features when storing phone numbers in you Phonebook. NOTE: The number can be up to 20 characters long. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Entry Details screen returns with the Speed # field highlighted. 5 The default Speed Dial number assigned to the Phonebook entry is displayed in the Speed # field. This is always the next available Speed Dial location. If you want to assign the phone number to a different Speed Dial location:

With the Speed # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to delete the current Speed Dial number. L Type the new Speed Dial number using the alphanumeric keypad. When you are finished, press B under OK. 52 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT About Phonebook Entries 6 If you want to assign a voice name to the number:

With the Voice Name field highlighted, press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. M An ) icon appears in the Voice Name field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP: For best results, record in a quiet environment. 7 If you want to store more phone numbers to the name associated with this Phonebook entry:

b T Press R to scroll to the bottom of the Type field and then press B under CHANGE. A new Type field appears for the additional number. Enter the information for the additional phone number using step 3 through step 7. NOTE: Each name in your Phonebook may have up to seven phone numbers and one Private ID associated with it. 8 When you have entered all the information you wanted in this Phonebook entry, press A under DONE. N FIRST DRAFT 53 Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly Your phone gives you two ways to store phone numbers quickly: from the Ready screen and from the Recent Calls list. To store a number from the Ready screen:

1 2 From the Ready screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the number you want to store. Press m to access the Dialing Menu screen. 3 With Store Number highlighted, press B under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen. 4 To store to a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen will display with the number entered in the field. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field. From the Entry Details screen, press S to scroll to the first Type field. From the Type Editor screen, press S to scroll to the selection that you want to assign to the phone number. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. Press A under DONE. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT 5 6 7 8 54 About Phonebook Entries To store a number from the Recent Calls list:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the 10-digit telephone number you want to store. Press B under STORE. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To store a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the type of number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. Press A under DONE. To store a Private ID from the Recent Calls list:

1 Press R to scroll to the Private ID number you want to store. Note:

The Store option for Private ID numbers (e.g., 123*123*1234), will not display in the Recent Calls list. 2 With the Private ID highlighted, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Store. Press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. Follow steps 3-6 in "To store a number from the Recent Calls list" (listed on the previous page). FIRST DRAFT 55 Editing Phonebook Entries 1 2 3 4 5 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to edit. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Edit. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50 to edit the various fields. Deleting Phonebook Entries 1 2 3 4 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete Contact or Delete Number. Delete Contact deletes the name and all numbers associated with that name. Delete Number deletes the number associated with the icon that is currently displayed in the Phonebook list for the name. The name and all the other numbers will remain. Press B under SELECT. A warning screen displays requiring you to confirm the deletion. Pause Digit Entry When storing a number, you can program your phone so that it will not only dial a number but also pause before entering another series of numbers such as a personal identification number (PIN) or password. This feature is particularly useful for accessing automated services such as voice mail and banking systems from your i88s phone. 56 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Pause Digit Entry Heres how it works. Lets say you have a company voice mail account that you frequently check while traveling. And, to access that account you must do the following:

Dial your work number;

Press # while the voice mail greeting is being played; and Enter your PIN to access your messages. You can program your phone to enter all of the above information for you. All you have to do is separate each entry with a pause. If you were to program your phone to automatically input the above information, the stored data would look like this 17035551234P#P1234. In this example, the first eleven digits represent the number that must be dialed to access your voice mail. The P represents a 3 second pause. The # interrupts your greeting. The second P represents another 3 second pause. The last four digits represent your PIN. You can use this feature not only to enter PINs and passwords but also to have the phone automatically select menu options (i.e., press 1 to hear messages). To create a three-second pause follow the steps below:

Press and hold * for two seconds. The pause symbol (P) will appear on the display screen. NOTE: You can enter up to 20 characters in a single entry, stored or dialed. NOTE: If you use a system that will not let you enter an option until the automated message has played in its entirety, you can program your phone to pause for more than 3 seconds. For example, performing the above step twice will program two pauses and cause your phone to wait 6 seconds before entering the next set of numbers. FIRST DRAFT 57

Plus Dialing This feature enables you to place an international call from most countries without entering the local international access code. Use Plus Dialing for all Phonebook entries if you plan to travel outside the United States. Begin by following the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. Before you type the phone number to be stored:

1 2 3 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. Follow the rest of the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. 58 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Digital Cellular The i88s phone enables you to make and receive domestic and international phone calls, make emergency calls, and be notified of a missed call. This section includes:

Making Phone Calls Emergency Calling Receiving a Phone Call Ending a Phone Call Recent Calls Call Timers Hands-Free Speakerphone Mute Call Waiting Call Hold Three-Way Calling Call Forwarding Page 59 Page 65 Page 65 Page 65 Page 65 Page 69 Page 70 Page 70 Page 71 Page 72 Page 74 Page 75 Making Phone Calls Your i88s phone provides the following features for making phone calls:

Direct Dial Phonebook Recent Calls Speed Dial Turbo Dial FIRST DRAFT 59

Voice-Activated Dialing Last Number Redial TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications. Using Direct Dial 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, use the keypad to enter the number you want to call. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. NOTE: See Plus Dialing on page 58 for information on making international calls. If you make a mistake:

To clear one digit, press A under DELETE. To clear all digits, press and hold A under DELETE. To cancel, press e. Making Calls from the Phonebook After you have entered phone numbers into your Phonebook, you can use these numbers to make phone calls. For information on entering numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. 60 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Making Phone Calls To make calls from the Phonebook:

1 From the Ready screen, if PHBK is one of your display options, press A under PHBK. Or, From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press R to scroll through the names in your Phonebook. Or, Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the first letter of the name and press R to scroll through the names beginning with that letter. Stop when the name of the person you want to call is highlighted. 3 If more than one number is stored for the person you want to call, ef appears around the icon to the right of the persons name. Press T to scroll through the icons representing the numbers stored for that person. Or, Press B under VIEW to view all the numbers stored for this person. Then press R to scroll to the number you want to call. For more information on assigning multiple numbers to one person, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. 4 5 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. FIRST DRAFT 61 Making Calls from the Recent Calls List Your phone stores the numbers of the last 20 calls you received or sent in the Recent Calls list. 1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to Recent Calls is not the first item on the list, press S to scroll to it. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll the list received or sent recent calls until you reach the desired call. To view additional information about the call:

Press B under VIEW. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. 2 3 4 5 Using Speed Dial Each phone number stored in your Phonebook is assigned a Speed Dial number. You can use the Speed Dial number to quickly place a call. 1 2 3 4 62 From the Ready screen, enter the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone number you want to call. Press #. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Making Phone Calls Using Turbo Dial Turbo Dial allows you to call the numbers in your Phonebook associated with Speed Dial numbers 1 through 9 by pressing and holding the corresponding numeric key on the keypad. Press and hold a number (keys 1 through 9). NOTE: Turbo Dial cannot be accessed while the browser is active, nor while Keypad Lock or SIM Lock is active. Making Calls Using Voice-Activated Dialing If you have recorded a voice name for a phone number in your Phonebook (see Voice Names on page 47), you can use this voice name to call the number. USER TIP: If you have difficulty making phone calls using a voice name, try assigning a longer voice name to the number. For example, if the voice name Joe fails to place a call to Joe Smiths number, try assigning the voice name Joe Smith to the number. 1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the phone number you want to call. 3 Your phone will play the name back to you. The call will automatically be placed. Last Number Redial Press and hold s to redial the last number you called. FIRST DRAFT 63 Making TTY Calls NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. You can use your phone to make calls using a TTY device. When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the TTY mode you last selected. You can change the TTY mode during a call. For more information on choosing a TTY mode, see Setting TTY Mode on page 144. To make a call using a TTY device:

Q 1 2 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the jack on the phone. (To locate the jack, see page 12.) Connect the other end of the cord into your TTY device. Enter the phone number you wish to call and press. Placing International Phone Calls When making an international call, you can either enter the international access code directly (011 in the United States) or use Plus Dialing. You can make international calls from your Phonebook if you have stored the numbers with Plus Dialing. See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50 and Plus Dialing on page 58 for more information. NOTE: Your service default is International Calls Restricted. Therefore, you must contact Customer Care to obtain international dialing access. To make an international call using Plus Dialing:

1 2 64 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Emergency Calling 3 4 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Emergency Calling Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency calls can be made even when the SIM card is blocked or not in the phone. To place a call in an emergency, dial 911s. You will be connected to the nearest emergency dispatch center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. NOTE: If you have enabled the Keypad Lock feature, you must unlock the phones keypad before any call can be made, including 911 emergency calls. Receiving a Phone Call Incoming calls are indicated by a ring, vibration, or backlight illumination. Press s or any key on the keypad or press B under YES to answer the call. Ending a Phone Call Press e to hang up. Recent Calls The Recent Calls feature stores the phone numbers of the 20 most recent calls you have made and received, including private and talkgroup calls. You can access Recent Calls to:

view your recent calls store numbers to the Phonebook delete recent calls call numbers on the Recent Calls list NOTE: The Recent Calls list displays briefly after each call. FIRST DRAFT 65

Viewing Recent Calls To view your Recent Calls list:

1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to scroll to Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press S to scroll the list of recent calls. If the number of the recent call is stored in your Phonebook, the name associated with the phone number appears on the Recent Calls list. For private calls, Talkgroup calls, and numbers stored in your Phonebook, an icon appears to the right of the name of number indicating the Phonebook type of the number used in the call. See Phonebook Icons on page 46 for more information about Phonebook types. For phone calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

N indicates an incoming call a indicates an outgoing call V indicates a missed call. (Missed calls appear on your Recent Calls list only if you have Caller ID.) For private calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

h indicates a Private Call

% indicates a Group Call 66 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Recent Calls Getting Detailed Information About Recent Calls To get more information about a recent call:

1 2 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want more information on. Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. The Call Details screen that appears displays information such as the name associated with the phone number of the recent call, the phone number, the date, time, and duration of the call. Storing a Recent Call Number to the Phonebook To store a number from the Recent Calls list to the Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the number you want to store. Press B under STORE. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to Store and press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To store a Recent Call number of Private ID to the Phonebook, follow step 3-6 in Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly on page 54. Calling From the Recent Calls List See Making Calls from the Recent Calls List on page 62. FIRST DRAFT 67 Deleting Recent Calls To delete a recent call:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want to delete. Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. To delete all calls on the Recent Calls list:

1 2 3 4 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. Accessing Voice Record From Recent Calls You can access the Voice Record feature from Recent Calls and use it to record spoken messages that you can listen to later. 1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press S to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT. For more information about Voice Record, see Voice Record on page 119. 68 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Missed Calls Missed Calls Missed calls are shown on the display screen with the missed call icon V . Call Timers Call Timers measure the duration of your phone calls, Private or Group calls, and circuit data use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone. The Call Timers menu displays the following options:

Last Call displays the duration of your most recent phone call. Phone Reset keeps a running total of your phone call minutes, until you reset it. Phone Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your phone calls. Prvt/Grp Reset keeps a running total of all of your Private and Group call minutes, until you reset it. Prvt/Grp Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your Private and Groups calls. Circuit Reset keeps a running total of all of your circuit data use, until you reset it. Circuit Lifetime displays the total minutes of all of your circuit data use. Kbytes Reset keeps a running total of the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone, until you reset it. To view the Call Timers menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Timers. Press B under SELECT. To view or reset a Call Timers option:

1 From the Call Timers menu, press S to scroll to the Call Timers option you want to view or reset. FIRST DRAFT 69

2 3 Press B under SELECT. If the feature does not include an option to reset or you do not wish to reset the option, press A under DONE when you are finished viewing. To reset a feature, press B under RESET. When the confirmation screen appears, press A under YES to confirm the reset. NOTE: The values displayed by Call Timers should not be used for billing. Call timers are estimates only. Hands-Free Speakerphone The i88s phone provides the convenience of a hands-free speakerphone for holding impromptu meetings or placing safer phone calls. The speakerphone option (SPEAKER) is available whenever you are on an active call. To turn the speakerphone on:

While on an active call, press B under SPEAKER. NOTE: During speakerphone operation, you may either speak or listen, but you cannot do both at the same time. While speakerphone is on, Spkrphone On appears in the text display area. To turn the speakerphone off:

Press B under SPEAKER. Mute Use the Mute feature to listen to incoming audio without allowing sound from your phones microphone to be transmitted over the phone line. To turn mute on:

While on an active call, press B under MUTE. 70 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Call Waiting While mute is on, UNMUTE appears as a display option. To turn mute off:

Press B under UNMUTE. Call Waiting Call Waiting allows you to receive a second call while you are talking on the phone. You can switch between calls so you never have to miss a call. By default, Call Waiting is always on unless you turn it off for a specific call. If youre on a call and you receive a second call, you will:

hear a tone; and see a message on your display informing you of another incoming call. Accepting Calls e Press B under YES. The first call is placed on hold. To end the active call and accept the second call, press e. Switching Between Calls When you accept a second call while you are talking on the phone, your display shows the name or number of each call. An icon appears to the left of each name or number indicating that the call on hold z or active D. Press B under SWITCH to switch between calls. FIRST DRAFT 71

Declining Calls Press A under NO. If you subscribe to Voice Mail, the call will be forwarded to your Voice Mail box. Ending the Active Call Press e. Turning Off Call Waiting If you do not want to be interrupted during a call, you can turn Call Waiting off prior to making/receiving a call. 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings, and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to In Call Setup and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Call Waiting and press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT. Call Waiting is now disabled for the next call. It will automatically reset to On when you hang up. Call Hold When you are on an active call, you can place the call on hold and make a second call. To place an active call on hold:

1 2 72 Press m to access the Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Hold. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Call Hold 3 4 Press B under SELECT. If you have not placed a second call, you can resume this call by pressing B under RESUME. To place a second call while the first call is on hold:

1 2 Enter the second phone number you want to call. Or select the number from your Phonebook by pressing m and selecting Phonebook. Press s to place the second call. To toggle between the two calls:

Press B under SWITCH. To end the active call:

Press e. The call on hold becomes active. FIRST DRAFT 73 Three-Way Calling Using Three-Way Calling, you can combine two ongoing phone calls into one conversation. While on an active call, you can make a second call and combine the two calls. When you place or receive a phone call, the 3-WAY option appears in the bottom left-hand corner of the display screen. To make a three-way call:

1 Place or receive a phone call. 2 While in a call, press mto access Call Menu. 3 4 5 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. The first call will be placed on hold. Enter the second phone number you want to call and press s to place the second call. Or, access the number from your Phonebook:

Press m and then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. To place the call, see Making Calls from the Phonebook on page 60. 6 After you reach the second individual, press m. 7 8 74 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. Both calls will appear on your display. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Call Forwarding forwards calls to the number you designate. The following Call Forwarding options are available:

All Calls When this option is turned on, all calls will be sent automatically to a number you specify. Detailed Choosing this option enables you to forward calls you missed to different numbers, or to Voice Mail, depending on why you missed each call:

Busy your phone is engaged in other activities. No Answer you do not answer. The phone will ring 4 times before forwarding the call. Unreachable your phone is out of coverage or powered off. NOTE: For you to receive Voice Mail messages, the All Calls option must be set to Off and the Detailed options must be set to your Voice Mail access number. Your Voice Mail access number is the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number followed by 6245. This is the default setting. You can forward Line 1 and Line 2 independently. When your phone is set to forward all calls, one of the following icons appears on the top row of your display screen to indicate the call forwarding option you have chosen:

Icon Indicates... G H I J Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. FIRST DRAFT 75

K L Line 2 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. Turning On Call Forwarding 1 2 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. 3 At the Call Forward screen, the Forward field is highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. 4 5 6 7 Press S to scroll to All Calls. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. To activate a call forwarding number:

If you have never used Call Forwarding before, the Forward screen appears. To enter a call forwarding number, type the number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. Or, If you have used Call Forwarding before, the call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE to access the Forward screen. To forward your calls to this number, press B under OK. To forward your calls to a different number, press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. Type the new number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. 76 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Your calls will now be forwarded to the number that you selected. Turning Off Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 1 2 3 4 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field highlighted. Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT. {

You will now receive all calls on your phone. When you are unavailable, your calls will be forwarded according to your Detailed call forwarding settings. By default, the Detailed option is set to forward your calls to Voice Mail. Setting Call Forwarding to Voice Mail In most cases, turning off Call Forwarding restores your ability to receive Voice Mail messages when you are unavailable (see Turning Off Call Forwarding on page 77). If you have completed those steps but are still not able to receive Voice Mail messages, you can reset Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. FIRST DRAFT 77 For you to receive Voice Mail messages, Call Forwarding must be set to Detailed with your Voice Mail access number:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field set to Detailed. Press R to scroll to the If Busy field and press B under CHANGE. The call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE. If this is your Voice Mail access number (the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number followed by 6245), go to step 7. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. Enter your Voice Mail access number. Your Voice Mail access number is the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number, followed by 6245. (For example 7035556245.) Press B under OK. Repeat step 3 through step 7 for the If No Answer field and the If Unreachable field. 9 When finished, press A under EXIT. 78 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Message Center Voice Mail Text and Numeric Messaging Net Alert Using Your Phone as a Modem Messages Page 79 Page 80 Page 82 Page 84 Page 85 Message Center The Message Center enables you to access all messaging services through one screen. To access the Message Center:

If MESG is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press B under MESG. If MESG is not one of your display options:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Messages. Press B under SELECT. The Message Center screen displays the number of messages you have in each message service Voice Mail (Voice Mail), Text Msgs (Text and Numeric Messages), and Net Alerts (Net Mail). FIRST DRAFT 79 To access any message service:

1 2 From the Message Center screen, press R to scroll to the message service you want to access. Press B under the display option on the right. This option varies depending on the message service selected. Voice Mail New Message Indicators When you receive a new message:

New Voice Mail Message will display on the screen. f Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under CALL or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Transferring Calls to Voice Mail Press A under NO while your phone is ringing to transfer incoming calls directly to Voice Mail. 80 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Using Voice Mail Logging Into Voice Mail 1 From the Ready screen, press B under MESG to open up the Message Center screen. 2 Voice Mail should be highlighted to indicate that it is selected. If it isnt highlighted, press S to scroll to the Voicemail field. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Using Voice Mail A g 3 Press B under CALL to log into your Carriers Voice Mail System. Calling displays as you are connected to the network. FIRST DRAFT 81 Text and Numeric Messaging With Text and Numeric Messaging, your i88s phone will:

Allow text (alpha) messages up to 140 characters in length. Allow numeric messages up to 20 characters in length. Accept your messages even if you are unavailable, if your phone is turned off, or if you are busy on another call. Alert you of a new text or numeric message, even if you are on another call. Store a message if you are making a Private or Group call and deliver it upon completion of the call. Store the message if you are outside of the coverage area and deliver it as soon as you are back in a coverage area. Attempt continuous delivery of messages until successful, for up to 7 days. With Text and Numeric Messaging, your i88s phone will:

Refer to text and numeric messages as Text Messages. Stamp the message with the time and date the message was left. Store up to 16 messages at a time, that will remain until you delete them. NOTE: Mail Waiting, Memory Full displays when 16 message registers are full. (Messages must be erased before you can receive others.) Allow for Auto Call Back of a phone number that is included within a message, by pressing s. If the message contains two phone numbers, Auto Call Back will dial the last number. 82 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Text and Numeric Messaging Notification of New Messages When you receive a new message:

New Text Message will display on the screen. i Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under READ or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Accessing New Messages When you receive a message, you can view it immediately or later:

View a Message Immediately 1 2 3 Press B under READ. The message displays. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. Viewing a Message Later Press A under EXIT. The . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. FIRST DRAFT 83

Viewing Stored Messages 1 2 3 4 5 In the Message Center screen, press S to scroll down to Text Msgs. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Press B under SELECT. The Text Msg Inbox screen appears. Press S to scroll to the message you want to read and press B under READ. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. Net Alert With Net Alert, you can send text and numeric messages in any of three ways:

from your i88s phone from a web site provided by your service provider from any email application When you receive a new message:

Words will display on your phones display screen indicating that you have a Net Alert message. (The exact words displayed are determined by your service provider.) Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until your press B to access the message or A to or exit the screen. If you choose to exit the screen and view the message later, the . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. You can view new or stored Net Alert messages at any time by access the Message Center. For more information, see Message Center on page 79. 84 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Using Your Phone as a Modem Using Your Phone as a Modem NOTE: Some features may be network dependent or subscription only, and may not be available in all areas. Contact your service provider for more information. You can use your i88s phone as a modem for data transfer from your laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer. This is particularly useful when there is no wired phone line (wall jack) available. You simply attach a data cable (available separately) to your phone and your computer. From that point, your phone is your modem. This allows you to send or receive time-critical information such as email, a field service report, or files. In addition, you can also send or receive faxes. This type of wireless connection uses one of two types of data connection:

circuit-switched data and packet data. Circuit-switched data is typically used for sending and receiving faxes and for transferring large files. Packet data is used for small file transfers such as email. To use these services, you must install the iDEN Wireless Data Services software (available separately). For more information on setting up your computer and your i88s phone for Packet and Circuit Data calls, see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide and contact your carrier. TTY Users You can use your phone and computer in TTY mode. Your computer screen and keyboard replace the standard TTY device. For more information, please see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide. FIRST DRAFT 85

86 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Private Calls The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Private Call Call Alerts Group Call Page 87 Page 90 Page 94 Private Call There are two ways to reach an individual using Private calls. You can enter the persons Private ID number then press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. Or, you can store the persons name and Private ID number, then recall the number from your Phonebook. Whether you dial the persons Private ID directly or store it in your Phonebook, you must have the individuals Private ID to use Private calls. To learn how to store names and numbers, see Phonebook on page 45. USER TIP: To find out your own Private ID number, see My Information on page 30. Making a Private Call from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you are trying to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. FIRST DRAFT 87 Making a Private Call from the Phonebook If you have stored a persons Private ID in your Phonebook, you can use your Phonebook to make a Private call to that person:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll through the names until the desired name is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call from the Recent Call List 1 2 3 4 5 88 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll through the names and numbers until the desired name or Private ID number is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Private Call Making Calls Using Voice-Activated Dialing If you have recorded a voice name for a Private ID in your Phonebook (see Voice Names on page 47), you can use this voice name to call the number. 1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the Private ID you want to call. 3 Your phone will play the name back to you. Press the PTT button. USER TIP: If you have difficulty making phone calls using a voice name, try assigning a longer voice name to the number. For example, if the voice name Joe fails to place a call to Joe Smiths number, try assigning the voice name Joe Smith to the number. Receiving a Private Call When you receive a Private call, your phone emits a chirping sound and Private in Use appears on the screen. The Private ID or the name of the caller (if stored in your Phonebook) displays. To respond to a Private Call:

1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Storing Private IDs For information store Private ID numbers to your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50. For information on how to quickly store Private ID numbers, see Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly on page 54. FIRST DRAFT 89 Call Alerts You can send a call alert, which lets recipients know that you would like to talk with them. When you send an alert, the recipient will receive a series of beeps and your name or Private ID will appear on the display. Placing a Call Alert from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you want to call. Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen displays. Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. Placing a Call Alert from the Phonebook 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll down to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the Phonebook entry for the person you want to alert. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. 90 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT 4 Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen appears. Call Alerts V 5 Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. Ready to Alert Screen Ready to Alert is used to confirm your request for the alert and to prompt you to push the PTT button:

If you press the PTT button, the call alert is sent, and the phone displays the Recent Calls screen. For call alerts placed from the keypad, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Dial screen with the previously entered number displayed. For call alerts placed from the Phonebook, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Phonebook screen. If you do nothing, the phone will revert to the Ready screen. Receiving Call Alerts When you receive a call alert, your phone emits a chirp and displays the name or number of the caller. You can answer, queue, or clear the call alert:

To answer a call alert, press the PTT button. To queue a call alert, press B under QUEUE. To clear the call alert, press A under CLEAR. NOTE: Until you answer, queue or clear the Call Alert, you will not receive any additional phone, Private or Talkgroup Calls. FIRST DRAFT 91

Call Alert Queue Call alert queuing enables you to save call alerts in a list, or queue. To store a call alert in the call alert queue, press B under QUEUE when you have received an incoming call alert. Accessing the Call Alert Queue 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. The Call Alert Queue screen displays. Viewing Call Alert Date and Time To find out the date and time a call alert was received:

1 2 3 4 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the desired call alert. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to View. Press B under SELECT. Sorting Call Alerts To sort your call alerts by the order they were received:

1 2 3 92 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press S to scroll to Sort By. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Call Alerts 4 5 Press S to scroll to First on Top or Last on Top. Press B under SELECT. Responding to a Call Alert From the Queue 1 2 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. You can respond by sending a call alert or placing a Private call. To send a call alert, press B under ALERT and then press the PTT button. Or, To place a Private call, press the PTT button. The call alert will be removed from the queue. Deleting a Call Alert From the Queue To delete a call alert from the queue:

1 2 3 4 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press B to SELECT. 5 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete all call alerts. FIRST DRAFT 93 To delete all call alerts from the queue:

1 2 3 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. Press B to SELECT. 4 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete the entry. Group Call In a Group call, you can communicate instantly with a group of people that you have previously set up as a Talkgroup. Your sales representative must set up your Talkgroups by providing you with a Talkgroup number for each Talkgroup. After you have the number, you can assign each Talkgroup number a name and store it in your phone (see Naming a Talkgroup on page 94). Your phone can store up to 30 Talkgroups. You can make calls to any of the Talkgroups in your Phonebook at any time. However, to receive calls from a Talkgroup, you must first join that Talkgroup

(see Joining a Talkgroup on page 96.) Naming a Talkgroup 1 2 3 4 5 6 94 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to New Entry. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Enter the information as you would any other Phonebook entry. (See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 50.) When you get to Type, make sure that you select Talkgroup. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Group Call 7 Enter the Talkgroup name or number. 8 When you have completed the Entry Details, press A under DONE. Making a Group Call from the Keypad 1 2 3 Press # and then enter the Talkgroup number of the group that you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Group Call from the Phonebook 1 2 3 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Group Call from the Recent Calls List 1 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. FIRST DRAFT 95 2 3 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup will emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling. Release the PTT button to listen. Receiving a Group Call When you receive an incoming Group call, your phone emits a chirp. To respond to a Group call:

1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Joining a Talkgroup To receive Group calls from a Talkgroup, you must first join the Talkgroup. You may only belong to one Talkgroup at a time. When you join a new Talkgroup, you no longer belong to your previous Talkgroup. To join an ongoing Talkgroup:

1 Using the keypad, press # then enter the Talkgroup number. Or, From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Or, If the Talkgroup you want to join is on your Recent Call list, go to the Recent Call screen and press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. 2 Press B under JOIN. 96 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Group Call Group-Silent Programming Group-Silent programming enables you to silence incoming Group alerts and communication. Turning Group-Silent On or Off 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Tkgrp Settings. Press B under SELECT. 4 With the Silent field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. 5 6 Press S to scroll to On or Off. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 97 98 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Assisted Global Positioning System Your phones AGPS feature uses information from satellites orbiting the Earth to calculate the exact geographical location, or position, of your phone. When you make an emergency call, your phones position is automatically transmitted to emergency workers to help them locate you. You can use the AGPS feature to view your phones position at any time. Java applications loaded on your phone can also read your phones position. You can set your AGPS privacy options to control which, if any, Java applications are permitted to read your phones position. You can even remove the GPS option from your main menu, so that your phones position is only calculated for use by emergency workers when you make an emergency call. This section includes:

Page 99 Page 100 Page 101 Page 102 Page 103 Accessing the AGPS Feature Viewing Your Position Setting Privacy Options Setting Data Flow Removing GPS from the Main Menu Accessing the AGPS Feature To the AGPS feature:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to GPS. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 99 Viewing Your Position To view your AGPS position:

1 2 3 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Position. Press B under SELECT. To view the entire displayed screen, press S to scroll. This displays the following information about the last time your phones position was calculated:

the time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date that the position was last calculated. the position, expressed as latitude and longitude. the number of satellites used to calculated the position. the estimated accuracy of the calculated position (for example, the calculated position may be accurate within 50 feet of your phones actual position). To calculate your phones position again:

Press B under RFRSH. The Position screen displays the updated information. To cancel a position calculated before it is completed::

Press e. Each time your phones position is calculated, the latest position information is stored in your phone and remains there even when your phone is powered off. You will see this information the next time you view the Position screen. If you received a phone call, Private call, or any kind of alert while attempting the calculate your phones position, the Position screen will disappear, but your phone will continue to calculate its position. The next time you view the Position screen, the new position information will be displayed. 100 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Setting Privacy Options Setting Privacy Options Your AGPS privacy options control whether Java applications on your phone may read your phones GPS position.You may set your phone to one of three AGPS privacy option:

Restricted No Java applications may read your phones position. Unrestricted All Java applications may read your phones position, without notifying you. By Permission When a Java application attempts to read your phones position, you will be prompted to give permission. To set your AGPS privacy options:

1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Privacy. Press B under SELECT. If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled, enter your GPS PIN. (See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 101 for more information.) Press S to scroll to the privacy setting you want. Press B under SELECT. Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy option can be protected by a PIN. When you receive your phone, the GPS security feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If you turn this feature on, you will be required to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. To turn the GPS security feature on of off:

1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 101

4 5 Press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the GPS PIN requirement;

Off disables the SIM PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE: When your receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. To change your GPS PIN:

1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 4 Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to New Passwords and press B under SELECT. 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old GPS PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE: When your receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 7 At the Enter New GPS PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New GPS PIN Code screen, re-enter the new GPS PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. Setting Data Flow You can control NMEA data flow through the accessory connector at the bottom of your phone. Each time you power your phone on, NMEA data flow is automatically set to Off. 102 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT To set NMEA On, or set it back to Off without powering off the phone:

Removing GPS from the Main Menu 1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Interface. Press B under SELECT. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to On or Off. Press B under SELECT. Removing GPS from the Main Menu If your remove the GPS option from your main menu, you will not be able to view your phones position and no Java application will be able to read your phones position. Your phones position will only be available to emergency workers, only when you make on emergency call. If information on how to remove the GPS option from your main menu, go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate. FIRST DRAFT 103 104 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Datebook The Datebook is a calendar in your i88s phone that enables you to schedule and organize events, such as appointments and meetings. Schedules can be created and viewed for specific days, and reminder alarms can be set so that you never miss important events. You can view upcoming events by week or by day. The Datebook stores and manages 250 events over a 13-month period (12 months ahead and 1 month back). NOTE: The time and date format and the year used in Datebook can be set by you. Before using Datebook for the first time, ensure that the current year is correct. See Initial Setup on page 140 for more information. This section includes:

Datebook Icons Viewing Your Datebook About Datebook Events Adding New Events Editing Events Deleting Events Datebook Event Reminders Page 106 Page 106 Page 108 Page 109 Page 113 Page 113 Page 114 FIRST DRAFT 105 Datebook Icons There are several icons commonly used in the Datebook application:

Symbol Description C f j I G Event without a start/

end time More options are available Recurring Appointment Datebook Alarm Used to move through fields when setting a time and date. Viewing Your Datebook To access your Datebook:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Datebook. Press B under SELECT. Information in your Datebook can be viewed in three ways: by the week, by the day, or by the event. This information is structured hierarchically. When you access the Datebook, it displays the current week. You can select a day to view and display the events of that day. When the events of a day are displayed, you can select an event to view and display details of that event. 106 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Viewing a Week When you access your Datebook, the current week is displayed. You can scroll to other weeks by pressing S. The dates of the displayed week appear at the top of the text area of your phones screen. Viewing Your Datebook Displayed week Days of week Eventsc Below the dates are letters indicating the days of the week. When you access your Datebook, the current day is highlighted. You can scroll to other days by pressing T. Below each letter is a 12-hour time window for each day. Scheduled events are shown within the time window in black. A small bar between the letter and the time window indicates an event on that day that does not have a time of day associated with it, such as a birthday. Viewing a Day To view a day in your Datebook:

1 With a week displayed, select the day you want to view by pressing T until the letter for that day is highlighted. 2 Press B under VIEW. The day and date appear at the top of the text display area. Events for the day selected are listed by time. Events without times are displayed at the top of the list with a bullet to the left of them. FIRST DRAFT 107 Viewing Event Details To view the details of an event:

1 2 3 Select and view the day containing the event you want to view. Press S to scroll to the event. Press B under VIEW. This displays event details such as day of week, time, title, duration, alarm time, and repeat cycle. For more information about events, see About Datebook Events on page 108. Viewing Today You can easily go to the current day when viewing your Datebook:

1 While viewing any week, day, or event, press m. This displays the Datebook Menu with Go to Today highlighted. 2 Press B under SELECT. About Datebook Events Each Datebook event may contain the following information:

The title you assign to the event. You can enter a title using the phones alphanumeric keypad or choose from a list of commonly used titles. A title is required for every event (maximum of 128 characters). Additional text following the events title. The start time and duration of the event. The date of the event. An option to repeat the event in your Datebook. An alarm to notify you of the event before it begins. The style you want your phone to use when the event occurs. See Styles on page 147 for more information. 108 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Adding New Events Adding New Events Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Event Form screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Event Form screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Event Form screen. Only a title and a date are required for a valid event. To cancel a Datebook event entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. To add a Datebook event:

1 Access the Event Form screen:

While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to New. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen displays with the Title: field highlighted. b 2 With the Title field highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access the Title screen. 3 Assign a title to the event:

Press B under BROWSE to choose from a list of commonly used event titles. Press S to scroll to the title you want and press B under SELECT. Or, Type the title using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 31 for information about entering text into this field. You can also enter a description of the appointment or any other text. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Event Form screen returns with the Start field highlighted. FIRST DRAFT 109 4 If you want to assign a time of day to the event:

With the Start field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Start screen, enter the time the event will begin. Type in the start time, or press S to scroll through the hours, minutes, and am, pm, or 24 hour clock. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Duration field highlighted. 5 After you have assigned a start time to the event, you can specify the duration of the event. The default duration is one hour. To assign a different duration:

With the Duration field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Duration screen, press R to scroll to the desired duration. If you select None, the event will have a duration of zero minutes. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen returns with the StartDate field highlighted. 6 The default date assigned to an event is the day that was highlighted when you accessed the Event Form screen to add the event. To assign a different date:

With the StartDate field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the StartDate screen, enter the date of the event:

Type in the date, or press S to scroll through the months, days, and years. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Repeat field highlighted. 110 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Adding New Events 7 If you want the event to recur in your Datebook, assign a repeat cycle to it:

With the Repeat field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. NOTE: When Repeat is set to none or yearly, it will not be possible to access the Repeat End field. From the Repeat screen, press S to scroll to the desired repeat cycle. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen returns with the RepeatEnd field highlighted. Press B under CHANGE and enter the date on which you want the event to stop repeating. When you have finished, press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Alarm field highlighted. 8 If you want to set an alarm to remind you that the event is approaching:

With the Alarm field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Press B under SELECT. Y From the Alarm screen, press S to scroll to the desired alarm option. FIRST DRAFT 111 9 If you want your phone to change to a style you have defined when the event occurs (see Styles on page 147):

With MORE highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Style field appears. Press B under CHANGE. From the Style screen, you see a list of styles you have created. Press S to scroll to the desired style. Press B under SELECT. 10 When you have entered all the desired information about the event, press A under DONE. h X 112 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Editing Events Editing Events 1 If you are viewing the week containing the event:

Press B under EDIT. Or, If you are viewing the day containing the event:

Press m to display the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press then B under SELECT. 2 Follow the applicable instructions in Adding New Events on page 109, to edit the various fields. Deleting Events 1 View the day containing the event and press S to scroll to the event you want to delete. Or, View the details of the event you want to delete. Press m. The Datebook Menu displays. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. If the event is a recurring event, the Delete Event screen appears:

To delete only the occurrence of the event you select in step 1, leave This Event Only highlighted. To delete all occurrences of the event, press R to highlight Repeat Events. Press B under SELECT. If the event is a recurring event, a confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. 2 3 4 5 FIRST DRAFT 113

Datebook Event Reminders If you have set an alarm to remind you that a Datebook event is approaching, your phone sounds an audible alarm and displays a reminder. NOTE: You must have the Time and Date display turned on to receive event reminders. This is the default setting. When a Datebook event reminder appears on the screen:

Or, Press A under EXIT to dismiss the event Press A under VIEW to view more information about the Datebook event. reminder. F Customizing Datebook Set Up Datebook allows you to customize some of its set up features:

DailyBegin sets the beginning time of the 12-hour day your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. Reminder controls the behavior of alarms you have set in Datebook:

Active Only sets Datebook to ignore alarms that occur when your phone is powered off. Delayed If Off sets Datebook to delay alarms that occur when your phone is powered off until your phone is next powered on. Weekday sets the first day of the week your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. DeleteAfter controls how long your Datebook waits to delete an event after it has occurred. 114 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Customizing Datebook Set Up To customize your Datebook set up:

1 While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. 2 3 Press S to scroll to Setup and then press B under SELECT Press R to scroll to any of the set-up features. Press B under CHANGE. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. FIRST DRAFT 115 116 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT The Memo application provides you with a place to store a numeric note in your i88s phone. Memo Page 117 Page 117 Page 118 Page 118 This section includes:

Adding a New Memo Viewing a Memo Editing a Memo Deleting a Memo Adding a New Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. The Memo screen displays. Type your numeric memo using the phones keypad. Press B under STORE. Viewing a Memo 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. To call this number, press s. FIRST DRAFT 117 Editing a Memo 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Type the new number. You can delete a digit by pressing A under DELETE. To all the digits, press and hold A under DELETE. 5 Press B under STORE. Deleting a Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Press and hold A under DELETE. Press B under STORE. 118 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Voice Record The Voice Record feature of your i88s phone enables you to record and play back personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls on your i88s phone. This section includes:

About Voice Record Accessing Voice Record Recording a Voice Record Playing a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record Labeling a Voice Record Deleting a Voice Record Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Voice Record Memory Page 119 Page 119 Page 120 Page 120 Page 121 Page 121 Page 122 Page 122 Page 123 About Voice Record Your phone can store up to 20 Voice Records, with a total time of about three minutes, depending on available memory. Accessing Voice Record To access the Voice Record feature:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 119 Recording a Voice Record NOTE: Recording of phone calls is subject to varying State and Federal laws regarding privacy and recording of phone conversations. To record a personal message as a Voice Record:

1 2 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to [New VoiceRec]. Press B under RECORD and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 3 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. To record the incoming portion of a call as a Voice Record:

1 While on an active call, press m. 2 3 Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT to record the incoming portion of the call. Your own voice will not be recorded. 4 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. Playing a Voice Record 1 2 3 120 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to play. Press B under PLAY. To stop the Voice Record while it is playing, press A under BACK. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Adding to a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record After you create a Voice Record, you can record more at the end of the existing Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to add to. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Add To. Press B under SELECT and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 5 When you are finished recording, press B under STOP. Labeling a Voice Record When you create a Voice Record, it is labeled with the time and date it was recorded. After a Voice Record has been recorded, you can re-name it with a custom label. To label a Voice Record:

1 2 3 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to name. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Label and press B under SELECT. 4 At the Enter Label: screen, enter a label for the Voice Record using the alphanumeric keypad. 5 Press B under OK. FIRST DRAFT 121 Deleting a Voice Record To delete a Voice Record:

1 2 3 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to delete. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. 4 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. To delete all unlocked Voice Record:

1 2 From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All and press B under SELECT. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Locking a Voice Record prevents it from being deleted. When a Voice Record is locked, the locked icon M appears next to it. To lock or unlock a Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 122 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to lock or unlock. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Lock or Unlock. Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Voice Record Memory Voice Record Memory Typically, you can store 20 Voice Record with a total time of about three minutes. To check the amount of memory available for Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Memory. Press B under SELECT to display the Memory Meter screen. The memory meter shows the amount of Voice Record memory space currently in use. It fills in from left to right as your Voice Record memory space fills up. From the Memory Meter screen, you can free more Voice Record memory space by pressing B under DELETE to delete all unlocked Voice Record. A confirmation screen displays. Press A under YES to confirm. NOTE: Because Voice Record are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Java applications, using a large amount of memory to store Java applications reduces the space available for Voice Record. When this occurs, deleting Java applications from your phones memory frees memory space for Voice Record. For more information about Java applications stored in your phone, see Java on page 125. FIRST DRAFT 123 124 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Java The Java feature of your i88s phone runs applications written in the Java 2 Micro Edition programming language. The phone comes with Java applications downloaded and ready for installation. You can choose to order or purchase Java applications and download them into your phone via the Internet. For more information, see Downloading Java Applications on page 127. This section includes:

Accessing Java Menu Installing Java Applications Running Java Applications Downloading Java Applications Java Applications and AGPS Java Memory Deinstalling Java Applications Page 125 Page 126 Page 126 Page 127 Page 127 Page 129 Page 130 IMPORTANT:

To avoid personal injury, do not play games on your i88s phone when operating machines or driving vehicles. Accessing Java Menu To access the Java menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Java Apps. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 125 The Java menu displays all of your Java applications. Installing Java Applications To install a Java application:

1 2 3 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the desired application. To determine whether the application needs to be installed, look at the display options on the screen. If the display option is RUN or SELECT, the application is already installed and ready to run. See Running Java Applications on page 126. If the display option is INSTALL, press B under INSTALL to install the application. The screen will display a series of installation steps. A checkmark will appear as each step is completed. This may take several minutes. When your phone has finished installing the application, press A under DONE. Running Java Applications To run an application:

1 2 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the application you want to run. Press B under RUN or SELECT. NOTE: If you receive an incoming phone call, the Java application will be suspended. To suspend a running application:

Press e. 126 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Downloading Java Applications To resume a suspended application:

Press B under RESUME. To stop running an application:

Press e and then press A under EXIT. Downloading Java Applications You can customize your phone by ordering additional Java applications via the iDEN Update Website. Please go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of applications available and downloading instructions. You can download these applications by connecting your phone to a PC using a data cable and the iDEN Update Software Application. NOTE: This is network subscription dependent feature. Please check with your Service Provider for availability. Java Applications and AGPS Some Java applications can make use of your phones AGPS feature to calculate the exact geographical location, or position, of your phone. (See Assisted Global Positioning System on page 99 for more information on the AGPS feature.) However, for privacy reasons, you may not always want Java applications to access your phones geographical location. Your phone protects your privacy by giving you the option to deny access to your phones position to all or some Java applications. About AGPS Privacy Options The AGPS feature enables you to choose one of three privacy options:

Restricted No Java applications may read your phones position. Unrestricted All Java applications may read your phones position, without notifying you. By Permission When a Java application attempts to read your phone position, you will be prompted to give permission. See Setting Privacy Options on page 101 for information on choosing one of these options. FIRST DRAFT 127

Granting or Denying Permission If you choose the By Permission option, you have several ways to grant or deny each Java application access to your phones position. When a given Java application attempts to read your phones position for the first time, a screen appears informing you that the Java application is requesting a read on your phone location. You may see this screen again when the Java application requests a read on your phones locations, depending on the privacy setting you choose for the individual Java application (see Setting Privacy for Each Java Application on page 128). To deny this request:

Press A under DENY. The Java application will not read your phones position. To grant this request:

Press A under GRANT. The Java application the read your phones position. If you grant the request, a screen appears asking you if you want to allow this Java application to read your phones position from now on:

Press A under YES to allow this Java application to read your phones position from now on, without prompting you again. Press A under NO if you want this Java application to prompt you the next time it attempts to read your phones position, Setting Privacy for Each Java Application After a given Java applications has attempts to read your phones position for the first time, you have the opportunity to set AGSP privacy settings for that Java application from the Java Apps menu. You may choose one of three privacy settings for each Java application:

Always The Java application always has permission to read your phones position, without notifying you. 128 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Java Memory Ask When the Java application requests a read on your phones position, you will be prompted to grant or deny permission (see Granting or Denying Permission on page 128). Never When the Java application requests a read on your phones position, you will be prompted to grant or deny permission (see Granting or Denying Permission on page 128). To view or change the privacy setting of a Java application:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to Java application for which you want to assign a privacy setting. If the application has attempts to read your phones position once, the menu icon will appear when you highlight the name of the application. Press R to scroll Privacy Settings. Press m. Press B under SELECT. The Privacy Setting screen shows the current privacy setting to this Java application. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to choose the privacy setting Always, Ask, or Never for this Java application. Java Memory In order to download, store and run the application of your choice, you must have enough Data and Program memory available in your phone. Data memory refers to the memory needed to download an application to your phone. Program memory refers to the memory needed to install and run an application on your phone. FIRST DRAFT 129

To check how much memory your phone has available for Java applications:

1 2 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to Java System. Press B under SELECT. Press B under NEXT to go to the Java System screen. The Data Space and Prog. Space information will be available. You may free more Data Memory and Program Memory space by deinstalling an application that you do not wish to use. Deinstalled applications that were obtained from iDEN Update may be redownloaded at a later time at no cost. For information on deinstalling, see Deinstalling Java Applications on page 130. NOTE: Java applications are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Voice Record. Using a large amount of data memory to store Voice Records reduces the data memory available for downloading of Java applications. When this occurs, deleting Voice Records from your phone's data memory space will free memory space for Java applications. Deinstalling Java Applications To remove a Java application from your phone:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to the application you want to remove. Press m. Press R to scroll to DEINSTALL. Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. Press A under YES. A warning screen displays. Press A under OK. 6 When your phone has finished deinstalling the application, press A under DONE. 130 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Customizing the i88s Phone You can customize your i88s phone to fit the way you want to use it. This section includes:

Settings Styles Shortcuts Page 131 Page 147 Page 153 Settings The phones Settings menu enables you to control many of the phones features and functions, including display properties, message handling, and security features. To access the Settings menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. NOTE: Changes to some of your phone Settings may not take effect if there is an active style. Styles must be to Off. See Turning Off a Style on page 150. From the Settings screen, you can access these Settings options:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings or vibrates when you receive calls and messages. Phone Setup sets call-answering features, turns off non-telephone features, chooses which phone line is used, and sets your network ID. In-Call Setup sets call timer, message notification, and call waiting features. Security sets security features including phone lock, keypad lock, and SIM PIN. FIRST DRAFT 131

Personalize controls which features are most accessible when you turn on your phone. Initial Setup sets a variety of display features including the language displayed, the size of the characters on the text screen, time and date formats, current year, backlight, status light, and scrolling. Also turns auto redial on or off and sets baud rate. VoiceVolume sets the volume of your phones earpiece and speaker. Tkgrp sets certain Talkgroup options. Service Status shows the status of your phones services. To access any of these options:

1 2 From the Settings screen, press R to scroll to the option you want to access. Press B under SELECT. Many of these options have other options within them. Press S to scroll through the lists of options, and press A or B to select and modify options and the features, according to the instructions on your phones screen. For some options, you can also press T to select sub-options. In screens that show lists of options for a setting, a check mark to the left of the option indicates the current option for the setting. Ring/Vibe Ring/Vibe enables you to control how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and messages. You can set ring volume, choose ring styles, and use the VibraCall Alert feature which enables you to set your phone to alert you to calls and messages by vibrating. Main Options Ring/Vibe provides these main options:

Ringer Vol sets ring volume. Keypad Vol sets volume of sounds associated with keypad actions. Mail Vol sets volume of Text Message, Voice Mail, and Net Alert notifications. Java/Data Vol sets volume of sounds made by Java applications. 132 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings Headset choosing the HdsetOnly option prevents sound from being emitted from the phones speaker when the headset is being used. VibeAll choosing On sets the phone to vibrate for all calls, messages, and alerts; choosing Off enables you to set the type of notification for each these features. Ring Style and Notification Type When you set VibeAll to On, your phone vibrates to notify you of all types of calls, messages, and alerts. When you set VibeAll to Off, the following features display after VibeAll on the Ring/Vibrate screen, enabling you to set notification options for each:

Line 1 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 1. Line 2 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 2. Pvt/Grp sets type of notification for Private and Group calls. Call Alert sets the ring style and type of notification for call alerts. Text Msgs sets type of notification for Text Messages. Reminder sets type of notification for Datebook reminder alarms. Voicemail sets type of notification for Voice Mail messages. Netmail sets type of notification for Net Alert messages. To set VibeAll to Off or On:

From the Ring/Vibrate screen, press S to scroll to the VibeAll:. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to Off or On. Press B under SELECT. 1 2 3 4 Or:

With the phone cover closed, use the volume buttons to set VibeAll to Off or On. Increasing the volume sets VibeAll to Off. Decreasing the volume to zero sets VibeAll to On. FIRST DRAFT 133

The following icons appear on the second row of your display screen to indicate the options you have chosen:

Icon Indicates...

Vibrate All - phone is set to vibrate when you receive all types of calls, messages, and alerts; the VibeAll option is On. Vibrate On - phone is set to vibrate when you receive phone calls. Vibrate Then Ring - phone is set to vibrate and then ring when you receive phone calls. Silent - phone is set not to ring. Notification Types When you set a notification type, you have these options:

Ring the phone rings to notify you. Vibe the phone vibrates to notify you. Vibe/Ring the phone vibrates and then rings to notify you. This option is only available for calls on Line 1 and Line 2. Silent the phone does not ring or vibrate to notify you. To set a notification type:

1 2 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features on the Ring/Vibrate screen after VibeAll. Press B under SELECT. 3 With the Type: field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 5 134 Press R to scroll to the notification type you want to assign to the feature. To assign the notification type, press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings Ring Styles When you set a ring style, you can choose from any of nine pre-set ring styles. To set a ring style:

1 2 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features that allow you to set a ringer style: Line1, Line2, or Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. 3 With the Style: field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 5 Press R to scroll to the ring style you want to assign to the feature. To assign the ring style, press B under SELECT. USER TIP: To hear the ring style you have selected, press the volume control buttons on the side of your phone. Phone Setup Phone Setup sets some basic phone features. Access Phone Setup to set the following options:

Line enables you to choose Line 1 or Line 2 as the active line for outgoing calls. AutoAns sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail, unless you are out of coverage or on the line. Any Key when turned on, enables you to answer calls by pressing any key on the alphanumeric keypad. Phone Only when turned on, prevents your phone from making or receiving Private calls or Group calls. Network ID enables you to set the phones network IDs and their roaming options under the direction of your service provider. FIRST DRAFT 135

In Call Setup In Call Setup sets the in-call timer, message notification, and call waiting features. The In Call Timer option turns the following features on and off:

Display the duration of the current call displays on the phones screen when the call ends. Minute Beep an audible beep occurs every minute of an active call. The Notifications option controls message notification during calls:

Receive All notifies you of all types of messages during calls. Msg Mail Only notifies you of mail messages only; all other types of message notifications are delayed until the call has ended. Delay All delays notification of all messages until the call has ended. Call Waiting enables you to turn off call waiting for the next call. After you hang up, call waiting is turned back on. Security Security allows you to set security features:

Phone Lock sets an optional code that locks your phone. Keypad Lock displays instructions for locking and unlocking your phones keypad. SIM PIN enables and disables your phones SIM PIN security feature. GPS PIN enables and disables your phones GPS PIN security feature. New Passwords enables you to change your phones security code, phone unlock code, and SIM PIN. Master Reset allows your service provider to reset your service in the event of a security or provisioning problem. Using Phone Lock The Phone Lock feature enables you to prevent your phone from being used unless an Unlock code is typed into the keypad. The Unlock code is required to enable the phone lock feature, to unlock the phone, and to set a new Unlock code. Contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. 136 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings Phone lock provides two options for locking the phone:

Lock Now locks the phone immediately after you set the option. Auto Lock locks the phone the next time the phone is powered on. Setting Keypad Lock The i88s phone includes a keypad lock feature that enables you to lock your phones keypad to avoid inadvertantly pressing or replacing calls. See Keypad Lock on page 26 for more information on locking the keypad. Choosing the Keypad Lock option also allows you to choose Auto Lock, which sets a time after which your keypad will lock automatically. You may choose 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 20 minutes. Enabling and Disabling SIM PIN The SIM PIN option enables and disables the feature that requires a SIM PIN code to be typed into the phone to access the information on the SIM card and to make or receive calls. See SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) on page 18 for more information. Setting New Passwords The New Passwords option enables you to set three types of passwords that control access to your phone:

Unlock Code this code is used to control access to the phone using Phone Lock. It is also required to access the Master Clear and Feature Reset features. If you want to use any of these features, contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. Security Code this code is used to access the Master Reset feature under the direction of your service provider. It can also be used to override your Unlock code under the direction of your service provider. SIM PIN this code is used to access the information on your SIM card and to make or receive calls. When you get your phone, your SIM PIN is 0000. You should change this to a SIM PIN known only to you as soon as your get your phone. For information on changing your SIM PIN, see Changing the SIM PIN on page 20. GPS PIN this code is used to access the privacy setting the control access to your phones GPS position by Java applications. When you get your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. If you want to protect your GPS privacy settings, you should change this to a GPS PIN known only to you as soon as your get your phone. For more information on your GPS PIN, see Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 101. FIRST DRAFT 137

Using Master Reset The Master Reset option is provided for use only under the direction of your service provider. It resets your service. Personalize Personalize contains three options that control which major features are easiest to access when you turn on your phone:

Main Menu changes the order of the items on your main menu. Keys controls which main menu items appear above the two option keys on the Ready screen. Power Up App sets any of the programs on the main menu to run when you turn on your phone. Reordering Main Menu 1 2 3 4 From the Personalize screen with Main Menu highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Reorder Menu screen. Press S to scroll to the main menu option you want to move. Press B under GRAB. Press S to move the option up or down in the list. 5 When the item is where you would like it to appear in the main menu, press B under INSERT. 6 7 Repeat step 2 through step 5 for all main menu items you want to move. Press A under DONE. Changing Ready Screen Options Two options from the main menu always appear on your Ready screen above the left and right option keys. Each option can be accessed by pressing the corresponding option key. 138 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings Your phone arrives with Phonebook (PHBK) assigned to the left option key

(A) and Messages (MESG) assigned to the right option key (B). You can assign any Main Menu option you want to the option keys. 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Keys. Press B under SELECT. The Keys screen shows the option assigned to each option key (Left and Right). To change the option assigned to the left option key, press B under CHANGE while Left is highlighted. Press R to scroll to the option you want to assign to the left option key. Press B under SELECT. To change the option assigned to the right option key, press R to highlight Right and press B under CHANGE. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the right option key. Changing Power-Up Program Your phone is set to display the Ready screen when it is powered on. You can set the phone to display the main screen of any main menu option when it is powered on. 1 2 3 4 5 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Power Up App. Press B under SELECT. The Power Up App screen shows the name of the program or screen that currently appears when the phone is powered on. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the option you want to appear when the phone is powered on. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 139 Initial Setup Initial Setup enables you to control a variety of your phones features that you may want to modify when you first get your phone:

Time/Date Format sets the format in which the time and date display on your phone. Year sets the current year. NOTE: Changing the current year may affect stored Datebook events. Datebook stores events 12 month ahead and one month after the current date. Events outside this range will be deleted. See Datebook on page 105 for more information. Auto Redial turns the automatic redial feature on and off. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. Sensor - controls the photo sensor to activate the backlight when your phone is in poor lighting conditions. Status Light controls whether the status light is on when the phone is on. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. Contrast controls how light or dark the screens appears. Scroll sets how you can scroll lists and menus. Language sets the language that your phone displays. Master Clear returns all settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Feature Reset returns all settings to their original defaults. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates with a laptop computer, PC, or similar device. TTY Setup sets TTY options. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device. TTY Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates when connected to a TTY device. Alert Timeout - controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. Return to Home - controls how long the Recent Calls screen displays before returing to the Ready screen after phone and private/group conversations. 140 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings Changing Time and Date Format Your phone displays times in 12-hour-clock format (12:00 am through 11:59 pm) or 24-hour-clock format (0:00 through 23:59). It displays dates in month/

day format or day/month format. NOTE: If you turn the time and date display off, no times are associated with calls on your Recent Calls list, and the alarm feature of your Datebook is disabled. To set the time and date format, or turn time and date display on or off:

1 2 From the Initial Setup screen with Time/Date Format highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Time/Date Format screen. To change the time format:

With Time Format: highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access Time Format screen. Press S to highlight the time format you want. Press B under SELECT. 3 To change the date format:

Press S to highlight Date Format:, and press B under CHANGE to access Date Format screen. Press S to highlight the date format you want. Press B under SELECT. 4 To turn the time and date format on or off:

Press R to highlight Display:, and press B under CHANGE to access Display screen. Press S to choose Off or On. Press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 141 Setting Auto Redial When Auto Redial is set to On, if you receive a System Busy, Try Later message while making a call, the phone will redial the number automatically. You will hear a ring-back tone when a successful call is placed. When Auto Redial is set to Off, you must press and hold s to redial the last number dialed. Setting Backlight Timer The backlight illuminates the display when you receive or make calls. You can set the amount of time that the backlight stays on to 5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds, or set it to stay on continuously or stay off at all times. 1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Backlight. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired backlight option. Press B under SELECT. Setting Photosensor To conserve battery power, the photosensor will disable the backlight when you are in good lighting conditions. To force the backlight to come on every time a key is pressed, you can turn the photosensor off. NOTE: Setting the Backlight to come on continuously while the Photosensor is turned on will drain your battery power. 1 2 3 4 142 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Sensor. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired option. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Settings Adjusting Status Light The status light is part of your phones power button. It illuminates when the phone is on. You can turn the status light feature on or off from the Initial Setup screen. Setting Text Display You can set your phones text display area to show more text using smaller characters or less text using larger characters. The size and amount of text displayed depends on the view selected:

Standard view five lines of text, 14 characters per line. Compressed view seven lines of text, 18 characters per line. Zoom view four lines of text, 11 characters per line. To set the text display view:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Display:. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Setting Scrolling You can set your phone to scroll through menus and lists in either of two ways:

Up/Down when you reach the bottom or top of list or menu scrolling stops until you scroll in the other direction. Wrap Around when you reach the bottom or top or a list or menu scrolling wraps around and continues at the other end of the lists of menu. You can set the scrolling style from the Initial Setup screen, using the Scroll option. FIRST DRAFT 143

Changing Display Language You can customize the i88s phone to display menus in English, French, Spanish, or Portuguese. The default language is English. To change the display language:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Language. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the language you want your phone to display. Press B under SELECT. Master Clear Master Clear returns all your phones settings to their original factory defaults and erases all stored lists. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. Feature Reset Feature Reset returns all your phones settings to their original defaults. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. Setting Baud Rate You can set your phones baud rate from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Baud Rate option and then choose the baud rate you want, or choose Auto to set your phone to automatically choose the appropriate baud rate. Setting TTY Mode `

NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. TTY Setup enables you to set your options for using your phone with a teletypewriter (TTY) device. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device in TTY mode. Your phone supports the following TTY modes:

TTY for calls in which you type and read text on your TTY device. 144 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Settings VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) for calls in which you speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY device. HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) for calls in which you type text on your TTY device on listen to voice replies on your phones speaker. You can set your TTY mode using your phones Settings menu at any time, or by issuing commands from your TTY device while on an active call. To set your phones TTY mode using your phones Settings menu:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Setup. Press C under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired TTY mode; Off, TTY, VCO, or HCO. Press C under SELECT. To set your phones TTY mode from your TTY device, issue one of the following commands while on an active call:

VCO please to select VCO mode. HCO please to select HCO mode. HCO off please to turn off HCO mode. IMPORTANT:

When you are using HCO, the sound coming from your phone speaker may be uncomfortably loud. Use caution when putting the phone to your ear.

(For information on setting your phones speaker volume, see Alert Timeout on page 146.) NOTE: TTY device manufacturers proprietary feature such as Turbo-

Code, High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by your phone. These features must be turned off or disabled to use your TTY device with your phone. Setting TTY Baud Rate NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. By default, your phones TTY baud rate is set to 45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your TTY baud rate to 50.0. FIRST DRAFT 145

To change the TTY baud rate:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Baud. Press C under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the baud rate for your location. Press C under SELECT. Alert Timeout Alert timeout controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. The display will continue to show the alert information even though the Call Alert tone has stopped. You can set your phones alert timeout rules from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Alert Timeout option and then choose the desired interval. (No Alert Tone, 5 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Continuous. Return to Home You can control the amount of time that the recent call screen displays after a call. You can set different timeouts (30 seconds, 1 min, 5 min, or 10 min) for phone calls and private calls:

After Phone Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a phone call. After Prvt/Group Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a private or group call. To set the recent calls timeout.:

1 2 3 4 146 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Return to Home. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Voice Volume Voice Volume sets the volume of the sound coming from your phones earpiece or speaker:

Styles 1 2 3 From the Voice Volume screen, highlight Earpiece Vol to set the earpiece volume, or press R to scroll to Speaker Vol to set the speaker volume. Press B under CHANGE. To select a volume level:

Press T to raise of lower the volume setting. Or, Press the Volume Control keys on the side of your phone. 4 Press B under OK. Tkgrp (Talkgroup) Settings Tkgrp Settings enables you to set certain Talkgroup options. See Group Call on page 94 for more information. Service Status The Service Status screen shows the status of your phones services. This screen is for information only; no options can be set. Styles The Styles feature enables you to save a group of settings for call and message notification, screen display, and call answering features. You save your selections as a style and access them at any time. You can store up to ten styles. You may want to use this feature to create a style for use in your car, or in meetings, for example. FIRST DRAFT 147 Each style contains the following settings:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and other messages. See Ring/Vibe on page 132. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. See Setting Backlight Timer on page 142. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. See Setting Text Display on page 143. Call Filter enables you to set your phone to not ring or vibrate when you receive some or all calls, messages, and alerts. See Setting Call Filtering on page 151. Auto Answer sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail. Using the Styles feature, you can create styles, edit styles, view a styles properties, delete styles, activate any style you have created, or turn off the active style. To access the Styles Menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Styles. Press B under SELECT. From the Styles Menu, you can:

activate a style or turn off the currently active style create a new style access the Styles menu for more Styles functions Creating a Style When you create a style, you give it a name and set the features of that style. The name of the style then appears on the Styles Menu. 148 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Styles To create a style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to [New Style]. Press B under SELECT. 3 Assign a name to the style you are creating:

In the Name screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the name you want to give the style. As you type, you can delete a letter by pressing A under DELETE. To create a space, press P once. Press B under OK. In the New screen, press R to scroll through the settings for each style option. To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 4 5 6 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. Editing a Style To change the settings of a style:

1 2 3 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to edit. Press m to access the Styles Action menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press B under SELECT. FIRST DRAFT 149 4 To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 5 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. Activating a Style When you access the Styles Menu, a check mark appears to the left of the name of the style that is currently active on your phone. If no style is active, the check mark appears next to Off. To activate a style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to activate. Press B under SELECT. The style immediately becomes active on your phone. Turning Off a Style To turn off a style without activating another style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to Off. Press B under SELECT. Using the Styles Actions Menu When you highlight a style on the Styles Menu, you can then access the Styles Actions menu for additional Styles functions. To access the Styles Actions menu, press m from the Styles menu. 150 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Styles The Styles menu provides the following options:

View view settings of the highlighted style. Change activate the highlighted style. Edit edit the settings of the highlighted style. New create a new style. Delete delete the highlighted style. Delete All delete all styles. Setting Call Filtering The Call Filter feature enables you to control which calls, messages, and alerts your phone responds to, and which it ignores. From the Call Filter screen, you set separate filtering options for phone calls, Private and Group calls, alerts, and messages:

Phone sets filtering options for phone calls. Prvt/Grp sets filtering options for Private and Group calls. Alerts sets filtering options for call alerts. Notifications sets filtering options for messages. Setting Phone Call Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone responds to all calls, no calls, or only calls from some or all numbers in your Phonebook:

Off sets your phone notify you of all calls. All sets your phone to ignore all calls. All Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from the numbers stored in your Phonebook. Some Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from numbers you select from your Phonebook. You may choose up to five Phonebook entries. To choose Phonebook entries that you want your phone to respond to calls from:

1 2 3 From the Call Filter screen, press R to scroll to Phone. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll Some Phonebook. FIRST DRAFT 151

4 5 6 Press B under SELECT. The entries stored in your Phonebook appear. To select a Phonebook entry as one you want to your phone to respond to calls from, press S to scroll the Phonebook entry and press B under SELECT. A check mark appears next to each selected Phonebook entry. You may select up to five Phonebook entries. To remove a selected Phonebook entry from the list, press S to scroll the name and press B under SELECT. 7 When you have selected the Phonebook entries you want, press A under DONE. Setting Private and Group Call Filtering Setting Prvt/Grp to On sets your phone to ignore all Private and Group calls. Setting Prvt/Grp to Off sets your phone to respond to all Private and Group calls. Setting Alert Filtering Setting Alerts to On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts. Setting Alerts to Off sets your phone to respond to all call alerts. Setting Message Notification Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone to notify you of some types of messages, all types of messages, or no messages:

Off allows your phone to notify you of all messages. Voice Messages allows your phone to notify you of Voice Mail messages. Text Messages allows your phone to notify you of Text Messages messages. All prevents your phone from notifying you of all messages. Call Filter can prevent your phone from ringing or vibrating when you receive a message. Your display screen will still indicate that you have messages. 152 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Shortcuts Shortcuts The Shortcuts feature enables you to access most menu or submenu options in your phone by pressing a numeric button on the keypad or speaking a voice name for the shortcut. You create the shortcut to the menu by assigning a number to it and then access the menu by pressing the number. Creating a Shortcut 1 Navigate to the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. For example, if you wanted to create a shortcut to Ring/Vibe. From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Ring/Vibe is now highlighted in the Settings screen. 2 Press and hold m for about 2 seconds. 3 A confirmation screen displays showing the name of the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. To proceed with assigning the shortcut, press A under YES. 4 A screen displays showing the assigned shortcut number. If you want to change the shortcut number:

Press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to erase the assigned number. Enter the desired number on your keypad and press B under OK. FIRST DRAFT 153 5 If you want to record a voice name for that shortcut:

Press R to highlight the Voice field. Press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the shortcut. Speak clearly into the microphone. An ) icon appears in the Voice field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP: For best results, record in a quiet environment. 6 Press A under DONE. Using a Shortcut To use a shortcut to access a menu:

1 2 Or, 1 2 3 4 5 154 From the Ready screen, press m. Press the number assigned to the shortcut. You have 2 seconds to do this after pressing m. From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the shortcut you want to use. Press B under GOTO. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Shortcuts Or, if you have assigned the shortcut a voice name:

1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Say the voice name assigned to the shortcut into your phones microphone. 3 Your phone will play the voice name back to you. Using the Shortcut Menu The Shortcut Menu enables you to manage your shortcuts with the following options. New view instructions for assigning a shortcut. Edit edit a shortcut name and key number. Reorder assign existing shortcuts to a different key number. Delete delete any highlighted Shortcut. Delete All delete all stored Shortcuts. To access the Shortcut menu:

1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. Press B under SELECT. Press m. FIRST DRAFT 155

156 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Accessories To order additional accessories, log on to our Web site at: www.motorola.com/

store/iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. This section includes the following topics:

Wearable Carrying Solutions Batteries Travel Chargers Data Accessories Wearable Carrying Solutions Leather Carry Case Page 157 Page 159 Page 161 Page 163 The Leather Carry Case with belt clip allows for easy attachment to a belt or purse. This case accommodates i88s phone while using travel chargers, audio accessories, car accessories, and all battery types. FIRST DRAFT 157 Swivel Carry Clip The Swivel Carry Clip provides a convenient means by which to carry your i88s phone with you. It consists of the Phone Clip and the Belt Clip. Phone Clip Belt Clip Using the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Attach the Phone Clip to the phone. USER TIP: Start with the antenna side of the clip. 2 Slide the Belt Clip onto the Phone Clip until you hear it click. 3 Attach the Swivel Carry Clip (Phone Clip and Belt Clip) to your belt. 4 To release phone from belt clip, push the button on the top of the belt clip. 158 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Removing the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Hold the phone securely in your left hand. Batteries 2 3 4 5 Curl the right hand index finger and place the outer edge of the finger against the knob of the Phone Clip. Place the thumb of your right hand on the side of the phone, directly below the left side of the Phone Clip. Squeeze the right hand thumb and index finger together until the clip snaps out of the retaining slot on the left side Remove the clip. Batteries For best results, charge the batteries within the temperature range of 10oC to 40oC (50oF to 104oF). Prolonged charging is not recommended. For battery charging guidelines, see Table below. FIRST DRAFT 159 Charging Lithium Ion Batteries Table 1 provides the approximate time to fully charge a battery using a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger. Check the kit number on your battery and charger to determine the appropriate charging time. Table 1: Battery Charging Times MOTOROLA BATTERIES Description/

Kit Number Chemistry SNN5717 Slim Li Ion SNN5705 High Performance Li Ion SNN5706 Extra Capacity Li Ion SNN5716 Maximum Capacity Li Ion Charging Time to 100%

Mid-Rate Rapid Charger Charger

(SPN4940)

(SPN4716) or

(SPN4808) 2 hours 30 minutes 2 hours 30 minutes 2 hours 30 minutes 3 hours 4 hours 5 hours 7 hours 8 hours NOTE: Charging times are based on a fully discharged battery. For optimal battery life, use a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger with your Motorola iDEN Lithium Ion battery. Other chargers may not fully charge your Lithium Ion battery. Battery Operating Instructions Extreme temperatures will degrade battery performance. Do not store your battery where temperatures exceed 60C (140F) or fall below -20C (4F). Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate and without use, will lose about 1% of its charge per day. The battery capacity will be degraded if stored for long periods while fully charged. If long term storage is required, store at half capacity. The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion chargers will provide optimum performance. Other chargers may not fully charge your iDEN Lithium Ion battery or may yield reduced number of lifetime charge cycles. 160 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Travel Chargers If the battery appears inoperative, the internal protection circuitry may have been activated. Remove the battery from the phone and put it into the charger for several minutes to reset the circuitry. When batteries are not in use, always store them in the plastic safety tray. Travel Chargers Using one of the Travel Chargers listed below, you can charge a battery from an AC outlet. On one end of the Travel Charger, an accessory connector attaches to the bottom of the phone. At the other (AC outlet) end of the device, there is a compact housing that contains the plug-in power supply. TRAVEL CHARGERS Kit Number Description SPN4940 SPN4716 SPN4808 Mid-Rate Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Rapid Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Mid-Rate Economy Travel Charger NOTE: Additional adaptor plugs to accommodate various International power outlets can be purchased separately for the multi-voltage Travel Chargers. Accessory connector FIRST DRAFT 161

Using the Travel Charger 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 If you have either the Mid-Rate Multi-Voltage Travel Charger or the Rapid Multi-Voltage Travel Charger, flip open the prongs, and plug the Travel Charger transformer into an AC wall outlet. Or If you have the Mid-Rate Economy Travel Charger, plug the Travel Charger transformer into an AC wall outlet. Multi-Voltage Travel Charger Operating Specifications Input voltage range: 90-264 VAC @ 50/60 Hz. Operating temperature range: 0C to +50C Economy Travel Charger (U.S. Only) Input voltage range: 90-120 VAC @60Hz. Operating temperature range: 0C to +50C 162 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Data Accessories Data Accessories Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable The Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable (NNTN4007) allows you to transfer data between your i88s phone and a laptop or desktop computer. This cable accommodates both circuit and packet data applications. To use the USB cable, your laptop or desktop computer must have a installed for this purpose. A CD containing a files you need is included with the USB cable. iDEN PC applications support USB drivers for these operating systems:

Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 2000 The following applications are supported:

iDEN RSS (Radio Service Software) iDEN CompanionPro iDEN SDK iDEN Update iDEN Packet Data Applet FIRST DRAFT 163

Using the USB 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Insert the data plug directly into your laptop or desktop computer. RS232 Data Cable The RS232 Data Cable facilitates quick and easy data synchronization between your i88s phone and a PC. This cable accommodates both circuit and packet data applications. The cable also features a charging port. Any applicable phone charger may be used to charge the phone simultaneously. Port for charging source Using the Data Cable 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Insert the data plug directly into your PC or one of the many other data compatible iDEN accessories. 164 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Data Accessories Dual Port Adapter Cable The Dual Port Adapter Cable enables in-vehicle communications and charging of the i88s phone via the Hands-Free Car kit, while being simultaneously connected for data operations. C A R K I T D A T A Using the Dual Port Adapter Cable 1 2 3 Insert the flat end of the Dual Port Adapter Cable cord into the bottom connector of the i88s phone. Make sure the Motorola logo is facing upward. Insert the round end of the RS232 Data Cable into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Data. Insert the Hands-Free Car Kit into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Car Kit. FIRST DRAFT 165 PDA Converter Plugs The PDA (Pocket Digital Assistant) plug is a convenient way to connect your i88s phone to many types of PDA devices, both PC and Windows CE compatible. Below is the list of adapters which can be used with your i88s phone:

Item Number Description NTN6546 NKN6547 NTN8993 Palm IIITM/VIITM Cable Adapter Palm VTM Cable Adapter Generic Pocket Digital Assistant (PDA) Male-Female Serial Adapter (Not Shown) NTN6546 and NTN6547 Type Plug Using the PDA Converter Plug 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the PDA converter. 166 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Data Accessories 3 4 Connect other end of PDA converter to the mating connector of the PDA device. If you are using the NTN8993 PDA adapter, connect the other end of the adapter to the PDAs supplied data synchronization cradle and place the PDA into the cradle. FIRST DRAFT 167 168 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Other Important Information This section includes the following topics:

Understanding Status Messages Safety and General Information Limited Warranty Information Patent and Trademark Information Page 169 Page 171 Page 187 Page 195 Understanding Status Messages The following table lists and describes the status messages. Status Messages Message Description Number Not in Service The number that you entered is not valid. User Not Available The phone that you called is either busy, out-of-coverage, or turned off. Please try again later. User Not Authorized The person that you called has not purchased this service. Please Try Later This service is temporarily not available. Please try again later. User Busy in Private The phone that you called is busy in a Private call. User Busy in Data Service Restricted Service Not Available The phone that you called is busy in a Dial-Up call. This service was restricted by your service provider, or this service was not purchased. This feature is not available on the current network. FIRST DRAFT 169 Status Messages Message Description System Busy Try Later Service Conflict Please Try Again Self Check Error Self Check Fail PIN Blocked Call Your Provider Insert SIM Check SIM Card Wrong PIN Wrong Code Enter PIN The system is experiencing heavy traffic. Please try again later. This service cannot be enabled because an incompatible service has already been turned on. An error occurred. Please try again. A fault was detected with your phone. If this error recurs, note the error code and contact Customer Care. An operational fault was detected with your phone. Note the numeric code, turn your phone off, and contact Customer Care. The incorrect PIN was entered three consecutive times. You will be unable to place or receive calls on your i88s phone. Call your service provider to have them obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code. Your SIM Card is not being detected. Please check to ensure that you have inserted the SIM Card. Please check your SIM Card to make sure it has been inserted properly. You have entered an incorrect PIN number. Your phone will not accept a SIM card that is not from your carrier. Please enter your 4-8 digit SIM Pin code. Enter Unlock Code Auto Phonelock is activated. Enter your unlock code. New Browser Message Memory Full!

170 Warns of low memory for Net Alerts www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT RF Operational Characteristics Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE PORTABLE RADIO. RF Operational Characteristics Your radio product contains a radio frequency transmitter to convey the information you wish to send as well as occasional automatic signals used to sustain connection to the wireless network, and a receiver which enables you to receive communication and connection information from the network. PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply with the following RF exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999. Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications

(Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2001 ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular and PCS product certification. To assure optimal radio product performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

FIRST DRAFT 171

Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your radio product as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Two-way radio operation When using your radio product as a traditional two-way radio, hold the radio product in a vertical position with the microphone one to two inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the lips. Body-worn operation To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your body when transmitting, always place the radio product in a Motorola approved clip, holder, holster, case or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a Motorola approved body-worn accessory and are not using the radio product in the intended use positions along side the head in the phone mode or in front of the face in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the antenna and the radio product are kept the following minimum distances from the body when transmitting Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5 cm) Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5 cm) Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio product and may violate FCC regulations. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio product is IN USE. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the radio product to operate at a higher power level than needed. 172 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, visit our website at www.mot.com/iden, or look in the accessory section of this manual. ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5815 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.24 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.267 W/kg during voice transmission using Phone Mode and 0.50 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.) While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://

www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5815. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. ______________________________________

* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. FIRST DRAFT 173 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio product must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association (AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio product and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6 inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the radio product is turned ON. Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radio products may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT 174

Medical Devices Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio products in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using the radio product while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. FIRST DRAFT 175

W A R N I N G Operational Warnings For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not place a portable radio product in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio product prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless it is a radio product type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved). Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. NOTE: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio product when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. 176 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Operational Cautions Operational Cautions

C a u t i o n Antennas Do not use any portable radio product that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Cleaning and Drying Considerations Using a leather carry case may help protect the surfaces and help prevent liquids

(e.g., rain) from entering into the interior of the radio product. This product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit. If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a dryer as this will damage the radio product and void the warranty. Instead, do the following:

Immediately power off the radio product. 1. 2. Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped) from radio product. 3. 4. Shake excess liquid from radio product. Place the radio product and battery in an area that is at room temperature and has good air flow. FIRST DRAFT 177 5. Let the radio product, battery dry, and SIM card for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery and/or powering on the radio product. If the radio product does not work after following the steps listed above, contact your dealer for servicing information. Clean the external surfaces of the radio product with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of dishwashing detergent and water. Some household cleaners may contain chemicals that could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners. Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio product. 178 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Accessory Safety Information Accessory Safety Information IMPORTANT:

SAVE THESE ACCESSORY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Before using any battery or battery charger, read all the instructions for and cautionary markings on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which may include a separate wall-mounted power supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product using the battery. Do not expose any battery charger to water, rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or in-vehicle use only.

W A R N I N G To reduce the risk of injury, charge only the rechargeable batteries listed in the Accessories section of this manual. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and damage. To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug, pull by the plug rather than the cord when you disconnect the battery charger from the power source outlet. Do not operate any battery charger with a damaged cord or plug replace them immediately. Battery chargers may become warm during operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the touch, unplug it from the power outlet immediately and discontinue its use. Use of a non-recommended attachment to a battery charger may result in a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons. Make sure the battery charger power cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or subjected to damage or stress. An extension cord should not be used with any battery charger unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure that:

The pins on the plug of the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the plug of the charger. The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition. The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100 feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet. FIRST DRAFT 179

Do not operate any battery charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or has been damaged in any way; take it to a qualified service technician. Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to a qualified service technician when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire. Maximum ambient temperature around the power supply or transformer of any battery charger should not exceed 40C (104F). The output power from the power supply or transformer must not exceed the rating given on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger. The disconnection from the line voltage is made by unplugging the power supply from the AC receptacle. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any battery charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. For optimum charging performance, turn off the radio product while charging it in any battery charger. 180 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The following summarizes what is known--

and what remains unknown--about whether these products can pose a hazard to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential risk. This information may be used to respond to questions. Why the concern?

Mobile phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (i.e., radiofrequency radiation) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF), considered non-significant, when in the stand-by mode. It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether, to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some research has been done to address these questions, no clear picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that they are unsafe. However, the available scientific evidence does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated with the use of mobile phones. What kinds of phones are in question?

Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones, the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned close to the user's head during normal telephone conversation. These types of mobile phones are of concern because of the short distance between the phone's antenna--the primary source of the RF--

and the person's head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in which the antenna is located at greater distances from the user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower than that from hand-held phones, because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source. The safety of so-called "cordless phones," which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not been questioned. FIRST DRAFT 181 How much evidence is there that hand-held mobile phones might be harmful?

Briefly, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing scientific evidence is conflicting and many of the studies that have been done to date have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have yielded conflicting results. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study, mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one type of cancer developed more than twice as many such cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had already been treated with cancer-causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals to the RF virtually continuously--up to 22 hours per day. For the past five years in the United States, the mobile phone industry has supported research into the safety of mobile phones. This research has resulted in two findings in particular that merit additional study:

1. In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers looked for an association between mobile phone use and either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma (a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically significant association was found between mobile phone use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of types of gliomas were considered together. It should be noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in this study was less than three years. When 20 types of glioma were considered separately, however, an association was found between mobile phone use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the same sample that this association occurred by chance. Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact, the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to bear on the accuracy and 182 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and repeatability of these results.(1) 2. Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile phone RF on genetic material. These included tests for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations, chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are conflicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.(2) FDA is currently working with government, industry, and academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these industry-funded research findings. Collaboration with the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association

(CTIA) in particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research recommendations and scientific oversight of new CTIA-funded research based on such recommendations. Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in the literature:

1. 2. Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while they performed cognitive function tests. There were no changes in the subjects' ability to recall words, numbers, or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were able to make choices more quickly in one visual test when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals. This was the only change noted among more than 20 variables compared.(3) In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be on the side of the head where the mobile phone was used. Because this FIRST DRAFT 183 occurred in only a small number of cases, the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically significant.(4) In summary, we do not have enough information at this point to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA continues to work with all parties, including other federal agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding questions about the safety of mobile phones. What is known about cases of human cancer that have been reported in users of hand-held mobile phones?

Some people who have used mobile phones have been diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000 people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1 million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer would be expected each year among those 80 million people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose because of the phone, or whether it would have happened anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a particular form of cancer is greater among people who use mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One way to answer that question is to compare the usage of mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use of mobile phones among appropriately matched people without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The current case-control study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of information. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of mobile phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:

184 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones;

design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best possible information on what is known about possible effects of mobile phone use on human health. At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Health and Safety Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health also participates in this group. In the absence of conclusive information about any possible risk, what can concerned individuals do?

If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if people are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example, time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives. Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy conversations on conventional phones and reserving the hand-

held models for shorter conversations or for situations when other types of phones are not available. People who must conduct extended conversations in their cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that places more distance between their bodies and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, they could switch to:

a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside the vehicle, a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or built into a separate package, or a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone carried at the waist. FIRST DRAFT 185

Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that mobile phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the radiofrequency energy from these products, taking the simple precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk. Where can I find additional information?

For additional information, see the following websites:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program (select

"Information on Human Exposure to RF Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters"): http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety . World Health Organization (WHO) International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs & As): http://www.who.int/emf United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board: http://

www.nrpb.org.uk . Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA): http://

www.wow-com.com . U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/ . References:

1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use and Malig-

nant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science Symposium;1999 June 20; Long Beach, California. 2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999, Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished results. 3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim, E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8, 1999. 4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH. Use of cel-

lular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999. 186 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT

Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products N O T E :

This Warranty applies within the fifty (50) united states and the District of Columbia I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications FIRST DRAFT 187 to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. 188 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-453-0920 for warranty service location information. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLAS normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. FIRST DRAFT 189 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 190 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) N O T E :

This Warranty applies in Singapore and the Philippines. I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories (manufactured by or under license from MOTOROLA) Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications FIRST DRAFT 191 to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. IV. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 192 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment). f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the local type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from use of the products in connection with non-MOTOROLA equipment. V. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, FIRST DRAFT 193 that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or sued in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages arising from any claim of patent infringement or alleged infringement. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 194 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT Patent and Trademark Information Patent and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. 2001 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Microsoft and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic Communications. T9 Text Input Patent and Trademark Information This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Direct Protect is a trademark of Signal Insurance Company. All other product names or services mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective trademark owners. FIRST DRAFT 195 196 www.motorola.com/iden FIRST DRAFT A Accessories 157 batteries 159 Data cable 85, 164, 165 Dual Port Adapter Cable 165 Leather Carry Case 157 Swivel Carry Clip 158 Travel Charger 161 Accessory safety information 179 Adapter cable 165 Additional Health and Safety 181 Alpha mode, text entry 32 Auto Redial 142 B Backlight timer 142 Battery 13, 159 attaching 13 changing 14 charge strength 15 detaching 14 operating 160 Baud rate 144 C Call Alert Queue 92 Call alerts 90 from Phonebook 90 receiving 91 Call Filtering 151 Call Forwarding 75 turning off 77 turning on 76 Call Hold 72 call information icons 40 Index Call Timers 69 Call Waiting 71, 136 accepting calls 71 declining calls 72 ending active calls 72 switching between calls 71 turning off 72 Carry case 157 Charge strength 15 Circuit data 85 Circuit data number 30 CompanionPro 46 Connection status 30 Customizing Java applications 127 Customizing phone 131 D Data cable 85, 164, 165 Datebook 105 set up 114 viewing 106 viewing a day 107 viewing a week 107 viewing event details 108 viewing today 108 Datebook events 108 adding 109 deleting 113 editing 113 Datebook icons 106 Dialing menu 54 Digital cellular 59 Direct dial 60 Display options 41 changing 138 197 Driving safety 9 E email 85 sending and receiving 84 Entering text, see Text entry F Faxes sending and receiving 85 G Getting started 11 Group calls 94 I Icons context sensitive 38 Datebook 106 main menu 43 Phonebook 46 status 38 icons call information 40 In Call Setup 136 Initial Setup 140 Initial SIM PIN number 19 International calls 58, 64 IP Address 30 J Java applications 125 deinstalling 130 downloading 127 installing 126 memory 129 K Keypad Lock 137 198 Language 144 L M Main menu 44 icons 43 options 43 reordering 138 Making call alerts 90 Making phone calls 59 Making Private calls 87 Master Reset 138 Memo 117 adding 117 deleting 118 editing 118 viewing 117 Memory Java 129 Voice Notes 123 Menu icon 41 Menus 41, 54 main menu 44 Shortcut 155 Styles Actions menu 150 Styles menu 148 Message Center 79 Messages 79 Net Mail 84 text and numeric 82 voice mail 80 Messages, Net Mail receiving 84 Messages, text and numeric viewing 83 Modem, phone as 85 Motorola 8 www.motorola.com/iden Mute 70 My Information 30 N Net Mail 84 Notifications 136 setting 134 Numeric mode, text entry 35 P Packet data 85 Password security code 137 SIM PIN 137 unlock code 137 Patent information 195 Pause digit entry 56 Personalize 138 Phone modem 85 off 16 on 15 status 30 Phone calls 59 ending 65 from Phonebook 60 from Recent Calls list 62 international calls 64 receiving 65 speed dial 62 Turbo Dial 63 voice names 63 Phone Lock 136 Phone Setup 135 Phonebook 45 capacity 50 CompanionPro 46 making call alerts 90 making calls 60 Private calls 88 storing Recent Calls 67 with non-i85s phones 46 with other i85s phones 45 Phonebook entries 48 adding 50 deleting 56 editing 56 sorting 49 viewing 48 Plus dialing 58 Power button 15 Powering phone on or off 15 Private calls 87 from Phonebook 88 from Recent Calls list 88 making 87 receiving 89 voice names 89 Private ID 87 R Radio frequency 171 Ready screen 37 Recent Calls 62, 65 deleting 68 details 67 Private calls 88 storing to Phonebook 67 viewing 66 Recent Calls list storing numbers from 55 Ring styles 135 Ring/Vibe 132 S Safety 171 199 accessory 179 electromagnetic interference 174 medical devices 174 radio frequency 171 Scrolling 143 Security 17, 136 Settings In Call Setup 136 Initial Setup 140 Personalize 138 Phone Setup 135 Ring/Vibe 132 Security 136 VoiceVolume 146 Shortcuts 153 creating 153 using 154 SIM card 18, 45 inserting and removing 24 unblocking 21 with non-i85s phones 46 with other i85s phones 45 SIM PIN 18, 137 changing 20 default 19 disabling 22 enabling 22 entering 19 Speakerphone 70 Speed Dial numbers 46, 52, 62 Status light 30, 143 Status messages 169 Status of connection 30 storing numbers Recent Calls list 55 Styles 147 activating 150 creating 148 turning off 150 Swivel Carry Clip 158 Symbols mode, text entry 35 T T9 Text Input 31 also see Text entry Talkgroups 94 joining 96 naming 94 Text and numeric messages 82 Text display area 40 size 143 Text entry Alpha mode 32 Numeric mode 35 Symbols mode 35 Word mode 32 Three-Way Calling 74 Time and date format 141 Trademark information 195 Travel Charger 161 TTY devices 85 making calls 64 setting baud rate 145 setting mode 144 Turbo Dial 63 Turning phone on or off 15 Two-way radio, see Private calls Typing text, see Text entry U Unblocking SIM PIN 21 V Viewing Datebook 106 200 www.motorola.com/iden Voice Activated dialing 63, 89 also see Voice names Voice Mail 80 logging in 81 receiving messages 80 transferring calls to 80 Voice names 47 creating 53, 154 making calls 63, 89 Phonebook 53 shortcuts 154, 155 Voice Notes 68, 119 adding 121 deleting 122 labeling 121 locking 122 memory 123 playing 120 recording 120 W Warranty 191 Word mode, text entry 32 201 202 www.motorola.com/iden

exhibit
download
text

1 2 3

MANUAL 2

Users Manual

pdf

2.37 MiB

Motorola iDEN Digital Multi-Service Data-Capable Phone i88s Phone Users Guide

@NNTN4487A@

NNTN4487A www.motorola.com/iden Table of Contents Introduction .......................................................................................... 1 Driving Safety Tips .........................................................................................3 Getting Started...................................................................................... 5 i88s Phone Features ........................................................................................6 Battery .............................................................................................................7 Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off ..................................................................9 Enabling Security ..........................................................................................11 Receiving Over-the-Air Programming..........................................................11 Security Features of the i88s Phone ..............................................................12 Status of Your i88s Phone.............................................................................24 My Information .............................................................................................24 Using T9 Text Input ......................................................................................25 Display Essentials ............................................................................... 31 Display Screen Elements...............................................................................31 Text Display Area .........................................................................................34 Call Information Icons...................................................................................34 Navigating Menus and Lists..........................................................................35 Main Menu Options.......................................................................................36 Phonebook ........................................................................................... 39 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone.................40 Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers................................................40 Phonebook Icons ...........................................................................................40 Voice Names .................................................................................................41 Accessing Your Phonebook ..........................................................................41 About Phonebook Entries..............................................................................42 Pause Digit Entry...........................................................................................51 Plus Dialing ...................................................................................................52 i Digital Cellular.................................................................................... 53 Making Phone Calls ......................................................................................53 Emergency Calling ........................................................................................59 Receiving a Phone Call .................................................................................59 Ending a Phone Call ......................................................................................59 Recent Calls...................................................................................................59 Missed Calls ..................................................................................................63 Call Timers....................................................................................................63 Hands-Free Speakerphone.............................................................................64 Mute...............................................................................................................64 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................65 Call Hold .......................................................................................................66 Three-Way Calling ........................................................................................67 Call Forwarding.............................................................................................68 Messages .............................................................................................. 73 Message Center .............................................................................................73 Voice Mail.....................................................................................................74 Using Voice Mail ..........................................................................................75 Text and Numeric Messaging........................................................................76 Net Alert ........................................................................................................78 Using Your Phone as a Modem.....................................................................79 Private Calls ........................................................................................ 81 Private Call....................................................................................................81 Call Alerts......................................................................................................84 Group Call .....................................................................................................88 GPS Enabled ....................................................................................... 93 IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind .......................................................94 Making an Emergency Call ...........................................................................95 Accessing the GPS Menu ..............................................................................96 Viewing Your Approximate Location...........................................................96 Enhancing GPS Performance ........................................................................98 ii www.motorola.com/iden Updating Satellite Almanac Data ..................................................................99 Setting Privacy Options.................................................................................99 Using GPS with Map Software ...................................................................101 Datebook............................................................................................ 105 Datebook Icons............................................................................................106 Viewing Your Datebook .............................................................................106 About Datebook Events...............................................................................108 Adding New Events.....................................................................................109 Editing Events .............................................................................................113 Deleting Events ...........................................................................................113 Datebook Event Reminders.........................................................................114 Customizing Datebook Set Up ....................................................................114 Memo ................................................................................................. 117 Creating a Memo .........................................................................................117 Viewing the Memo ......................................................................................117 Editing the Memo ........................................................................................118 Deleting the Memo ......................................................................................118 Making a Call to the Memo Number...........................................................118 Storing the Memo Number to Phonebook...................................................119 Voice Record ..................................................................................... 121 About Voice Record....................................................................................121 Accessing Voice Record .............................................................................121 Recording a Voice Record ..........................................................................122 Playing a Voice Record ...............................................................................122 Adding to a Voice Record ...........................................................................123 Labeling a Voice Record .............................................................................123 Deleting a Voice Record .............................................................................124 Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record............................................................124 Voice Record Memory ................................................................................125 Java .................................................................................................... 127 Installing Java Applications ........................................................................128 iii Running Java Applications..........................................................................128 Downloading Java Applications..................................................................129 Java Applications and GPS Enabled ...........................................................129 Java Memory ...............................................................................................131 Deinstalling Java Applications....................................................................132 Customizing the i88s Phone............................................................. 133 Settings ........................................................................................................133 Styles ...........................................................................................................150 Shortcuts......................................................................................................155 Accessories......................................................................................... 159 Wearable Carrying Solutions ......................................................................159 Batteries.......................................................................................................161 Travel Chargers ...........................................................................................162 Data Accessories .........................................................................................164 Other Important Information ......................................................... 169 Understanding Status Messages ..................................................................169 Safety and General Information ..................................................... 172 RF Operational Characteristics ...................................................................172 Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure ..............................172 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..............................................175 Medical Devices..........................................................................................175 Operational Warnings..................................................................................177 Operational Cautions...................................................................................178 Accessory Safety Information .....................................................................180 The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones..................182 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products...............................188 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) ......192 Patent and Trademark Information..............................................................196 Index .................................................................................................. 198 www.motorola.com/iden iv IMPORTANT!

Read Safety and General Information on page 172 before using your i85s Phone. v DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Plantation, FL 33328 USA Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920 Hereby declares that the product:

Product Name: i88s Model Number: H58XAH6RR7AN Conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device Date: July 1, 2002 interference in a residential Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

--Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

--Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

--Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. vi www.motorola.com/iden Introduction C ongratulations on purchasing your Motorola iDEN i88s multi-service, data-capable, digital, portable phone. Your i88s phone offers:

Voice Activated Dialing Your i88s phone offers state-of-the-art Voice Activated Dialing. Speakerphone You can enjoy hands-free communication at the touch of a button. And Speakerphone is especially great for conference calls. Phonebook Your consolidated Phonebook holds up to 250 entries and allows you to store multiple contact numbers for each person, offering you various ways to communicate with your business and personal contacts. SIM Card Your phones SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card holds all entries stored in your Phonebook. In addition, you have a PIN (Personal Identification Number) to keep your information safe and secure. Datebook Schedule and keep track of appointments using your phones Datebook feature. Messages The Message Center allows you to manage and access your Voice Mail, Text Messages, and Net Alert all from the same inbox. Private and Group Calls You can use your phone as a two-way radio to communicate directly with business and personal contacts in your iDEN service area. Voice Record Voice Record enables you to record and play back personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls on your i88s phone. GPS Enabled Use your phones GPS Enabled feature to determine your approximate geographical location, expressed as latitude and longitude. When you make an emergency call, this feature can help emergency service personnel find you under certain circumstances. This feature depends on access to GPS satellite signals and, for emergency calls, the capabilities of your local emergency response center. See GPS Enabled, particularly IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 94, for more information on the limitations of this feature. Fax and Data Transfer* for circuit data faxes and file transfers. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 78. J2METM With the JavaTM applications feature, you can choose from the many Java programs. Either download Java applications directly from the Internet, or try one of the pre-loaded applications. 1

Customization Use the Settings, Styles, and Shortcuts features to customize your i88s phone to meet your individual needs. For more information on these and other features of the i88s phone, review this Users Guide. There is a Table of Contents in the front of the guide and an Index in the back of the guide to assist you in finding the specific information you want. NOTE: Some features of your i88s phone are available only in the iDEN service area, and are indicated as such in this guide. NOTE: This guide describes the features of the i88s phone as they were set up by Motorola. However, your carrier or your organization may have changed or added features. For more information, check with your carrier or your organization. 2 www.motorola.com/iden

Driving Safety Tips Driving Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!

Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies that benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:

1. Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call with-

out taking your attention off the road. 2. When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional 3. 4. 5. layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motor-

ola Original hands-free accessories available today. Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary respon-

sibility driving safely. 6. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 7. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distract-

ing. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 3 8. Your phone can perform many other functions besides allowing you to make and receive calls. Do not let these features distract you from driving. Use them only when it is safe to do so. 9. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emer-

gency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.1 10. Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 11. Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no seri-

ous hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number.1 1. Wherever wireless phone service is available. www.motorola.com/iden 4 This section includes:

i88s Phone Features Battery Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off Enabling Security Status of Your i88s Phone My Information Using T9 Text Input Getting Started Page 6 Page 7 Page 9 Page 11 Page 24 Page 24 Page 25 5 i 88s Phone Features Speaker Key Volume Control Buttons Push-To-Talk

(PTT) Button Headset Jack Power Button Status Light Option Key 4-Way Navigation Key End/Home Key Punctuation Key Back/Pause Dialing Key Microphone Antenna Earpiece Display Option Key Menu Key Photosensor Send Key Alpha Numeric Keypad Next Word/

International Plus Dialing Key SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW Power Button Status Light Accessory and Data Cable Connector TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW 6 www.motorola.com/iden Battery Battery Your i88s phone comes with a Lithium Ion battery. After attaching the battery, you must charge it before you use it for the first time. See Charging Lithium Ion Batteries on page 161 for the charging times for your phones battery. The first time you charge your phones battery, charge for 30 minutes more than the time shown on page 161. After the initial charging, the battery can be charged in the time shown on page 161. Remove the battery from the protective plastic safety tray provided in the original packaging. When the battery is not attached to the phone store it in the original tray. Attaching the Battery 1 Remove the battery cover located on the back of the phone by pressing the battery cover release button and sliding the battery cover away from the antenna. Release Button 2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area. Press down on the bottom of the battery to secure it. 3 Replace the battery cover and push forward until you hear a click. 7 Detaching the Battery 1 2 3 Ensure that the phone is powered off before attempting to detach the battery. Press the battery cover release button and slide the battery cover away from the antenna. Remove the battery by pushing the battery toward the antenna and lifting it out of the phone. Charging the Battery 1 With your phones keypad facing up, plug the chargers accessory connector into the left side of the accessory connector on the bottom of the phone. NOTE: Press the button of the chargers accessory connector before inserting the connector into the bottom of the phone. button 2 3 If the charger has folding electrical prongs, flip open the prongs. Plug the charger into an electrical outlet. Your phones screen backlight will remain lit while the battery is charging. 8 www.motorola.com/iden Turning Your i88s Phone On/Off Battery Charging Status The battery strength indicator icon found on your phones display screen shows the charge amount remaining in the battery. When Using Phone Icon Display Battery Strength a Low Battery b 11% to 40%

c 41% to 70%

d Fully Charged A short, chirp-like sound indicates a low battery. The icon flashes to indicate that you have approximately five minutes of talk time remaining. When Charging Battery Icon Display e f g d 1 flashing bar 1 flashing bar, 1 continuous bar 1 flashing bar, 2 continuous bars 3 continuous bars Battery Strength Low Battery 31% to 60%

61% to 90%

Fully Charged Turning Your i 88s Phone On/Off To power the phone on:

1 2 For optimal cellular signal strength, extend the antenna. Press and hold p at the top of the phone until the status light glows red and a tone briefly sounds. 9 3 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen displays, enter your SIM PIN.

(For more information see SIM Card Personal Identification Number

(PIN) on page 12.) NOTE: The default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card

(see Changing the SIM PIN on page 14). 4 Press B under OK. As your phone connects to the network, you will see a welcome message and a connecting message. When the Ready screen appears on the display, you are ready to use your i88s phone!

A To power the phone off:

Press and hold p on the top of the phone until you see the message Powering Off. Push down the antenna. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 10 Enabling Security Enabling Security To utilize browser functionality from your service provider, you must enable security the first time you power on your phone or within 20 days of first activation of your phone. 1 When you power on your phone for the first time, after the Ready screen appears, you will be prompted to select OK to update your browser info. NOTE: If you press A under LATER, you will be prompted to enable security each time you power on your phone until you press A under OK. It is recommended that you do not choose LATER. a 2 Press A under OK. 3 You are prompted to enable security. Press A under YES. A series of screens display. If you subscribe to your service provider plan, your home page displays. 4 Press e to return to the Ready screen. Receiving Over-the-Air Programming If you have been set up to receive Over-the-Air Programming by your service provider, you will receive your Private ID and Talkgroup lists for Private Call use, and your Personal Telephone Number via a Net Alert message. In order to receive your programming, you must have enabled security. Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will receive a Net Alert message containing your lists. To accept your phone programming:

1 You will receive a Net Alert with the message New Browser Message Receive Programming Info. 2 Press A under GOTO. 11 3 You are prompted to accept changes to your Phonebook. Press A under OK. 4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 5 You are prompted again to accept changes to your Phonebook. Press A under OK. 6 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under OK. 7 Press e to return to the Ready screen. Security Features of the i 88s Phone The i88s phone comes with two levels of security protection:

SIM Card Keypad Lock Your phone comes with a built-in level of security protection through the use of the SIM card. The SIM card stores all your Phonebook information. Since this information is stored on the SIM card, not in your phone itself, you can remove the information by removing the SIM card. The SIM card is located in the SIM Card Holder on the back of the phone, underneath the battery. You can verify that the SIM card is in place by removing the battery and viewing the SIM card through the SIM card cover. See Inserting/Removing the SIM Card on page 18 for information on locating the SIM card. If there is no SIM card in your phone, notify your sales representative. NOTE: Except for making emergency calls, your phone will not function without the SIM card. SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your SIM card is protected by a PIN. Each time the phone is powered on, you must enter your PIN. You can change or disable your PIN if desired. NOTE: Disabling your PIN enables anyone to use your phone. If you disable your PIN, you must still keep the SIM card in the phone to make calls. 12 www.motorola.com/iden

Security Features of the i88s Phone Entering the SIM PIN Depending on your service provider, your phone may or may not require you to enter a SIM PIN when you first use your phone. If your phone is required to enter a PIN, your default SIM card PIN is 0000. It is recommended that you change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card (see Changing the SIM PIN on page 14). P IMPORTANT:

Incorrectly entering your PIN three times causes the SIM card to be blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider. For more information, see Unblocking the SIM PIN on page 15 1 From the Enter SIM PIN screen, enter your four- to eight-digit PIN. An asterisk appears for each character entered. NOTE: Other than emergency dialing, you will be unable to use any of the phone functions, including receiving phone calls, until you enter the PIN. 2 Press B under OK. If you enter an incorrect PIN, the message SIM PIN incorrect: Try again appears on your phones screen. After three consecutive incorrect attempts, the SIM card is blocked. The phone does not allow you to attempt to enter your PIN again, even after powering the phone off and back on. If this happens, see Unblocking the SIM PIN on page 15. 13 Changing the SIM PIN 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. B C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to New Passwords. Press B under SELECT to access the New Passwords screen. 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN and press B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. 7 At the Enter New SIM PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN Code screen, re-enter the new SIM PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. 14 www.motorola.com/iden Security Features of the i88s Phone Unblocking the SIM PIN If you forget your PIN and unsuccessfully enter it three times, access to your phone will be blocked. NOTE: Before you begin, obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code from your service provider, then read and understand the PIN unblocking sequence. In entering the key press sequence, each key press must occur within 5 seconds of the prior key press. IMPORTANT:

If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK code ten times, the SIM card is permanently blocked and must be replaced. If this happens, all data will be lost. You will get a message to contact your service provider. If the SIM card is blocked, the i88s phone only allows outgoing emergency calls. To unblock the PIN:

1 2 3 4 5 Press * * 0 5s. Enter the PUK code. Press s. Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN and press s. Re-enter your SIM PIN and press s. If you entered the codes properly, the SIM Unlocked screen displays. 15 Disabling/Enabling the PIN Requirement When the PIN requirement is enabled, you are prompted to enter your PIN each time you turn on your phone. Until a valid PIN is entered, you can use the phone only to make emergency calls. After the PIN is accepted, the phone registers on the network and the Ready screen displays. When the PIN requirement is disabled, the phone can be used without entering a PIN. NOTE: If you disable the PIN requirement, you remove protection of personal data on your SIM card. Anyone can then use your phone and access your personal data. 1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. P B 2 Press B under SELECT. The Settings screen displays. 16 www.motorola.com/iden Security Features of the i88s Phone 3 Press R to scroll to Security. Press B under SELECT to access the Security screen. C 4 At the Security screen, press R to scroll to SIM PIN. Press B under SELECT to access the SIM PIN screen. 5 Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the SIM PIN requirement;

Off disables the SIM PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN and press B under OK. 17 Inserting/Removing the SIM Card IMPORTANT:

If you remove your SIM card and insert another SIM card into your phone, the following information is erased when you use the phone with the new SIM card:

Datebook events Recent Calls list Voice Record Voice names for Phonebook entries and Shortcuts Call Forwarding settings Call filtering settings in Styles Net Alerts Information stored in Memo Browser Bookmarks Previous three GPS Enabled location fixes All Phonebook information will remain stored on your original SIM card. IMPORTANT:

Do not touch the gold-colored areas of the SIM card. To avoid loss or damage, do not remove your SIM card from your phone unless absolutely necessary. 1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery cover and battery. See Detaching the Battery on page 8. 2 With the antenna facing away from you, and the back of the phone exposed and facing up, locate the SIM cover and gently push it forward. 18 www.motorola.com/iden

Security Features of the i88s Phone 3 Lift the SIM cover up. 4 5 To remove the SIM card, very carefully lift it out of its holder. Do not touch the gold-colored areas of the SIM card. NOTE: Protect the SIM card as you would any delicate object. When the SIM card is not in the phone, you should store it in something protective, such as a mailing envelope. To insert the SIM card, very carefully place it in its holder with the gold contact side facing down and the cut corner on the card properly aligned with the cut corner of the holder. Close the SIM card cover and slide it down until you hear a click. 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 3 7 8 6 6 1 5 0 19 Keypad Lock The i88s phone includes a Keypad Lock feature that enables you to quickly lock the phones keypad to avoid inadvertently pressing keys or placing calls. Once Keypad Lock is activated, you can only perform the following tasks:

Turn your phone on and off Unlock the keypad Receive incoming calls, messages, and alerts. NOTE: Emergency calls cannot be placed while Keypad Lock is activated. Before locking your phones keypad, you may want to read this entire section to learn how to respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts. Activating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Locked displays on your phone. D Whenever a key is pressed while in Keypad Lock mode, the unlock instructions display briefly. You can also set your phones keypad to lock automatically after a specified period of time. See Setting Keypad Lock on page 139. 20 www.motorola.com/iden

Security Features of the i88s Phone Receiving Incoming Calls When you receive an incoming phone call (see Receiving a Phone Call on page 59), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press B under YES or press s to answer the call. Or, Press A under NO or press e to send the call to Voice Mail and reactivate Keypad Lock. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. Receiving Private Calls When you receive an incoming Private call, Talkgroup call, or call alert (see Private Call on page 81), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 Press and hold the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 When you end the call, the Recent Calls list appears. Press e to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. 21 Receiving New Voice Mail When you receive new Voice Mail (see Voice Mail on page 74), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Voice Mail Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under CALL to access Voice Mail. 2 Once you have finished, press e to exit Voice Mail. The Recent Calls list displays. Press e or press B under EXIT to reactivate Keypad Lock and return to the Ready screen. Receiving New Text Messages When you receive new Text Messages (see Text and Numeric Messaging on page 76), Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Text Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under READ to read the message. Press B under SAVE or DELETE. 2 Once you have finished, press A under EXIT to reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. 22 www.motorola.com/iden Security Features of the i88s Phone Receiving New Net Alerts When you receive a new Net Alert, Keypad Lock is temporarily disabled. 1 When New Browser Message displays, press A under EXIT to return to the Ready screen and reactivate Keypad Lock. Or, Press B under GOTO. Press A under View. Press A under OK or Reply. 2 Once you have finished, press e until you reactivate Keypad Lock return to the Ready screen. Deactivating Keypad Lock From the Ready screen, press m then

*. The message Keypad Unlocked displays briefly. E 23 Status of Your i 88s Phone Your i88s phone has a status light that displays around the power button. The status light indicates the status of your connection. Status Light Indicator i88s Phone Status Flashing Red Signing on to the network. Please wait. Solid Red No service or out of coverage area. Flashing Green In service/Ready to use. Solid Green In use. My Information You can select My Info from the main menu to display or edit the following:

Name Enter your name in this field. Private ID Your Private ID is displayed in this field. Your Private ID is the number that others use to contact you using Private calls. Phone Numbers of Lines 1 and 2 Your phones numbers are displayed in these fields. You can edit the phone numbers displayed on the My Information screen, but this does not change your phone numbers. Carrier IP This field displays your phones carrier assigned IP address. IP Addresses These fields display the IP addresses you use to access the Internet with your phone. Circuit Data Number (Ckt) Your circuit data number is in this field. Viewing/Editing My Information From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to My Info. Press B under SELECT. The My Information screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 24

Using T9 Text Input 3 Use S to scroll through the fields. 4 To edit the displayed information, press B under CHANGE. Edit information as desired, and press B under OK to save the changes. To return to the Ready screen, press A under EXIT. Using T9 Text Input Your i88s phone has embedded software, called T9 Text Input, that makes typing on a phone keypad much like typing on a computer keyboard: it eliminates the traditional multi-tap method of text entry. As you type, you press only one key per letter. T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its linguistic database of approximately 60,000 words and proper names. You may also store additional words you frequently use in your own user database, which is incorporated into the T9 database. T9 Text Input is available when you are typing information into your Phonebook and Datebook. T9 Text Input Entry Modes Four text entry modes are available in T9 Text Input: Alpha, Word, Symbols, and Numeric. When you are using T9 Text Input, an icon in the top right corner of your phones display screen (next to the battery strength indicator icon) indicates the T9 Text Input entry mode you are using:

Icon T9 Entry Mode Name Used For... w

, Alpha Word Symbols Numeric Standard multi-tap keypad text entry. Entering words and punctuation with one key-press per character. Entering punctuation and symbols such as @ or ?. Entering keypad numbers. 25 Choosing a Text Entry Mode You select your text entry mode from a menu available whenever the phone is displaying a screen that requires you to enter text (for example, the Name:

screen or Title: screen). To choose a text entry mode:

1 2 3 From any Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. A check mark appears next to the current text entry mode. When you access a Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, the default text entry mode is Alpha. Press S to highlight the T9 Text Input text entry mode you want to use. Press B under SELECT. The phone returns to the text entry screen. The text entry mode you selected is now active. Using Alpha Mode To enter text while in Alpha text entry mode to enter letters, numbers, and symbols:

Press any button on the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters, numbers, and symbols on that key. For example, to enter the letter Y, press 9 three times. Type a letter then press Q to activate Caps Lock or type a letter then press R to deactivate Caps Lock. Pause briefly to leave the currently displayed character in place and move on to the next place in the text entry field. Press P to create a space in the text entry field. Press A under DELETE to delete one character. Press and hold A under DELETE to delete an entire entry. Using Word Mode In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters on the keypad button you press and arranges them to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input matches www.motorola.com/iden 26

Using T9 Text Input your keystrokes to words in its database and will display the most commonly used matching word. Special Key Functions Some of your phones keys assume different functions while in T9 Text Input Word mode. Backspace and Erase Press A under DELETE once to backspace or to erase a single character. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the entire text entry field. Space Press R once to accept a word and insert a space when entering text. Next Word in Database Press 0 to display more words in the database that match the keystroke sequence you entered. Shift and Caps Lock Press # to make the next letter typed uppercase (Shift), to make all subsequent letters types uppercase (Caps Lock), or to go back to lowercase letters. These icons appear in the top row of your display screen:

$ for Shift to uppercase x for Caps Lock When neither of these icons appear, letters typed are lowercase. NOTE: T9 Text Input automatically makes the first letter of a sentence uppercase. Punctuation In Word mode, T9 Text Input uses Smart Punctuation to quickly apply basic rules of grammar to insert the correct punctuation within a word and at the end of a sentence. Press 1 to insert punctuation. One of eight basic punctuation symbols will be inserted (. , - @ : ? ;). Press 0 to change the inserted punctuation symbol to another of the eight basic punctuation symbols. 27

Press R to accept the punctuation and continue typing. NOTE: Additional punctuation symbols are available in Symbols mode. Enter a Word To enter a word using Word mode:

1 2 3 Choose Word as your text entry mode. Type a word by using one key-press per desired letter. For example, to type test press 8 3 7 8. The displayed word may change as you type it. Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to the end of the word before editing. If the word that appears is not the desired word, press 0 to change the word on the display to the next most likely word in the database. Repeat until the desired word appears. If the desired word does not appear, you can add it to the database of words using the instructions in Adding Words to the User Database on page 28. Adding Words to the User Database To add words to the T9 database:

Change from Word text entry mode to Alpha text entry mode. See Choosing a Text Entry Mode on page 26. Type the word using Alpha text entry mode. Return to Word text entry mode. Press R to add a space. The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is now in the database. NOTE: You cannot store alphanumeric combinations, such as Y2K. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 28 Using T9 Text Input Choosing a Language To change the language of the database T9 Text Input chooses common words from:

1 2 3 4 5 From any Phonebook or Datebook screen that requires text input, press m to access the Entry Method menu. Press S to scroll to Languages. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the language of the database you want T9 Text Input text use. Press B under SELECT. Using Numeric Mode To use Numeric text entry mode, choose Numeric as your text entry mode and press the number buttons on your keypad to enter numbers. Using Symbols Mode To use Symbols text entry mode:

1 Choose Symbols as your text entry mode. A row of 32 symbols appears along the bottom of your phones display screen, just above the display option and menu icon. (Press T to view the complete row.) Press T to highlight the symbol you want to enter into the text entry field. Press B under SELECT to enter the symbol. 2 3 29 30 www.motorola.com/iden Display Essentials Your i88s phones display screen tells you what you need to know as you use your phone. This section includes:

Display Screen Elements Text Display Area Call Information Icons Navigating Menus and Lists Main Menu Options Page 31 Page 34 Page 34 Page 35 Page 36 Display Screen Elements Any time your phone is powered on, the display screen provides you with information and options. The Ready Screen The Ready screen displays any time the phone is powered on, but not engaged in some activity. The Ready screen consist of elements common to many of the screens your phone displays:

icon rows A Status Menu icon Text display area status icons text display area menu icon display options USER TIP: You can always access the Ready screen by pressing e. Display options 31

Status Icons Status icons provide you with information about your phone and its functions. These icons are context sensitive; meaning, the icons that appear depend on the task you are performing. Status icons appear in the two rows at the top of the display screen. Some appear at all times. Others appear only when your phone is engaged in certain activities or when you have activated certain features. Icon Indicates... abcd efgd opqrs 01 GHI JKL c h

Y Z Battery Strength icons remaining battery charge. More bars on the battery indicate a greater charge. See the table on page 9 for detailed information about the meaning of each battery strength icon. Signal Strength icons strength of the network signal. More bars next to the antenna indicate a stronger signal. Active Line icons currently active phone line; 0 indicates Line 1 is active; 1 indicates Line 2 is active. Call Forward icons phone is set to forward calls. See Call Forwarding on page 68 for more information. Phone In Use phone is connected on an active call. Private In Use number being called is a Private ID. Talkgroup In Use phone is active on a talkgroup call. Packet Data Ready phone is ready to receive data through a data cable. Packet Data Activity phone is transmitting data. 32 www.motorola.com/iden

l

. y B u

w#,!

$x

Display Screen Elements Mobile IP phone is ready to access the Internet. Secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a secure connection. Non-secure Data phone is accessing the Internet using a non-secure connection. Roaming phone is searching for network connections outside your local area. Text Message you have one or more Text Messages or Net Alert messages. Voice Mail you have one or more Voice Mail messages. FaxMail you have one or more FaxMail messages. Speaker Off phones speaker is off. Ring/Vibe icons you have customized the way in which the phone is set to notify you when you receive calls and other types of messages. See Ring Style and Notification Type on page 135 for more information. T9 Text Input icons you are using T9 Text Input to enter text. See Using T9 Text Input on page 25 for more information. TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications The icon of the main menu feature currently in use always appears in the top left of the status icon rows. For a list of the main menu icons, see Main Menu Options on page 36. 33 Text Display Area On the Ready screen, the text displayed in this area is determined by your wireless communications provider. When you access other screens, this area displays menu options, messages, names, phone numbers, and other information. The number of lines of text displayed in the text display area depends on which display view is selected Standard view, Compressed view, or Zoom view.

(For more information, see Setting Text Display on page 145.) In Standard view, five lines of text are displayed. NOTE: Standard view is the default display setting. Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Call Information Icons Each of the following icons appear on the left side of the text display area providing you with information about your phones line or lines. Icon Indicates... D E X z

In Call - phone is on an active call. Incoming Call - phone is receiving an incoming call. Outgoing Call - phone is placing an outgoing call. On Hold - phone has a call on hold. End Call - phone has ended the active call. Menu Icon This menu icon S appears on any screen from which a menu can be accessed. To access a menu, press the menu key on your keypad. This key has the menu icon printed on it. Menus are context sensitive. The menu that appears depends on the screen you access it from and the items on the menu apply to the task you are currently performing. 34 www.motorola.com/iden Navigating Menus and Lists Press m from the Ready screen to access the main menu. Display Options Two display options appear at the bottom of most screens. These options enable you to perform a wide variety of actions, including changing, saving and viewing information, running programs, and canceling previous actions. You activate a display option by pressing the option key below it. The Ready screen display options provide quick access to two main menu features. By default, the Phonebook (PHBK) and Messages (MESG) display options appear on the Ready screen. You can control which display options appear on the Ready screen using the phones Personalize feature in the Settings menu (see Changing Ready Screen Options on page 141). The display options on screens other than the Ready screen cannot be customized. Navigating Menus and Lists The i88s phone is menu driven. By navigating menus, you access submenus which lead to all of the functions and features that are built into your phone. Use the menus to store calls, manage your Phonebook and Datebook, change your phone settings, browse the Internet, and more. Some features include lists of names, numbers, or other information. These list items can be accessed the same way menu options are. To access the items in a menu or list, scroll through using the four-way navigation key N near the center of your keypad. Scroll down by pressing the lower portion of the navigation key R. Scroll up by pressing the upper portion of the navigation key Q. Holding down the appropriate part of the navigation key speeds up scrolling. If you continue scrolling after you have reached the bottom or top of a menu or list, you wrap-around to the opposite end (if the scroll setting is set to wraparound). 35 If more items appear in a menu or list than can be displayed in the text area, a down arrow or up arrow appears in the left side of the screen indicating that more options may be accessed by scrolling up or down. Down arrow Up arrow B S Main Menu Options By default, the main menu options appear in the order determined by your service provider. You can change the order in which they appear by using the Personalize feature (see Reordering Main Menu on page 140) To access the main menu, press m from the Ready screen:

Menu Item Use to ... 7 Net F Java m Settings

! GPS Browse the Web. Run pre-installed and download custom Java applications on your phone. Customize your phone: Ring/Vibe, In Call Setup, Security, Personalize, Initial Setup, Phone Setup, Voice Volume, and Talkgroup Settings. Find your phones approximate geographical location, expressed as latitude and longitude. See IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 94 for important limitations on this feature. 36 www.motorola.com/iden

( VoiceRecord b Phonebook R Messages

; Call Forward

= Datebook O Memo z Call Timers j Recent Calls n Shortcuts U My Info v Styles

: Call Alert Main Menu Options Record personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls to play back at a later time. Store and retrieve a list of stored entries for calling, editing, viewing and deleting. Receive, store, access and manage Voice Mail, FaxMail, Text Messages, and Net Alert. Settings for forwarding calls in various situations. Schedule and organize events, by the day or the month, such as appointments and meetings. Input and store numbers to access later. Display the duration of phone calls, private or group calls, circuit data use, and Kilobytes sent and received. Access a list of the last 20 sent, received, or missed calls. Calls can be made from this list. Associate a menu option with a number on the alphanumeric keypad for quick and easy access. View the name, Private ID, phone numbers for lines 1 and 2, IP address, and circuit data number of your phone. Create or edit a group of settings and save them as one for use in different environments. Store received call alerts to respond to at your convenience. 37 To choose the highlighted Main Menu selection, press B under SELECT. To exit the Main Menu (and return to the Ready screen), press A under EXIT or press e. 38 www.motorola.com/iden Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store up to 250 frequently used names and numbers. When you store information in your Phonebook, it is saved on your SIM card. If you move your SIM card to another SIM-based Motorola iDEN phone, you can access information in your Phonebook from that phone. This section includes:

Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Phonebook Icons Voice Names Accessing Your Phonebook About Phonebook Entries Viewing Phonebook Entries Sorting Phonebook Entries Adding Phonebook Entries Editing Phonebook Entries Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly Deleting Phonebook Entries Pause Digit Entry Plus Dialing Page 40 Page 40 Page 40 Page 41 Page 41 Page 42 Page 42 Page 43 Page 44 Page 50 Page 48 Page 51 Page 51 Page 52 39 Accessing Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or GSM Phone If you plan to use the information stored in your Phonebook with an i2000, i2000plus, or any other GSM phone, you must purchase CompanionPro. Go to www.motorola.com/iden or your service providers web site for more information. You can use CompanionPro to make the Phonebook information saved to your i88s phones SIM card accessible in this type of phone. Phonebook Entries and Speed Dial Numbers Your Phonebook can store multiple phone numbers to a single name. For example, you can enter someones name into your Phonebook once and then assign that persons home, office, mobile phone and fax numbers to the name. Each number stored in your Phonebook is automatically assigned a Speed Dial number that corresponds to its location in your Phonebook. Each phone number uses one Speed Dial location, even if it is assigned to the same name as other phone numbers. The phone number stored in location 1 is assigned Speed Dial number 1, the phone number stored in location 2 is assigned Speed Dial number 2, and so forth, to location 250. Phonebook Icons Icons that appear to the right of entries in your Phonebook convey information about those entries. When you enter a phone number in your Phonebook, you can designate the phone numbers type using any of the following icons:

W h q Q L b Mobile Private Work Main Home Pager 40 www.motorola.com/iden Voice Names K Z n Fax Other Talkgroup For more information on entering phone numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. The picker arrows appearing around the phone number type icon indicates multiple phone numbers stored under one name:

ef pickers The Voice Name icon appearing to the left of one of the phone number type icons indicates that a voice name is associated with the Phonebook entry:

p Voice Name Voice Names A voice name is an audio recording you make that you assign to a number in your Phonebook by speaking into your i88s phone. You can then dial the number by speaking the words you recorded into the phone. See step 6 of Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44 for more information on creating a voice name. Accessing Your Phonebook If PHBK is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press A under PHBK. If PHBK is not one of your display options:

1 From the Ready screen, press m. 41 2 3 Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. USER TIP: You can also access the Phonebook by pressing m while your phone is in a phone call or private call. This brings you to the Phonebook screen. From this screen, you can view, sort, add, edit, and delete Phonebook entries, check Phonebook capacity, or make calls. About Phonebook Entries Each Phonebook entry may contain the following information:

The name associated with the entry. Typically, this is the name of the person whose number you are storing in the Phonebook. The type of number to be stored: Mobile, Private, Work, Main, Home, Pager, Fax, Other, or Talkgroup. The phone number to be stored. Every Phonebook entry must contain a phone number. This number may be any type of phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup number. A Speed Dial number. You may accept the default Speed Dial number or assign a different one. A voice name audio recording for voice-activated dialing. Viewing Phonebook Entries Names with more than one number assigned to them appear with ef surrounding the icon to the right of the name. For example, if you had stored a home and work number for Joe Smith, the entry for Joe Smiths home phone number would look like this:

Joe Smith eLf When the name is highlighted, press T to scroll to the icons representing each of the numbers assigned to that name. 42 www.motorola.com/iden

About Phonebook Entries To view any of the phone numbers assigned to a name:

1 2 From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the name associated with the phone number you want to see. Press T to view the icons representing the phone numbers assigned to that name. 3 When the icon representing the number you want to view is displayed, press B under VIEW. If there is a Private ID or a Talkgroup number stored for the person, press m. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. 4 Press S to view the other numbers stored for this name. Sorting Phonebook Entries You can sort your Phonebook entries by:

Name the name you entered for the entry. Speed # the Speed Dial location of the entry. NOTE: Private calls cannot be made from the Phonebook when sorted by Speed Dial location. To sort your Phonebook list:

1 From the Phonebook screen, press m to view the Phonebook Menu screen. 2 Press R to scroll to Sort By.

43

3 4 5 Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the desired sorting method: Name or Speed #. Press B under SELECT. Checking Phonebook Capacity Your Phonebook can store up to 250 numbers of any kind. To see how many entries are stored in your Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Phonebook screen, press m to view the Phonebook Menu screen. Press R to scroll to Capacity. Press B under SELECT. The Capacity screen shows how many storage spaces in you Phonebook are in use and how many are empty. Adding Phonebook Entries Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Phonebook Entry Details screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Entry Details screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Entry Details screen. NOTE: Number and Type are required for a valid Phonebook entry. After you have entered a phone number and any other information you wish to include, you can press A under DONE to save the Phonebook entry. To cancel a Phonebook entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. 44 www.motorola.com/iden About Phonebook Entries To add a Phonebook entry:

1 To access the Entry Details screen:

From the Phonebook screen with [New Entry] highlighted, press B under SELECT. Or, From the Phonebook screen, press m. Then press R to scroll to New and press B under SELECT. 2 If you want to assign a name to your Phonebook entry:

With the Name field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Name screen, enter the name using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 25 for information about entering text into this field. When you are finished, press B under OK. H I The Entry Details screen returns with the Type field highlighted. 3 To assign the number type:

With the Type field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Type Editor screen, press R to scroll to the type of phone number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen returns with the

# field highlighted. J 45 4 Assign a phone number to your Phonebook entry:

With the # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Type the number using the alphanumeric keypad. For phone numbers, use the 10-digit format. To delete a digit, press A under DELETE. K See Pause Digit Entry on page 51 and Plus Dialing on page 52 for information on using these features when storing phone numbers in you Phonebook. NOTE: The number can be up to 20 characters long. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Entry Details screen returns with the Speed # field highlighted. 5 The default Speed Dial number assigned to the Phonebook entry is displayed in the Speed # field. This is always the next available Speed Dial location. If you want to assign the phone number to a different Speed Dial location:

With the Speed # field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to delete the current Speed Dial number. L Type the new Speed Dial number using the alphanumeric keypad. When you are finished, press B under OK. 46 www.motorola.com/iden About Phonebook Entries 6 If you want to assign a voice name to the number:

With the Voice Name field highlighted, press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. M An ) icon appears in the Voice Name field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP: For best results, record in a quiet environment. 7 If you want to store more phone numbers to the name associated with this Phonebook entry:

b T Press R to scroll to the bottom of the Type field and then press B under CHANGE. A new Type field appears for the additional number. Enter the information for the additional phone number using step 3 through step 7. NOTE: Each name in your Phonebook may have up to seven phone numbers and one Private ID associated with it. 8 When you have entered all the information you wanted in this Phonebook entry, press A under DONE. N 47 Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly Your phone gives you three ways to store phone numbers quickly: from the Ready screen, from the Recent Calls list, and from Memo. To store a number from the Ready screen:

1 2 From the Ready screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the number you want to store. Press m to access the Dialing Menu screen. 3 With Store Number highlighted, press B under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen. 4 To store to a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen will display with the number entered in the field. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field. From the Entry Details screen, press S to scroll to the first Type field. From the Type Editor screen, press S to scroll to the selection that you want to assign to the phone number. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. Press A under DONE. www.motorola.com/iden 5 6 7 8 48 About Phonebook Entries To store a number from the Recent Calls list:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the 10-digit telephone number you want to store. Press B under STORE. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To store a new entry, press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Or, To store to an existing entry, press S to scroll the list of names in your Phonebook. Or press the first letter of the entry to jump to the entry. Once the desired entry is highlighted, press B under SELECT. The Phonebook information for that entry displays with the number entered in the # field and the Type field highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the type of number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. Press A under DONE. To store a Private ID from the Recent Calls list:

1 Press R to scroll to the Private ID number you want to store. NOTE: The Store option for Private ID numbers (e.g., 123*123*1234), will not display in the Recent Calls list. 2 With the Private ID highlighted, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Store. Press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. Follow step 3 through step 6 in To store a number from the Recent Calls list on page 49. 49 To store a number or Private ID from Memo:

1 Go to the Memo screen. If the number or Private ID you want to store in your Phonebook is not already stored on your Memo screen, enter it now. 2 3 4 5 6 Press m. With Store to PHBK highlighted, press A under SELECT. Press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To create a valid Phonebook entry, you must assign a type. Press R to scroll to the Type field. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the type of number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. Editing Phonebook Entries From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to edit. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Edit. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44 to edit the various fields. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 5 50 Pause Digit Entry Deleting Phonebook Entries 1 2 3 4 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press m to view the Phonebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete Contact or Delete Number. Delete Contact deletes the name and all numbers associated with that name. Delete Number deletes the number associated with the icon that is currently displayed in the Phonebook list for the name. The name and all the other numbers will remain. Press B under SELECT. A warning screen displays requiring you to confirm the deletion. Pause Digit Entry When storing a number, you can program your phone so that it will not only dial a number but also pause before entering another series of numbers such as a personal identification number (PIN) or password. This feature is particularly useful for accessing automated services such as voice mail and banking systems from your i88s phone. Heres how it works. Lets say you have a company voice mail account that you frequently check while traveling. And, to access that account you must do the following:

Dial your work number;

Press # while the voice mail greeting is being played; and Enter your PIN to access your messages. You can program your phone to enter all of the above information for you. All you have to do is separate each entry with a pause. If you were to program your phone to automatically input the above information, the stored data would look like this 17035551234P#P1234. In this example, the first eleven digits represent the number that must be dialed to access your voice mail. The P represents a 3 second pause. The # interrupts your greeting. The second P represents another 3 second pause. The last four digits represent your PIN. 51

You can use this feature not only to enter PINs and passwords but also to have the phone automatically select menu options (i.e., press 1 to hear messages). To create a three-second pause follow the steps below:

Press and hold * for two seconds. The pause symbol (P) will appear on the display screen. NOTE: You can enter up to 20 characters in a single entry, stored or dialed. NOTE: If you use a system that will not let you enter an option until the automated message has played in its entirety, you can program your phone to pause for more than 3 seconds. For example, performing the above step twice will program two pauses and cause your phone to wait 6 seconds before entering the next set of numbers. Plus Dialing This feature enables you to place an international call from most countries without entering the local international access code. Use Plus Dialing for all Phonebook entries if you plan to travel outside the United States. Begin by following the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. Before you type the phone number to be stored:

Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. Follow the rest of the instructions for Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 52 Digital Cellular The i88s phone enables you to make and receive domestic and international phone calls, make emergency calls, and be notified of a missed call. This section includes:

Making Phone Calls Emergency Calling Receiving a Phone Call Ending a Phone Call Recent Calls Call Timers Hands-Free Speakerphone Mute Call Waiting Call Hold Three-Way Calling Call Forwarding Page 53 Page 59 Page 59 Page 59 Page 59 Page 63 Page 64 Page 64 Page 65 Page 66 Page 67 Page 68 Making Phone Calls Your i88s phone provides the following features for making phone calls:

Direct Dial Phonebook Recent Calls Speed Dial Turbo Dial 53

Voice-Activated Dialing Last Number Redial TTY your phone supports TTY devices and communications. Using Direct Dial 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, use the keypad to enter the number you want to call. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. NOTE: See Plus Dialing on page 52 for information on making international calls. If you make a mistake:

To clear one digit, press A under DELETE. To clear all digits, press and hold A under DELETE. To cancel, press e. Making Calls from the Phonebook After you have entered phone numbers into your Phonebook, you can use these numbers to make phone calls. For information on entering numbers into your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. 54 www.motorola.com/iden

Making Phone Calls To make calls from the Phonebook:

1 From the Ready screen, if PHBK is one of your display options, press A under PHBK. Or, From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press R to scroll through the names in your Phonebook. Or, Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the first letter of the name and press R to scroll through the names beginning with that letter. Stop when the name of the person you want to call is highlighted. 3 If more than one number is stored for the person you want to call, ef appears around the icon to the right of the persons name. Press T to scroll through the icons representing the numbers stored for that person. Or, Press B under VIEW to view all the numbers stored for this person. Then press R to scroll to the number you want to call. For more information on assigning multiple numbers to one person, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. 4 5 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. 55 Making Calls from the Recent Calls List Your phone stores the numbers of the last 20 calls you received or sent in the Recent Calls list. 1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to Recent Calls is not the first item on the list, press S to scroll to it. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll the list received or sent recent calls until you reach the desired call. To view additional information about the call:

Press B under VIEW. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. 2 3 4 5 Using Speed Dial Each phone number stored in your Phonebook is assigned a Speed Dial number. You can use the Speed Dial number to quickly place a call. From the Ready screen, enter the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone number you want to call. Press #. Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 56 Making Phone Calls Using Turbo Dial Turbo Dial allows you to call the numbers in your Phonebook associated with Speed Dial numbers 1 through 9 by pressing and holding the corresponding numeric key on the keypad. Press and hold a number (keys 1 through 9). NOTE: Turbo Dial cannot be accessed while the browser is active, nor while Keypad Lock or SIM Lock is active. Making Calls Using Voice-Activated Dialing If you have recorded a voice name for a phone number in your Phonebook (see Voice Names on page 41), you can use this voice name to call the number. USER TIP: If you have difficulty making phone calls using a voice name, try assigning a longer voice name to the number. For example, if the voice name Joe fails to place a call to Joe Smiths number, try assigning the voice name Joe Smith to the number. 1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the phone number you want to call. 3 Your phone will play the name back to you. The call will automatically be placed. Last Number Redial Press and hold s to redial the last number you called. 57 Making TTY Calls NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. You can use your phone to make calls using a TTY device. When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the TTY mode you last selected. You can change the TTY mode during a call. For more information on choosing a TTY mode, see Setting TTY Mode on page 147. To make a call using a TTY device:

Q 1 2 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the jack on the phone. (To locate the jack, see page 6.) Connect the other end of the cord into your TTY device. Enter the phone number you wish to call and press. Placing International Phone Calls When making an international call, you can either enter the international access code directly (011 in the United States) or use Plus Dialing. You can make international calls from your Phonebook if you have stored the numbers with Plus Dialing. See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44 and Plus Dialing on page 52 for more information. NOTE: Your service default is International Calls Restricted. Therefore, you must contact Customer Care to obtain international dialing access. To make an international call using Plus Dialing:

Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a

+. NOTE: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. Enter the country code, city code, or area code, and phone number. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 58 Emergency Calling 3 4 Press s to place the call. Press e to end the call. Emergency Calling Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency calls can be made even when the SIM card is blocked or not in the phone. Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. When you make an emergency call, your phones GPS Enabled feature can help emergency service personnel find you, if you are in a location where your phone's GPS antenna has established a clear view of the open sky and your local emergency response center has the equipment to process location information. See GPS Enabled on page 93, and particularly IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 94 and Making an Emergency Call on page 95, for further information on the limitations of this feature. Because of the limitations of this feature, always provide your best knowledge of your location to the emergency response center when you make a 911 call. NOTE: If you have enabled the Keypad Lock feature, you must unlock the phones keypad before any call can be made, including 911 emergency calls. Receiving a Phone Call Incoming calls are indicated by a ring, vibration, or backlight illumination. Press s or any key on the keypad or press B under YES to answer the call. Ending a Phone Call Press e to hang up. Recent Calls The Recent Calls feature stores the phone numbers of the 20 most recent calls you have made and received, including private and talkgroup calls. You can access Recent Calls to:

59 view your recent calls store numbers to the Phonebook delete recent calls call numbers on the Recent Calls list NOTE: The Recent Calls list displays briefly after each call. Viewing Recent Calls To view your Recent Calls list:

1 From the Ready screen, press R. Or, From the Ready screen, press S to scroll to Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. 2 Press S to scroll the list of recent calls. If the number of the recent call is stored in your Phonebook, the name associated with the phone number appears on the Recent Calls list. For private calls, Talkgroup calls, and numbers stored in your Phonebook, an icon appears to the right or the name of number indicating the Phonebook type of the number used in the call. See Phonebook Icons on page 40 for more information about Phonebook types. For phone calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

N indicates an incoming call a indicates an outgoing call V indicates a missed call. (Missed calls appear on your Recent Calls list only if you have Caller ID.) For private calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number indicating the type of call:

h indicates a Private Call

% indicates a Group Call 60 www.motorola.com/iden

Recent Calls Getting Detailed Information About Recent Calls To get more information about a recent call:

1 2 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want more information on. Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to View and press B under SELECT. The Call Details screen that appears displays information such as the name associated with the phone number of the recent call, the phone number, the date, time, and duration of the call. Storing a Recent Call Number to the Phonebook To store a number from the Recent Calls list to the Phonebook:

1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the number you want to store. Press B under STORE. Or, Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Then press R to scroll to Store and press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To store a Recent Call number of Private ID to the Phonebook, follow step 3 through step 6 in Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly on page 48. Calling From the Recent Calls List See Making Calls from the Recent Calls List on page 56. 61 Deleting Recent Calls To delete a recent call:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll to the call you want to delete. Press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. To delete all calls on the Recent Calls list:

1 2 3 4 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. Press B under SELECT. Press A under YES to confirm the deletion. Accessing Voice Record From Recent Calls You can access the Voice Record feature from Recent Calls and use it to record spoken messages that you can listen to later. 1 2 3 From the Recent Calls screen, press m to access the Rec. Calls Menu. Press S to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT. For more information about Voice Record, see Voice Record on page 121. 62 www.motorola.com/iden Missed Calls Missed Calls Missed calls are shown on the display screen with the missed call icon V. Call Timers Call Timers measure the duration of your phone calls, Private or Group calls, and circuit data use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone. The Call Timers menu displays the following options:

Last Call displays the duration of your most recent phone call. Phone Reset keeps a running total of your phone call minutes, until you reset it. Phone Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your phone calls. Prvt/Grp Reset keeps a running total of all of your Private and Group call minutes, until you reset it. Prvt/Grp Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your Private and Groups calls. Circuit Reset keeps a running total of all of your circuit data use, until you reset it. Circuit Lifetime displays the total minutes of all of your circuit data use. Kbytes Reset keeps a running total of the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone, until you reset it. To view the Call Timers menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Timers. Press B under SELECT. To view or reset a Call Timers option:

1 From the Call Timers menu, press S to scroll to the Call Timers option you want to view or reset. 63

2 3 Press B under SELECT. If the feature does not include an option to reset or you do not wish to reset the option, press A under DONE when you are finished viewing. To reset a feature, press B under RESET. When the confirmation screen appears, press A under YES to confirm the reset. NOTE: The values displayed by Call Timers should not be used for billing. Call timers are estimates only. Hands-Free Speakerphone The i88s phone provides the convenience of a hands-free speakerphone for holding impromptu meetings or placing safer phone calls. The speakerphone option (SPEAKER) is available whenever you are on an active call. To turn the speakerphone on:

While on an active call, press B under SPEAKER. While speakerphone is on, Spkrphone On appears in the text display area. To turn the speakerphone off:

Press B under SPEAKER. Mute Use the Mute feature to listen to incoming audio without allowing sound from your phones microphone to be transmitted over the phone line. To turn mute on:

While on an active call, press B under MUTE. While mute is on, UNMUTE appears as a display option. 64 www.motorola.com/iden Call Waiting To turn mute off:

Press B under UNMUTE. Call Waiting Call Waiting allows you to receive a second call while you are talking on the phone. You can switch between calls so you never have to miss a call. By default, Call Waiting is always on unless you turn it off for a specific call. If youre on a call and you receive a second call, you will:

hear a tone; and see a message on your display informing you of another incoming call. Accepting Calls e Press B under YES. The first call is placed on hold. To end the active call and accept the second call, press e. Switching Between Calls When you accept a second call while you are talking on the phone, your display shows the name or number of each call. An icon appears to the left of each name or number indicating that the call on hold z or active D. Press B under SWITCH to switch between calls. 65

Declining Calls Press A under NO. If you subscribe to Voice Mail, the call will be forwarded to your Voice Mail box. Ending the Active Call Press e. Turning Off Call Waiting If you do not want to be interrupted during a call, you can turn Call Waiting off prior to making/receiving a call. 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings, and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to In Call Setup and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Call Waiting and press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT. Call Waiting is now disabled for the next call. It will automatically reset to On when you hang up. Call Hold When you are on an active call, you can place the call on hold and make a second call. To place an active call on hold:

Press m to access the Calls Menu. Press R to scroll to Hold. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 66 Three-Way Calling 3 4 Press B under SELECT. If you have not placed a second call, you can resume this call by pressing B under RESUME. To place a second call while the first call is on hold:

1 2 Enter the second phone number you want to call. Or select the number from your Phonebook by pressing m and selecting Phonebook. Press s to place the second call. To toggle between the two calls:

Press B under SWITCH. To end the active call:

Press e. The call on hold becomes active. Three-Way Calling Using Three-Way Calling, you can combine two ongoing phone calls into one conversation. While on an active call, you can make a second call and combine the two calls. When you place or receive a phone call, the 3-WAY option appears in the bottom left-hand corner of the display screen. To make a three-way call:

1 Place or receive a phone call. 2 While in a call, press m to access Call Menu. 3 4 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. The first call will be placed on hold. 67 5 Enter the second phone number you want to call and press s to place the second call. Or, access the number from your Phonebook:

Press m and then press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. To place the call, see Making Calls from the Phonebook on page 54. 6 After you reach the second individual, press m. 7 8 Press R to scroll to 3-WAY. Press B under SELECT. Both calls will appear on your display. Call Forwarding Call Forwarding forwards calls to the number you designate. The following Call Forwarding options are available:

All Calls When this option is turned on, all calls will be sent automatically to a number you specify. Detailed Choosing this option enables you to forward calls you missed to different numbers, or to Voice Mail, depending on why you missed each call:

Busy your phone is engaged in other activities. No Answer you do not answer. The phone will ring 4 times before forwarding the call. Unreachable your phone is out of coverage or powered off. You can forward Line 1 and Line 2 independently. 68 www.motorola.com/iden

Call Forwarding When your phone is set to forward all calls, one of the following icons appears on the top row of your display screen to indicate the call forwarding option you have chosen:

Icon Indicates... G H I J K L Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 1 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 2 are being forwarded. Line 2 is active; calls from Line 1 and Line 2 are being forwarded. Turning On Call Forwarding 1 2 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. 3 At the Call Forward screen, the Forward field is highlighted. Press B under CHANGE. 4 5 6 Press S to scroll to All Calls. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. 69 7 To activate a call forwarding number:

If you have never used Call Forwarding before, the Forward screen appears. To enter a call forwarding number, type the number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. Or, If you have used Call Forwarding before, the call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE to access the Forward screen. To forward your calls to this number, press B under OK. To forward your calls to a different number, press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. Type the new number on your phones keypad or press B under SEARCH to select from numbers stored in your phone. Press B under OK. Your calls will now be forwarded to the number that you selected. Turning Off Call Forwarding Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field highlighted. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 70 3 4 Press R to scroll to the To field and press B under CHANGE. Call Forwarding Press S to scroll to Off and press B under SELECT.

You will now receive all calls on your phone. When you are unavailable, your calls will be forwarded according to your Detailed call forwarding settings. By default, the Detailed option is set to forward your calls to Voice Mail. Setting Call Forwarding to Voice Mail In most cases, turning off Call Forwarding restores your ability to receive Voice Mail messages when you are unavailable (see Turning Off Call Forwarding on page 70). If you have completed those steps but are still not able to receive Voice Mail messages, you can reset Call Forwarding to Voice Mail. For you to receive Voice Mail messages, Call Forwarding must be set to Detailed with your Voice Mail access number:

1 2 3 4 5 Press m then press R to scroll to Call Forward. Press B under SELECT. The Call Forward screen displays with the Forward field set to Detailed. Press R to scroll to the If Busy field and press B under CHANGE. The call forwarding number you last used is displayed. Press B under CHANGE. If this is your Voice Mail access number (the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number followed by 6245), go to step 7. Press and hold A under DELETE to erase the displayed number. 71 6 7 8 Enter your Voice Mail access number. Your Voice Mail access number is the first six digits of your 10-digit phone number, followed by 6245. (For example 7035556245.) Press B under OK. Repeat step 3 through step 7 for the If No Answer field and the If Unreachable field. 9 When finished, press A under EXIT. 72 www.motorola.com/iden The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Message Center Voice Mail Text and Numeric Messaging Net Alert Using Your Phone as a Modem Messages Page 73 Page 74 Page 76 Page 78 Page 79 Message Center The Message Center enables you to access all messaging services through one screen. To access the Message Center:

If MESG is one of your display options:

From the Ready screen, press B under MESG. If MESG is not one of your display options:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Messages. Press B under SELECT. The Message Center screen displays the number of messages you have in each message service Voice Mail (Voice Mail), Text Msgs (Text and Numeric Messages), and Net Alerts (Net Mail). 73 To access any message service:

1 2 From the Message Center screen, press R to scroll to the message service you want to access. Press B under the display option on the right. This option varies depending on the message service selected. Voice Mail New Message Indicators When you receive a new message:

New Voice Mail Message will display on the screen. f Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under CALL or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Transferring Calls to Voice Mail Press A under NO while your phone is ringing to transfer incoming calls directly to Voice Mail. 74 www.motorola.com/iden

Using Voice Mail Logging Into Voice Mail 1 From the Ready screen, press B under MESG to open up the Message Center screen. 2 Voice Mail should be highlighted to indicate that it is selected. If it isnt highlighted, press S to scroll to the Voice Mail field. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Using Voice Mail A g 3 Press B under CALL to log into your Carriers Voice Mail System. Calling displays as you are connected to the network. 75 Text and Numeric Messaging With Text and Numeric Messaging, your i88s phone will:

Allow text (alpha) messages up to 140 characters in length. Allow numeric messages up to 20 characters in length. Accept your messages even if you are unavailable, if your phone is turned off, or if you are busy on another call. Alert you of a new text or numeric message, even if you are on another call. Store a message if you are making a Private or Group call and deliver it upon completion of the call. Store the message if you are outside of the coverage area and deliver it as soon as you are back in a coverage area. Attempt continuous delivery of messages until successful, for up to 7 days. Refer to text and numeric messages as Text Messages. Stamp the message with the time and date the message was left. Store up to 16 messages at a time, that will remain until you delete them. NOTE: Mail Waiting, Memory Full displays when 16 message registers are full. (Messages must be erased before you can receive others.) Allow for Auto Call Back of a phone number that is included within a message, by pressing s. If the message contains two phone numbers, Auto Call Back will dial the last number. Notification of New Messages When you receive a new message:

New Text Message will display on the screen. i www.motorola.com/iden 76

Text and Numeric Messaging Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until you press B under READ or A under EXIT. (If you are on a call, your phone will alert you once during the call.) Accessing New Messages When you receive a message, you can view it immediately or later:

View a Message Immediately 1 2 3 Press B under READ. The message displays. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. Viewing a Message Later Press A under EXIT. The . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. Viewing Stored Messages 1 2 3 4 In the Message Center screen, press S to scroll down to Text Msgs. The number of new messages and the total number of messages are displayed. Press B under SELECT. The Text Msg Inbox screen appears. Press S to scroll to the message you want to read and press B under READ. If the message fills more than one screen, use S to scroll through the rest of the message. 77

5 Press A under SAVE to save the message. Or, Press B under DELETE to delete the message. Net Alert NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. With Net Alert, you can send text and numeric messages in any of three ways:

from your i88s phone from a web site provided by your service provider from any email application When you receive a new message:

Words will display on your phones display screen indicating that you have a Net Alert message. (The exact words displayed are determined by your service provider.) Your phone will alert you every 30 seconds until your press B to access the message or A to or exit the screen. If you choose to exit the screen and view the message later, the . icon will appear on the second line of the Ready screen to remind you that you have a stored message. You can view new or stored Net Alert messages at any time by access the Message Center. For more information, see Message Center on page 73. Using Your Phone as a Modem NOTE: Some features may be network dependent or subscription only, and may not be available in all areas. Contact your service provider for more information. You can use your i88s phone as a modem for data transfer from your laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer. This is particularly useful when there is no wired phone line (wall jack) available. 78 www.motorola.com/iden

Using Your Phone as a Modem You simply attach a data cable (available separately) to your phone and your computer. From that point, your phone is your modem. This allows you to send or receive time-critical information such as email, a field service report, or files. In addition, you can also send or receive faxes. This type of wireless connection uses one of two types of data connection:

circuit-switched data and packet data. Circuit-switched data is typically used for sending and receiving faxes and for transferring large files. Packet data is used for small file transfers such as email. To use these services, you must install the iDEN Wireless Data Services software (available separately). For more information on setting up your computer and your i88s phone for Packet and Circuit Data calls, see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide and contact your carrier. TTY Users You can use your phone and computer in TTY mode. Your computer screen and keyboard replace the standard TTY device. For more information, please see the Wireless Data Services Users Guide. 79

80 www.motorola.com/iden Private Calls The main topics covered in this section are listed below:

Private Call Call Alerts Group Call Page 81 Page 84 Page 88 Private Call There are two ways to reach an individual using Private calls. You can enter the persons Private ID number then press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. Or, you can store the persons name and Private ID number, then recall the number from your Phonebook. Whether you dial the persons Private ID directly or store it in your Phonebook, you must have the individuals Private ID to use Private calls. To learn how to store names and numbers, see Phonebook on page 39. USER TIP: To find out your own Private ID number, see My Information on page 24. Making a Private Call from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you are trying to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. 81 Making a Private Call from the Phonebook If you have stored a persons Private ID in your Phonebook, you can use your Phonebook to make a Private call to that person:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll through the names until the desired name is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call from the Recent Call List From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to the Recent Calls. Press B under SELECT. From the Recent Calls screen, press S to scroll through the names and numbers until the desired name or Private ID number is highlighted. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 5 82 Private Call Making Calls Using Voice-Activated Dialing If you have recorded a voice name for a Private ID in your Phonebook (see Voice Names on page 41), you can use this voice name to call the number. 1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the Private ID you want to call. 3 Your phone will play the name back to you. Press the PTT button. USER TIP: If you have difficulty making phone calls using a voice name, try assigning a longer voice name to the number. For example, if the voice name Joe fails to place a call to Joe Smiths number, try assigning the voice name Joe Smith to the number. Receiving a Private Call When you receive a Private call, your phone emits a chirping sound and Private in Use appears on the screen. The Private ID or the name of the caller (if stored in your Phonebook) displays. To respond to a Private Call:

1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Begin talking after the phone emits a chirping sound. Release the PTT button to listen. Storing Private IDs For information store Private ID numbers to your Phonebook, see Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. For information on how to quickly store Private ID numbers, see Storing Phone Numbers and Private IDs Quickly on page 48. 83 Call Alerts You can send a call alert, which lets recipients know that you would like to talk with them. When you send an alert, the recipient will receive a series of beeps and your name or Private ID will appear on the display. Placing a Call Alert from the Keypad 1 2 3 Enter the Private ID of the person you want to call. Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen displays. Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. Placing a Call Alert from the Phonebook From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll down to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. From the Phonebook screen, press S to scroll to the Phonebook entry for the person you want to alert. If more than one number is stored for an entry, press T until idisplays. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 84 4 Press B under ALERT. The Ready to Alert screen appears. Call Alerts V 5 Press and hold the PTT button until Alert Successful displays. The alert sounds intermittently until the user of the phone answers, queues, or clears the alert. Ready to Alert Screen Ready to Alert is used to confirm your request for the alert and to prompt you to push the PTT button:

If you press the PTT button, the call alert is sent, and the phone displays the Recent Calls screen. For call alerts placed from the keypad, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Dial screen with the previously entered number displayed. For call alerts placed from the Phonebook, pressing A under CANCEL causes the phone to return to the Phonebook screen. If you do nothing, the phone will revert to the Ready screen. Receiving Call Alerts When you receive a call alert, your phone emits a chirp and displays the name or number of the caller. You can answer, queue, or clear the call alert:

To answer a call alert, press the PTT button. To queue a call alert, press B under QUEUE. To clear the call alert, press A under CLEAR. NOTE: Until you answer, queue or clear the Call Alert, you will not receive any additional phone, Private or Talkgroup Calls. 85

Call Alert Queue Call alert queuing enables you to save call alerts in a list, or queue. To store a call alert in the call alert queue, press B under QUEUE when you have received an incoming call alert. Accessing the Call Alert Queue 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. The Call Alert Queue screen displays. Viewing Call Alert Date and Time To find out the date and time a call alert was received:

1 2 3 4 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the desired call alert. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to View. Press B under SELECT. Sorting Call Alerts To sort your call alerts by the order they were received:

From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press S to scroll to Sort By. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 86 Call Alerts 4 5 Press S to scroll to First on Top or Last on Top. Press B under SELECT. Responding to a Call Alert From the Queue 1 2 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. You can respond by sending a call alert or placing a Private call. To send a call alert, press B under ALERT and then press the PTT button. Or, To place a Private call, press the PTT button. The call alert will be removed from the queue. Deleting a Call Alert From the Queue To delete a call alert from the queue:

1 2 3 4 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press S to scroll to the entry you want to delete. Press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete. Press B to SELECT. 5 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete all call alerts. 87 To delete all call alerts from the queue:

1 2 3 From the Call Alert Queue screen, press m to access Call Alert Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All. Press B to SELECT. 4 When the confirmation screen appears, press B under YES to delete the entry. Group Call In a Group call, you can communicate instantly with a group of people that you have previously set up as a Talkgroup. Your sales representative must set up your Talkgroups by providing you with a Talkgroup number for each Talkgroup. After you have the number, you can assign each Talkgroup number a name and store it in your phone (see Naming a Talkgroup on page 88). Your phone can store up to 30 Talkgroups. You can make calls to any of the Talkgroups in your Phonebook at any time. However, to receive calls from a Talkgroup, you must first join that Talkgroup

(see Joining a Talkgroup on page 90.) Naming a Talkgroup From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to New Entry. Press B under SELECT. The Entry Details screen displays. Enter the information as you would any other Phonebook entry. (See Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44.) When you get to Type, make sure that you select Talkgroup. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 5 6 88 Group Call 7 Enter the Talkgroup name or number. 8 When you have completed the Entry Details, press A under DONE. Making a Group Call from the Keypad 1 2 Press # and then enter the Talkgroup number of the group that you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup may emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling, or may simply emit the sound of your voice when you start speaking. If a phone receiving a Group call has Speakerphone set to On (see Hands-Free Speakerphone on page 64), it will not emit a chirping sound before your voice. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Group Call from the Phonebook 1 2 From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup may emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling, or may simply emit the sound of your voice when you start speaking. If a phone receiving a Group call has Speakerphone set to On (see Hands-Free Speakerphone on page 64), it will not emit a chirping sound before your voice. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 89 Making a Group Call from the Recent Calls List 1 2 From the Recent Calls screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Press and hold the PTT button on the side of the phone, wait for your phone to emit a chirping sound, and speak. The phones of individuals in the Talkgroup may emit a chirping sound to alert them that someone is calling, or may simply emit the sound of your voice when you start speaking. If a phone receiving a Group call has Speakerphone set to On (see Hands-Free Speakerphone on page 64), it will not emit a chirping sound before your voice. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Receiving a Group Call When you receive an incoming Group call, your phone may emit a chirping sound followed by the voice of the person calling, or may simply emit the voice of the personal calling. If you have Speakerphone set to On (see Hands-Free Speakerphone on page 64) your phone will not chirp when you receive a Group call; you will simply hear the callers voice. To respond to a Group call:

1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Joining a Talkgroup To receive Group calls from a Talkgroup, you must first join the Talkgroup. You may only belong to one Talkgroup at a time. When you join a new Talkgroup, you no longer belong to your previous Talkgroup. 90 www.motorola.com/iden Group Call To join an ongoing Talkgroup:

1 Using the keypad, press # then enter the Talkgroup number. Or, From the Phonebook screen, press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. Or, If the Talkgroup you want to join is on your Recent Call list, go to the Recent Call screen and press R to scroll to the name of the Talkgroup you want to call. 2 Press B under JOIN. Group-Silent Programming Group-Silent programming enables you to silence incoming Group alerts and voice communication. Turning Group-Silent On or Off 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Tkgrp Settings. Press B under SELECT. 4 With the Silent field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. 5 6 Press S to scroll to On or Off. Press B under SELECT. 91 92 www.motorola.com/iden GPS Enabled Your phones GPS Enabled feature uses information from Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) will vary depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are often difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in other situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. SEE:

IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 94. When you make a 911 emergency call, the phones GPS feature can help emergency personnel locate you if your phone has adequate access to GPS satellite signals and your emergency response center is equipped to process such information. You can also use the GPS feature to view your approximate location. Location information appears on your phones display screen. Java applications loaded on your phone can also request your location. If your phone is connected to a laptop computer or similar device, software running on that device can request your location. To protect your privacy, you can control whether these requests are granted. This section includes:

IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind Making an Emergency Call Accessing the GPS Menu Viewing Your Approximate Location Enhancing GPS Performance Updating Satellite Almanac Data Setting Privacy Options Using GPS with Map Software Page 94 Page 95 Page 96 Page 96 Page 98 Page 98 Page 99 Page 101 93 IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind If you are using your phones GPS feature while driving, please give full attention to driving and to the road. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because your GPS antenna cannot establish a view of a wide area of open sky), the GPS feature of your phone WILL NOT WORK. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations. Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles. Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure. Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover. Near a powerful radio or television tower. When your GPS antenna is covered (for example, by your hand or other object) or facing the ground. Temperature extremes outside the operating limits of the phone. Walking or driving very slowly may also substantially reduce GPS performance. Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take much longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any 911 call, always report the location to the emergency response center if you can and if you cannot, remain on the phone for as long as the emergency response center instructs you. Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature will only provide an approximate location, often within 150 feet (45 meters) but sometimes much further from your actual location. Advice on how to improve GPS performance is provided in Enhancing GPS Performance on page 98. While the GPS feature of your phone can be a valuable navigational aid, it does not replace the need for careful navigating and good judgment. Never rely solely on one device for navigation. Remember that the accuracy of the location information and the time needed to obtain it will vary depending on circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from adequate numbers of satellites. On emergency calls, your phone uses assistance information from the phone network to improve the speed and accuracy of the phones location calculation:

if such assistance information becomes unavailable, it may reduce the speed and accuracy of the location calculation. 94 www.motorola.com/iden

Making an Emergency Call The satellites used by your phones GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of your phones GPS feature. Making an Emergency Call Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. When you make an emergency 911 call, your phones GPS feature begins to seek information to calculate your approximate location. It will take your phones GPS feature some time to determine your approximate location. Even where your phone has good access to sufficient GPS satellite signals and network assist data, it may take 30 seconds or more to determine the approximate location. This time will increase where there is reduced access to satellite signals. When your approximate location is determined, it is made available to the appropriate emergency response center. In some cases, your local 911 emergency response center may not be equipped to receive GPS location information. For this reason, and because the GPS location information reported is only approximate or may not be available in your location (see IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 94), always report your location to the 911 operator you speak to when making an emergency call, if able, just as you would when using a phone without GPS capabilities. NOTE: If you are concerned about whether your local 911 emergency response center is equipped to receive GPS location information, contact your local authorities. In general, if your phone has access to signals from more GPS satellites, your location will be determined faster and more accurately than if your phone has access to signals from fewer GPS satellites. If your phone does not have adequate access to GPS satellites signals, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is automatically made available to emergency response center, if the center has the capability to receive such information. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 98 for information on how to help your phone determine your location. 95 Accessing the GPS Menu To access the GPS menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to GPS. Press B under SELECT. Viewing Your Approximate Location To view your location:

1 2 3 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Position. Press B under SELECT. To view the entire displayed screen, press S to scroll. This displays the following information about the last time your location was calculated:

the time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date that the location was last calculated. the approximate location, expressed as latitude and longitude. the estimated accuracy of the calculated location. This estimate of accuracy is only a very rough estimate and may vary substantially from the actual accuracy of the approximate location information reported. 96 www.motorola.com/iden

Viewing Your Approximate Location the number of satellites used to calculate the location. In general, more satellites make for better accuracy. m n To calculate your location again:

Press B under RFRSH. It may take your phone several minutes to complete the process of determining your location. During this time, a message usually displays on your phones screen saying your phone is scanning for satellites. For tips on getting the best location calculation, see Enhancing GPS Performance on page 98. The Position screen displays the updated information. To cancel a location calculation before it is completed:

Press B under CANCEL to return to the Position screen. Or, Press e to return to the Ready screen. Each time your phones approximate location is calculated, the latest location information is stored in your phone and remains there even when your phone is powered off. You will see this information the next time you view the Position screen. If you received a phone call or alert while attempting to determine your phones location, the Position screen will disappear, but your phone will continue attempting to determine its location. If it is successful, the new location information will be displayed the next time you view the Position screen. 97

Enhancing GPS Performance Sometimes your phones GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. If this happens when you are making an emergency call, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is made available to the appropriate emergency response center if the center has the capability to receive such information. If this happens when you are trying to view your location on your phones screen, you will see a message indicating that your phone cannot access satellites. To improve accuracy and increase your chances of a successful calculation, do the following while your phone is determining your approximate location:

Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your phone and a large amount of open sky. If possible, go outside, away from tall buildings and foliage. While performance in a building is improved by moving closer to windows, glass with certain sun shielding films may block satellite signals. Hold the phone to enhance reception. Signals from GPS satellites are transmitted to your GPS antenna, which is inside the back of your phone, opposite the earpiece, behind the label with your service providers name on it. Hold your phone away from your body, giving the antenna clear access to satellite signals. Do not cover the antenna area with your fingers or anything else. GPS antenna area Stand still. If possible, stand still until your phone is finished determining your location. Moving the phone at a walking pace while the phone is calculating your approximate location may substantially decrease GPS performance. 98 www.motorola.com/iden

Updating Satellite Almanac Data In a car. When using the GPS Enabled feature in a car, position the phone so that the GPS antenna has good access to GPS signals through the cars windows. Typically, the GPS antenna has best access to GPS signals in a car when placed near a window. NOTE: Although moving the phone at a walking pace decreases GPS performance, moving it at the speed of a moving car does not. Stay in network coverage. Depending on who your service provider is, the network will provide your phone with information that helps determine your location more quickly and accurately. Updating Satellite Almanac Data Another way to keep your phones GPS feature working well is to keep your satellite almanac data up to date. The United States government maintains an almanac of data about where GPS satellites are as they orbit the Earth. This information is available to your phone. Keeping your satellite almanac up to date helps your phone determine your location more quickly. The almanac contains information about the precise location of satellites, their operational status, and other satellite information. Keeping this information updated enhances the performance of your GPS feature. In most cases, your phone will be able to get a fix in strong satellite signal conditions with outdated almanac data, but it may take longer. NOTE: When you make an emergency call, your phone does not rely upon the almanac to determine your location. If your satellite almanac data is out of date, your phone may prompt you to update it. Follow the instructions that appear on your phones display screen. You may be asked to go to a web site or call a customer care number. Setting Privacy Options Your phones GPS privacy options control whether Java applications on your phone or other software applications may view your phones location.You may set your phone to one of three GPS privacy options:

Restricted No Java or similar software applications may view your phones location. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. Unrestricted All applications may view your phones location, without notifying you. 99

By Permission When an application attempts to view your phones location, you will be prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. NOTE: Privacy options do not apply to the transmission of location information during emergency 911 calls. To set your GPS privacy options:

1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Privacy. Press B under SELECT. If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled, enter your GPS PIN. (See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 100 for more information.) Press S to scroll to the privacy setting you want. Press B under SELECT. Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy option can be protected by a PIN. When you receive your phone, the GPS security feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If you turn this feature on, you will be required to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. To turn the GPS Enabled security feature on or off:

1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 2 3 4 100

Using GPS with Map Software 5 Press R to scroll to On or Off. On enables the GPS PIN requirement;

Off disables the GPS PIN requirement. Press B under SELECT. 6 At the Verify GPS PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE: When you receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. To change your GPS PIN:

1 At the Ready screen, press m and then press R to scroll to Settings. 2 3 4 Press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to Security and press B under SELECT. Press R to scroll to New Passwords and press B under SELECT. 5 At the New Passwords screen, press R to scroll to GPS PIN and press B under SELECT. 6 At the Enter Old GPS PIN Code screen, enter the current GPS PIN and press B under OK. NOTE: When your receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 7 At the Enter New GPS PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN and press B under OK. 8 At the Re-enter New GPS PIN Code screen, re-enter the new GPS PIN to confirm, and press B under OK. Using GPS with Map Software You can use your phones GPS feature to provide approximate location data to a laptop computer or similar device that is running interactive map software such as that made by DeLorme or Microsoft. This way, if your phone has good access to GPS signals, your approximate position on a map can be made available as you as you travel in a vehicle. 101 To do this, connect your phone to your laptop (or other device) with a data cable and set your phone to transmit data (see Getting Started on page 102). Your phone then provides your approximate location to the device running the map software, which displays your location on a map. Your phone provides an updated location every second and the map software displays your changing location on its map. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 98 for more details on obtaining good location information. NOTE: Because your phone is continuously determining your location, using your phones GPS feature with map software uses your phones battery power quickly. Software Compatibility Your phone sends location information to your laptop or other device using the standard National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format. Your phone supports output messages in NMEA-0183 format and supports the following NMEA-0183 sentences: GGA, GLL, GSA, GSV, RMC, and VTG. The map software running on your laptop or other device must support NMEA 3.0. Getting Started To connect your phone to your laptop or other device:

1 Hold the phone with its keypad facing up and hold the data cables connector with the Motorola logo facing you. 2 3 Insert the data cables connector into the right side of the accessory connector at the bottom of the phone, until you hear a click. Insert the data plug into the COM port of your laptop or other device. Ensure the COM port settings of your laptop or other device are set to the following:

Bits per second: 4800 Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 102 www.motorola.com/iden

Using GPS with Map Software Flow control: Hardware To set your phone to send location information to your laptop or other device:

1 2 3 4 5 From the GPS screen, press R to scroll to Interface. Press B under SELECT. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to On. Press B under SELECT. Your phone is now sending location data to your laptop or other device. To stop your phone from sending location data to your laptop or other device:

Set Interface to Off and press B under SELECT. Each time you power your phone on, Interface is automatically set to Off. Getting the Best Location Information This feature works best when used while traveling at the typical speed of a motor vehicle. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, your phone may not be able to determine your location as quickly or as accurately. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 98 for more details on obtaining good location information. 103

104 www.motorola.com/iden Datebook The Datebook is a calendar in your i88s phone that enables you to schedule and organize events, such as appointments and meetings. Schedules can be created and viewed for specific days, and reminder alarms can be set so that you never miss important events. You can view upcoming events by week or by day. The Datebook stores and manages 250 events over a 13-month period (12 months ahead and 1 month back). NOTE: The time and date format and the year used in Datebook can be set by you. Before using Datebook for the first time, ensure that the current year is correct. See Initial Setup on page 142 for more information. This section includes:

Datebook Icons Viewing Your Datebook About Datebook Events Adding New Events Editing Events Deleting Events Datebook Event Reminders Page 106 Page 106 Page 108 Page 109 Page 113 Page 113 Page 114 105 Datebook Icons There are several icons commonly used in the Datebook application:

Symbol Description C f j I G Event without a start/

end time More options are available Recurring Appointment Datebook Alarm Used to move through fields when setting a time and date. Viewing Your Datebook To access your Datebook:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Datebook. Press B under SELECT. Information in your Datebook can be viewed in three ways: by the week, by the day, or by the event. This information is structured hierarchically. When you access the Datebook, it displays the current week. You can select a day to view and display the events of that day. When the events of a day are displayed, you can select an event to view and display details of that event. 106 www.motorola.com/iden Viewing Your Datebook Viewing a Week When you access your Datebook, the current week is displayed. You can scroll to other weeks by pressing S. Displayed week Days of week start/end time EventscEvent without a The dates of the displayed week appear at the top of the text area of your phones screen. Below the dates are letters indicating the days of the week. When you access your Datebook, the current day is highlighted. You can scroll to other days by pressing T. Below each letter is a 12-hour time window for each day. Scheduled events are shown within the time window in black. A small bar between the letter and the time window indicates an event on that day that does not have a time of day associated with it, such as a birthday. Viewing a Day To view a day in your Datebook:

1 With a week displayed, select the day you want to view by pressing T until the letter for that day is highlighted. 2 Press B under VIEW. The day and date appear at the top of the text display area. Events for the day selected are listed by time. Events without times are displayed at the top of the list with a bullet to the left of them. 107 Viewing Event Details To view the details of an event:

1 2 3 Select and view the day containing the event you want to view. Press S to scroll to the event. Press B under VIEW. This displays event details such as day of week, time, title, duration, alarm time, and repeat cycle. For more information about events, see About Datebook Events on page 108. Viewing Today You can easily go to the current day when viewing your Datebook:

1 While viewing any week, day, or event, press m. This displays the Datebook Menu with Go to Today highlighted. 2 Press B under SELECT. About Datebook Events Each Datebook event may contain the following information:

The title you assign to the event. You can enter a title using the phones alphanumeric keypad or choose from a list of commonly used titles. A title is required for every event (maximum of 128 characters). Additional text following the events title. The start time and duration of the event. The date of the event. An option to repeat the event in your Datebook. An alarm to notify you of the event before it begins. The style you want your phone to use when the event occurs. See Styles on page 150 for more information. 108 www.motorola.com/iden

Adding New Events Adding New Events Using the following instructions, you will enter the information in the order the items appear on the Event Form screen. However, you can enter this information in any order by pressing S to scroll through the items on the Event Form screen. You can leave any item blank or unchanged by pressing S to scroll past it on the Event Form screen. Only a title and a date are required for a valid event. To cancel a Datebook event entry at any time, press e to return to the Ready screen. To add a Datebook event:

1 Access the Event Form screen:

While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to New. Press A under SELECT. Or, While viewing a day, press S to scroll to

[New Event]. Press A under SELECT. b The Event Form screen displays with the Title field highlighted. 2 With the Title field highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access the Title screen. 109 3 Assign a title to the event:

Press B under BROWSE to choose from a list of commonly used event titles. Press S to scroll to the title you want and press B under SELECT. Or, Type the title using the alphanumeric keypad. See Using T9 Text Input on page 25 for information about entering text into this field. You can also enter a description of the appointment or any other text. When you are finished, press B under OK. The Event Form screen returns with the Start field highlighted. 4 If you want to assign a time of day to the event:

With the Start field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Start screen, enter the time the event will begin. Type in the start time, or press S to scroll through the hours, minutes, and am, pm, or 24 hour clock. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Duration field highlighted. 5 After you have assigned a start time to the event, you can specify the duration of the event. The default duration is one hour. To assign a different duration:

With the Duration field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Duration screen, press R to scroll to the desired duration. If you select None, the event will have a duration of zero minutes. Press B under SELECT. The Event Form screen returns with the StartDate field highlighted. 110 www.motorola.com/iden Adding New Events 6 The default date assigned to an event is the day that was highlighted when you accessed the Event Form screen to add the event. To assign a different date:

With the StartDate field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the StartDate screen, enter the date of the event:

Type in the date, or press S to scroll through the months, days, and years. Press T or press B under G to move through the fields. Press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Repeat field highlighted. 7 If you want the event to recur in your Datebook, assign a repeat cycle to it:

With the Repeat field highlighted, press A under CHANGE. From the Repeat screen, press S to scroll to the desired repeat cycle. Press A under SELECT.

(If your appointment recurs more than one day a week, scroll to Multiple Days and select as many days as apply. Then press A under DONE.) The Event Form screen returns with the RepeatEnd field highlighted. NOTE: When Repeat is set to none or yearly, it will not be possible to access the RepeatEnd field. Press B under CHANGE and enter the date on which you want the event to stop repeating. When you have finished, press A under DONE. The Event Form screen returns with the Alarm field highlighted. 111 8 If you want to set an alarm to remind you that the event is approaching:

With the Alarm field highlighted, press B under CHANGE. From the Alarm screen, press S to scroll to the desired alarm option. Y If you choose the 1 day before option, the alarm will remind to you at your daily begin time (see Customizing Datebook Set Up on page 114) the day before the event, rather than 24 hours before the event. If you choose the 1 week before option, the alarm will remind to at your daily begin time a week before the event. Press B under SELECT. 9 If you want your phone to change to a style you have defined when the event occurs (see Styles on page 150):

With the Styles field highlighted, press A under CHANGE. From the Style screen, press S to scroll to the desired style. Press B under SELECT. 10 When you have entered all the desired information about the event, press A under DONE. h X 112 www.motorola.com/iden Editing Events Editing Events 1 If you are viewing the week containing the event:

Press B under EDIT. Or, If you are viewing the day containing the event:

Press m to display the Datebook Menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press then B under SELECT. 2 Follow the applicable instructions in Adding New Events on page 109, to edit the various fields. Deleting Events 1 View the day containing the event and press S to scroll to the event you want to delete. 2 3 4 Or, View the details of the event you want to delete. Press m. The Datebook Menu displays. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. If the event is a recurring event, the Delete Event screen appears:

To delete only the occurrence of the event you select in step 1, leave This Event Only highlighted. To delete all occurrences of the event, press R to highlight Repeat Events. Press B under SELECT. 113

Datebook Event Reminders If you have set an alarm to remind you that a Datebook event is approaching, your phone sounds an audible alarm and displays a reminder. NOTE: You must have the Time and Date display turned on to receive event reminders. This is the default setting. When a Datebook event reminder appears on the screen:

Or, Press A under EXIT to dismiss the event Press A under VIEW to view more information about the Datebook event. reminder. F Customizing Datebook Set Up Datebook allows you to customize some of its set up features:

DailyBegin sets the beginning time of the 12-hour day your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. Reminder controls the behavior of alarms you have set in Datebook:

Active Only sets Datebook to ignore alarms that occur when your phone is powered off. Delayed If Off sets Datebook to delay alarms that occur when your phone is powered off until your phone is next powered on. Weekday sets the first day of the week your Datebook displays when you are viewing a week. DeleteAfter controls how long your Datebook waits to delete an event after it has occurred. 114 www.motorola.com/iden

Customizing Datebook Set Up To customize your Datebook set up:

1 While viewing a week in the Datebook, press m to access the Datebook Menu. 2 3 Press S to scroll to Setup and then press B under SELECT Press R to scroll to any of the set-up features. Press B under CHANGE. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 115 116 www.motorola.com/iden The Memo application provides you with a place to store a numeric note in your i88s phone. You may call this number or store it in your Phonebook. Memo This section includes:

Creating a Memo Viewing the Memo Editing the Memo Deleting the Memo Making a Call to the Memo Number Storing the Memo Number to Phonebook Creating a Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. The Memo screen displays. Type your numeric memo using the phones keypad. Press B under STORE. Viewing the Memo 1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Page 117 Page 117 Page 118 Page 118 Page 118 Page 119 117 Editing the Memo 1 2 3 4 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Type the new number. You can delete a digit by pressing A under DELETE. To all the digits, press and hold A under DELETE. 5 Press B under STORE. Deleting the Memo 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Press and hold A under DELETE. Press B under STORE. Making a Call to the Memo Number From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press B under SELECT. Press s. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 118 Storing the Memo Number to Phonebook Storing the Memo Number to Phonebook 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Memo. Press A under SELECT. Press m. With Store to PHBK highlighted, press A under SELECT. Press A under SELECT. This displays the Store To screen with [New Entry] highlighted. To create a valid Phonebook entry, you must assign a type. Press R to scroll to the Type field. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the type of number you want to assign to the Phonebook entry. Press B under SELECT. If you want to add more information to the Phonebook entry, follow the applicable instructions in Adding Phonebook Entries on page 44. 119 120 www.motorola.com/iden Voice Record The Voice Record feature of your i88s phone enables you to record and play back personal messages or the incoming portion of phone calls on your i88s phone. This section includes:

About Voice Record Accessing Voice Record Recording a Voice Record Playing a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record Labeling a Voice Record Deleting a Voice Record Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Voice Record Memory Page 121 Page 121 Page 122 Page 122 Page 123 Page 123 Page 124 Page 124 Page 125 About Voice Record Your phone can store up to 20 Voice Records, with a total time of about three minutes, depending on available memory. Accessing Voice Record To access the Voice Record feature:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT. 121 Recording a Voice Record NOTE: Recording of phone calls is subject to varying State and Federal laws regarding privacy and recording of phone conversations. To record a personal message as a Voice Record:

1 2 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to [New VoiceRec]. Press B under RECORD and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 3 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. To record the incoming portion of a call as a Voice Record:

1 While on an active call, press m. 2 3 Press R to scroll to VoiceRecord. Press B under SELECT to record the incoming portion of the call. Your own voice will not be recorded. 4 When you are finished recording your Voice Record, press B under STOP. Playing a Voice Record From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to play. Press B under PLAY. To stop the Voice Record while it is playing, press A under BACK. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 122 Adding to a Voice Record Adding to a Voice Record After you create a Voice Record, you can record more at the end of the existing Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to the Voice Record you want to add to. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Add To. Press B under SELECT and speak the message you want to record into the microphone. 5 When you are finished recording, press B under STOP. Labeling a Voice Record When you create a Voice Record, it is labeled with the time and date it was recorded. After a Voice Record has been recorded, you can re-name it with a custom label. To label a Voice Record:

1 2 3 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to name. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Label and press B under SELECT. 4 At the Enter Label screen, enter a label for the Voice Record using the alphanumeric keypad. 5 Press B under OK. 123 Deleting a Voice Record To delete a Voice Record:

1 2 3 From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to delete. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete and press B under SELECT. 4 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. To delete all unlocked Voice Records:

1 2 From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Delete All and press B under SELECT. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Press A under YES to confirm. Locking/Unlocking a Voice Record Locking a Voice Record prevents it from being deleted. When a Voice Record is locked, the locked icon M appears next to it. To lock or unlock a Voice Record:

From the VoiceRecord screen, press R to scroll to Voice Record you want to lock or unlock. Press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Lock or Unlock. Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 124 Voice Record Memory Voice Record Memory Typically, you can store 20 Voice Record with a total time of about three minutes. To check the amount of memory available for Voice Record:

1 2 3 4 From the VoiceRecord screen, press m to view the VoiceRecd Menu. Press R to scroll to Memory. Press B under SELECT to display the Memory Meter screen. The memory meter shows the amount of Voice Record memory space currently in use. It fills in from left to right as your Voice Record memory space fills up. From the Memory Meter screen, you can free more Voice Record memory space by pressing B under DELETE to delete all unlocked Voice Record. A confirmation screen displays. Press A under YES to confirm. NOTE: Because Voice Record are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Java applications, using a large amount of memory to store Java applications reduces the space available for Voice Record. When this occurs, deleting Java applications from your phones memory frees memory space for Voice Record. For more information about Java applications stored in your phone, see Java on page 127. 125 126 www.motorola.com/iden Java The Java feature of your i88s phone runs applications written in the Java 2 Micro Edition programming language. The phone comes with Java applications downloaded and ready for installation. You can choose to order or purchase Java applications and download them into your phone via the Internet. For more information, see Downloading Java Applications on page 129. This section includes:

Accessing Java Menu Installing Java Applications Running Java Applications Downloading Java Applications Java Applications and GPS Enabled Java Memory Deinstalling Java Applications Page 127 Page 128 Page 128 Page 129 Page 129 Page 131 Page 132 IMPORTANT:

To avoid personal injury, do not play games on your i88s phone when operating machines or driving vehicles. Accessing Java Menu To access the Java menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Java Apps. Press B under SELECT. 127 The Java menu displays all of your Java applications. Installing Java Applications To install a Java application:

1 2 3 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the desired application. To determine whether the application needs to be installed, look at the display options on the screen. If the display option is RUN or SELECT, the application is already installed and ready to run. See Running Java Applications on page 128. If the display option is INSTALL, press B under INSTALL to install the application. The screen will display a series of installation steps. A checkmark will appear as each step is completed. This may take several minutes. When your phone has finished installing the application, press A under DONE. Running Java Applications To run an application:

1 2 From the Java Apps screen, press R to scroll to the application you want to run. Press B under RUN or SELECT. NOTE: If you receive an incoming phone call, the Java application will be suspended. To suspend a running application:

Press e. 128 www.motorola.com/iden Downloading Java Applications To resume a suspended application:

Press B under RESUME. To stop running an application:

Press e and then press A under EXIT. Downloading Java Applications You can customize your phone by ordering additional Java applications via the iDEN Update Website. Please go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of applications available and downloading instructions. You can download these applications by connecting your phone to a PC using a data cable and the iDEN Update Software Application. NOTE: This is network subscription dependent feature. Please check with your service provider for availability. Java Applications and GPS Enabled Some Java applications can make use of your phones GPS feature to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone. (See GPS Enabled on page 93 for more information on the GPS feature.) However, for privacy reasons, you may not always want Java applications to access your phones geographical location. Your phone protects your privacy by giving you the option to block all or some Java applications from accessing your phones location. About GPS Privacy Options GPS enables you to choose one of three privacy options:

Restricted No Java or similar software applications may access your phones location. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. Unrestricted All Java applications may access your phones location, without notifying you. By Permission When a Java application attempts to access your phone location, you will be prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. 129

See Setting Privacy Options on page 99 for information on choosing one of these options. Granting or Denying Permission If you choose the By Permission option, you have several ways to grant or deny each Java application access to your phones location. When a given Java application attempts to access your phones location for the first time, a screen appears informing you that the Java application is requesting a read on your phone location. You may see this screen again when the Java application requests access to your phones location, depending on the privacy setting you choose for the individual Java application (see Setting Privacy for Each Java Application on page 130). To deny this request:

Press A under DENY. The Java application will not access your phones location. To grant this request:

Press A under GRANT. The Java application accesses your phones location. If you grant the request, a screen appears asking you if you want to allow this Java application to access your phones location from now on:

Press A under YES to allow this Java application to access your phones location from now on, without prompting you again. This sets this Java applications privacy setting to Always (see Setting Privacy for Each Java Application on page 130). Press A under NO if you want this Java application to prompt you the next time it attempts to access your phones location, Setting Privacy for Each Java Application After a given Java application attempts to access your phones location for the first time, you have the opportunity to set GPS privacy settings for that Java application from the Java menu. www.motorola.com/iden 130 Java Memory You may choose one of three privacy settings for each Java application:

Always The Java application always has permission to access your phones location, without notifying you. Ask When the Java application requests access to your phones location, you will be prompted to grant or deny permission (see Granting or Denying Permission on page 130). Never When the Java application requests access to your phones location will automatically be denied without requiring any user action. To view or change the privacy setting of a Java application:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to Java application for which you want to assign a privacy setting. If the application has attempted to access your phones location once, the menu icon will appear when you highlight the name of the application. Press m. Press R to scroll Privacy Settings. Press B under SELECT. The Privacy Setting screen shows the current privacy setting to this Java application. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to choose the privacy setting Always, Ask, or Never for this Java application. Java Memory In order to download, store and run the application of your choice, you must have enough Data and Program memory available in your phone. Data memory refers to the memory needed to download an application to your phone. Program memory refers to the memory needed to install and run an application on your phone. 131

To check how much memory your phone has available for Java applications:

1 2 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to Java System. Press B under SELECT. Press B under NEXT to go to the Java System screen. The Data Space and Prog. Space information will be available. You may free more Data Memory and Program Memory space by deinstalling an application that you do not wish to use. Deinstalled applications that were obtained from iDEN Update may be redownloaded at a later time at no cost. For information on deinstalling, see Deinstalling Java Applications on page 132. NOTE: Java applications are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store Voice Records. Using a large amount of data memory to store Voice Records reduces the data memory available for downloading of Java applications. When this occurs, deleting Voice Records from your phone's data memory space will free memory space for Java applications. Deinstalling Java Applications To remove a Java application from your phone:

1 2 3 4 5 From the Java Apps screen, press S to scroll to the application you want to remove. Press m. Press R to scroll to DEINSTALL. Press B under SELECT. A confirmation screen displays. Press A under YES. A warning screen displays. Press A under OK. 6 When your phone has finished deinstalling the application, press A under DONE. 132 www.motorola.com/iden Customizing the i88s Phone You can customize your i88s phone to fit the way you want to use it. This section includes:

Settings Styles Shortcuts Page 133 Page 150 Page 155 Settings The phones Settings menu enables you to control many of the phones features and functions, including display properties, message handling, and security features. To access the Settings menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. NOTE: Changes to some of your phone Settings may not take effect if there is an active style. Styles must be to Off. See Turning Off a Style on page 153. From the Settings screen, you can access these Settings options:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings or vibrates when you receive calls and messages. Phone Setup sets call-answering features, turns off non-telephone features, chooses which phone line is used, and sets your network ID. In-Call Setup sets call timer, message notification, and call waiting features. Security sets security features including phone lock, keypad lock, and SIM PIN. 133

Personalize controls which features are most accessible when you turn on your phone. Initial Setup sets a variety of display features including the language displayed, the size of the characters on the text screen, time and date formats, current year, backlight, status light, and scrolling. Also turns auto redial on or off and sets baud rate. VoiceVolume sets the volume of your phones earpiece and speaker. Tkgrp sets certain Talkgroup options. Service Status shows the status of your phones services. To access any of these options:

1 2 From the Settings screen, press R to scroll to the option you want to access. Press B under SELECT. Many of these options have other options within them. Press S to scroll through the lists of options, and press A or B to select and modify options and the features, according to the instructions on your phones screen. For some options, you can also press T to select sub-options. In screens that show lists of options for a setting, a check mark to the left of the option indicates the current option for the setting. Ring/Vibe Ring/Vibe enables you to control how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and messages. You can set ring volume, choose ring styles, and use the VibraCall Alert feature which enables you to set your phone to alert you to calls and messages by vibrating. Main Options Ring/Vibe provides these main options:

Ringer Vol sets ring volume. Keypad Vol sets volume of sounds associated with keypad actions. Mail Vol sets volume of Text Message, Voice Mail, and Net Alert notifications. Java/Data Vol sets volume of sounds made by Java applications. 134 www.motorola.com/iden

Settings Headset choosing the HdsetOnly option prevents sound from being emitted from the phones speaker when the headset is being used. VibeAll choosing On sets the phone to vibrate for all calls, messages, and alerts; choosing Off enables you to set the type of notification for each these features. Ring Style and Notification Type When you set VibeAll to On, your phone vibrates to notify you of all types of calls, messages, and alerts. When you set VibeAll to Off, the following features display after VibeAll on the Ring/Vibrate screen, enabling you to set notification options for each:

Line 1 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 1. Line 2 sets the ring style and type of notification for calls on Line 2. Pvt/Grp sets type of notification for Private and Group calls. Call Alert sets the ring style and type of notification for call alerts. Text Msgs sets type of notification for Text Messages. Reminder sets type of notification for Datebook reminder alarms. Voice Mail sets type of notification for Voice Mail messages. Netmail sets type of notification for Net Alert messages. To set VibeAll to Off or On:

From the Ring/Vibrate screen, press S to scroll to the VibeAll. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to Off or On. Press B under SELECT. 1 2 3 4 Or:

With the phone cover closed, use the volume buttons to set VibeAll to Off or On. Increasing the volume sets VibeAll to Off. Decreasing the volume to as much as possible sets VibeAll to On. 135

The following icons appear on the second row of your display screen to indicate the options you have chosen:

Icon Indicates...

Vibrate All - phone is set to vibrate when you receive all types of calls, messages, and alerts; the VibeAll option is On. Vibrate On - phone is set to vibrate when you receive phone calls. Vibrate Then Ring - phone is set to vibrate and then ring when you receive phone calls. Silent - phone is set not to ring. Notification Types When you set a notification type, you have these options:

Ring the phone rings to notify you. Vibe the phone vibrates to notify you. Vibe/Ring the phone vibrates and then rings to notify you. This option is only available for calls on Line 1 and Line 2. Silent the phone does not ring or vibrate to notify you. To set a notification type:

1 2 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features on the Ring/Vibrate screen after VibeAll. Press B under SELECT. 3 With the Type field highlight, press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the notification type you want to assign to the feature. To assign the notification type, press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 4 5 136

Settings Ring Styles When you set a ring style, you can choose from any of nine pre-set ring styles. To set a ring style:

1 2 From the Ring/Vibrate screen, ensure that VibeAll is set to Off. Then press S to scroll to any of the features that allow you to set a ringer style: Line1, Line2, or Call Alert. Press B under SELECT. 3 With the Style: field highlight, press B under CHANGE. 4 5 Press R to scroll to the ring style you want to assign to the feature. To assign the ring style, press B under SELECT. USER TIP: To hear the ring style you have selected, press the volume control buttons on the side of your phone. Phone Setup Phone Setup sets some basic phone features. Access Phone Setup to set the following options:

Line enables you to choose Line 1 or Line 2 as the active line for outgoing calls. AutoAns sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail, unless you are out of coverage or on the line. Any Key when turned on, enables you to answer calls by pressing any key on the alphanumeric keypad. Phone Only when turned on, prevents your phone from making or receiving Private calls or Group calls. Network ID enables you to set the phones network IDs and their roaming options under the direction of your service provider. 137

In Call Setup In Call Setup sets the in-call timer, message notification, and call waiting features. The In Call Timer option turns the following features on and off:

Display the duration of the current call displays on the phones screen when the call ends. Minute Beep an audible beep occurs every minute of an active call. The Notifications option controls message notification during calls:

Receive All notifies you of all types of messages during calls. Msg Mail Only notifies you of mail messages only; all other types of message notifications are delayed until the call has ended. Delay All delays notification of all messages until the call has ended. Call Waiting enables you to turn off call waiting for the next call. After you hang up, call waiting is turned back on. Security Security allows you to set security features:

Phone Lock sets an optional code that locks your phone. Keypad Lock displays instructions for locking and unlocking your phones keypad. SIM PIN enables and disables your phones SIM PIN security feature. GPS PIN enables and disables your phones GPS PIN security feature. New Passwords enables you to change your phones security code, phone unlock code, and SIM PIN. Master Reset allows your service provider to reset your service in the event of a security or provisioning problem. Using Phone Lock The Phone Lock feature enables you to prevent your phone from being used unless an Unlock code is typed into the keypad. The Unlock code is required to enable the phone lock feature, to unlock the phone, and to set a new Unlock code. Contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. www.motorola.com/iden 138

Settings Phone lock provides two options for locking the phone:

Lock Now locks the phone immediately after you set the option. Auto Lock locks the phone the next time the phone is powered on. Setting Keypad Lock The i88s phone includes a keypad lock feature that enables you to lock your phones keypad to avoid inadvertently pressing or replacing calls. See Keypad Lock on page 20 for more information on locking the keypad. Keypad Lock provides two options for locking the phone:

Lock Now locks the keypad immediately after you set the option. Auto Lock specifies a time after which your keypad locks automatically, if your no keys or buttons on your phone have been pressed during that time. You may choose 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 20 minutes. Enabling and Disabling SIM PIN The SIM PIN option enables and disables the feature that requires a SIM PIN code to be typed into the phone to access the information on the SIM card and to make or receive calls. See SIM Card Personal Identification Number (PIN) on page 12 for more information. Setting New Passwords The New Passwords option enables you to set passwords that control access to your phone:

Unlock Code this code is used to control access to the phone using Phone Lock. It is also required to access the Master Clear and Feature Reset features. If you want to use any of these features, contact your service provider for your default Unlock code. Security Code this code is used to access the Master Reset feature under the direction of your service provider. It can also be used to override your Unlock code and GPS PIN under the direction of your service provider. SIM PIN this code is used to access the information on your SIM card and to make or receive calls. When you get your phone, your SIM PIN is 0000. You should change this to a SIM PIN known only to you as soon as your get your phone. For information on changing your SIM PIN, see Changing the SIM PIN on page 14. 139

GPS PIN this code is used to access the privacy setting the control access to your phones GPS Enabled location by Java applications. When you get your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. If you want to protect your GPS Enabled privacy settings, you should change this to a GPS PIN known only to you as soon as your get your phone. For more information on your GPS PIN, see Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 100. Using Master Reset The Master Reset option is provided for use only under the direction of your service provider. It resets your service. Personalize Personalize contains three options that control which major features are easiest to access when you turn on your phone:

Main Menu changes the order of the items on your main menu. Keys controls which main menu items appear above the two option keys on the Ready screen. Power Up App sets any of the programs on the main menu to run when you turn on your phone. Reordering Main Menu 1 2 3 4 From the Personalize screen with Main Menu highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Reorder Menu screen. Press S to scroll to the main menu option you want to move. Press B under GRAB. Press S to move the option up or down in the list. 5 When the item is where you would like it to appear in the main menu, press B under INSERT. Repeat step 2 through step 5 for all main menu items you want to move. Press A under DONE. www.motorola.com/iden 6 7 140

Settings Changing Ready Screen Options Two options from the main menu always appear on your Ready screen above the left and right option keys. Each option can be accessed by pressing the corresponding option key. Your phone arrives with Phonebook (PHBK) assigned to the left option key

(A) and Messages (MESG) assigned to the right option key (B). You can assign any Main Menu option you want to the option keys. 1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Keys. Press B under SELECT. The Keys screen shows the option assigned to each option key (Left and Right). To change the option assigned to the left option key, press B under CHANGE while Left is highlighted. Press R to scroll to the option you want to assign to the left option key. Press B under SELECT. To change the option assigned to the right option key, press R to highlight Right and press B under CHANGE. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the right option key. Changing Power-Up Program Your phone is set to display the Ready screen when it is powered on. You can set the phone to display the main screen of any main menu option when it is powered on. 1 2 3 From the Personalize screen, press R to scroll to Power Up App. Press B under SELECT. The Power Up App screen shows the name of the program or screen that currently appears when the phone is powered on. Press B under CHANGE. 141 4 5 Press R to scroll to the option you want to appear when the phone is powered on. Press B under SELECT. Initial Setup Initial Setup enables you to control a variety of your phones features that you may want to modify when you first get your phone:

Time/Date Format sets the format in which the time and date display on your phone. Year sets the current year. NOTE: Changing the current year may affect stored Datebook events. Datebook stores events 12 month ahead and one month after the current date. Events outside this range will be deleted. See Datebook on page 105 for more information. Auto Redial turns the automatic redial feature on and off. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. Sensor - controls the photo sensor to activate the backlight when your phone is in poor lighting conditions. Status Light controls whether the status light is on when the phone is on. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. Contrast controls how light or dark the screens appears. Scroll sets how you can scroll lists and menus. Language sets the language that your phone displays. Master Clear returns all settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Feature Reset returns all settings to their original defaults. Use only under the direction of your service provider. Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates with a laptop computer, PC, or similar device. TTY Setup sets TTY options. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device. TTY Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates when connected to a TTY device. 142 www.motorola.com/iden

Settings Alert Timeout - controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. Return to Home - controls how long the Recent Calls screen displays before returning to the Ready screen after phone and Private or Group conversations. Changing Time and Date Format Your phone displays times in 12-hour-clock format (12:00 am through 11:59 pm) or 24-hour-clock format (0:00 through 23:59). It displays dates in month/

day format or day/month format. NOTE: If you turn the time and date display off, no times are associated with calls on your Recent Calls list, and the alarm feature of your Datebook is disabled. To set the time and date format, or turn time and date display on or off:

1 2 From the Initial Setup screen with Time/Date Format highlighted, press B under SELECT to access the Time/Date Format screen. To change the time format:

With Time Format highlighted, press B under CHANGE to access Time Format screen. Press S to highlight the time format you want. Press B under SELECT. 143

3 To change the date format:

Press S to highlight Date Format:, and press B under CHANGE to access Date Format screen. Press S to highlight the date format you want. Press B under SELECT. 4 To turn the time and date format on or off:

Press R to highlight Display, and press B under CHANGE to access Display screen. Press S to choose Off or On. Press B under SELECT. Setting Auto Redial When Auto Redial is set to On, if you receive a System Busy, Try Later message while making a call, the phone will redial the number automatically. You will hear a ring-back tone when a successful call is placed. When Auto Redial is set to Off, you must press and hold s to redial the last number dialed. Setting Backlight Timer The backlight illuminates the display when you receive or make calls. You can set the amount of time that the backlight stays on to 5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds, or set it to stay on continuously or stay off at all times. From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Backlight. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired backlight option. Press B under SELECT. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 4 144 Settings Setting Photosensor To conserve battery power, the photosensor will disable the backlight when you are in good lighting conditions. To force the backlight to come on every time a key is pressed, you can turn the photosensor off. NOTE: Setting the Backlight to come on continuously while the Photosensor is turned on will drain your battery power. 1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Sensor. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired option. Press B under SELECT. Adjusting Status Light The status light is part of your phones power button. It illuminates when the phone is on. You can turn the status light feature on or off from the Initial Setup screen. Setting Text Display You can set your phones text display area to show more text using smaller characters or less text using larger characters. The size and amount of text displayed depends on the view selected:

Standard view five lines of text, 14 characters per line. Compressed view seven lines of text, 18 characters per line. Zoom view four lines of text, 11 characters per line. To set the text display view:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Display:. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. 145

NOTE: Unless otherwise noted, illustrations in this Users Guide depict Standard view. Setting Scrolling You can set your phone to scroll through menus and lists in either of two ways:

Up/Down when you reach the bottom or top of list or menu scrolling stops until you scroll in the other direction. Wrap Around when you reach the bottom or top or a list or menu scrolling wraps around and continues at the other end of the lists of menu. You can set the scrolling style from the Initial Setup screen, using the Scroll option. Changing Display Language You can customize the i88s phone to display menus in English, French, Spanish, or Portuguese. The default language is English. To change the display language:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Language. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll to the language you want your phone to display. Press B under SELECT. Master Clear Master Clear returns all your phones settings to their original factory defaults, erases all stored lists, and sets your previous three GPS Enabled location fixes to zero. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. Feature Reset Feature Reset returns all your phones settings to their original defaults and sets your previous three GPS Enabled location fixes to zero. To use this feature, you must contact your service provider to receive your phones Unlock code. 146 www.motorola.com/iden

Settings Setting Baud Rate You can set your phones baud rate from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Baud Rate option and then choose the baud rate you want, or choose Auto to set your phone to automatically choose the appropriate baud rate. Setting TTY Mode NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. TTY Setup enables you to set your options for using your phone with a teletypewriter (TTY) device. By default, your phone is set to function with a TTY device in TTY mode. Your phone supports the following TTY modes:

TTY for calls in which you type and read text on your TTY device. VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) for calls in which you speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY device. HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) for calls in which you type text on your TTY device on listen to voice replies on your phones speaker. You can set your TTY mode using your phones Settings menu at any time, or by issuing commands from your TTY device while on an active call. To set your phones TTY mode using your phones Settings menu:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Setup. Press A under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired TTY mode; Off, TTY, VCO, or HCO. Press A under SELECT. 147

To set your phones TTY mode from your TTY device, issue one of the following commands while on an active call:

VCO please to select VCO mode. HCO please to select HCO mode. HCO off please to turn off HCO mode. IMPORTANT:

When you are using HCO, the sound coming from your phone speaker may be uncomfortably loud. Use caution when putting the phone to your ear.

(For information on setting your phones speaker volume, see Alert Timeout on page 148.) NOTE: TTY device manufacturers proprietary feature such as Turbo-

Code, High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by your phone. These features must be turned off or disabled to use your TTY device with your phone. Setting TTY Baud Rate NOTE: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. By default, your phones TTY baud rate is set to 45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your TTY baud rate to 50.0. To change the TTY baud rate:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to TTY Baud. Press A under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the baud rate for your location. Press A under SELECT. Alert Timeout Alert timeout controls the amount of time the Call Alert tone sounds. The display will continue to show the alert information even though the Call Alert tone has stopped. You can set your phones alert timeout rules from the Initial Setup screen. Scroll to the Alert Timeout option and then choose the desired interval. (No Alert Tone, 5 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Continuous. 148 www.motorola.com/iden

Settings Return to Home You can control the amount of time that the recent call screen displays after a call. You can set different timeouts (30 seconds, 1 min, 5 min, or 10 min) for phone calls and private calls:

After Phone Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a phone call. After Prvt/Group Set the time that the recent calls screen displays after a private or group call. To set the recent calls timeout.:

1 2 3 4 From the Initial Setup screen, press R to scroll to Return to Home. Press B under CHANGE. Press S to scroll to the desired display option. Press B under SELECT. Voice Volume Voice Volume sets the volume of the sound coming from your phones earpiece or speaker:

1 2 3 From the Voice Volume screen, highlight Earpiece Vol to set the earpiece volume, or press R to scroll to Speaker Vol to set the speaker volume. Press B under CHANGE. To select a volume level:

Press T to raise of lower the volume setting. Or, Press the Volume Control keys on the side of your phone. 4 Press B under OK. 149

Tkgrp (Talkgroup) Settings Tkgrp Settings enables you to set certain Talkgroup options. See Group Call on page 88 for more information. Service Status The Service Status screen shows the status of your phones services. This screen is for information only; no options can be set. Styles The Styles feature enables you to save a group of settings for call and message notification, screen display, and call answering features. You save your selections as a style and access them at any time. You can store up to ten styles. You may want to use this feature to create a style for use in your car, or in meetings, for example. Each style contains the following settings:

Ring/Vibe controls how your phone rings and vibrates when you receive calls and other messages. See Ring/Vibe on page 134. Backlight controls how long your phones backlight stays on. See Setting Backlight Timer on page 144. Display controls the size of the text in the text display area. See Setting Text Display on page 145. Call Filter enables you to set your phone to not ring or vibrate when you receive some or all calls, messages, and alerts. See Setting Call Filtering on page 153. Auto Answer sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is turned on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller; it does not send the call to Voice Mail. Using the Styles feature, you can create styles, edit styles, view a styles properties, delete styles, activate any style you have created, or turn off the active style. 150 www.motorola.com/iden

Styles To access the Styles Menu:

1 2 3 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Styles. Press B under SELECT. From the Styles Menu, you can:

activate a style or turn off the currently active style create a new style access the Styles menu for more Styles functions Creating a Style When you create a style, you give it a name and set the features of that style. The name of the style then appears on the Styles Menu. To create a style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to [New Style]. Press B under SELECT. 3 Assign a name to the style you are creating:

In the Name screen, use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the name you want to give the style. As you type, you can delete a letter by pressing A under DELETE. To create a space, press P once. Press B under OK. 4 In the New screen, press R to scroll through the settings for each style option. 151

5 To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 6 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. Editing a Style To change the settings of a style:

1 2 3 4 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to edit. Press m to access the Styles Action menu. Press R to scroll to Edit and press B under SELECT. To change any style option:

Press R to highlight the option. Press B under CHANGE or SELECT. Use the screens that appear to make your changes. 5 When all the style options have the settings you want, press A under DONE. Activating a Style When you access the Styles Menu, a check mark appears to the left of the name of the style that is currently active on your phone. If no style is active, the check mark appears next to Off. 152 www.motorola.com/iden Styles To activate a style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to the name of the style you want to activate. Press B under SELECT. The style immediately becomes active on your phone. Turning Off a Style To turn off a style without activating another style:

1 2 From the Styles Menu screen, press R to scroll to Off. Press B under SELECT. Using the Styles Actions Menu When you highlight a style on the Styles Menu, you can then access the Styles Actions menu for additional Styles functions. To access the Styles Actions menu, press m from the Styles menu. The Styles menu provides the following options:

View view settings of the highlighted style. Change activate the highlighted style. Edit edit the settings of the highlighted style. New create a new style. Delete delete the highlighted style. Delete All delete all styles. Setting Call Filtering The Call Filter feature enables you to control which calls, messages, and alerts your phone responds to, and which it ignores. From the Call Filter screen, you set separate filtering options for phone calls, Private and Group calls, alerts, and messages:

153

Phone sets filtering options for phone calls. Prvt/Grp sets filtering options for Private and Group calls. Alerts sets filtering options for call alerts. Notifications sets filtering options for messages. Setting Phone Call Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone responds to all calls, no calls, or only calls from some or all numbers in your Phonebook:

Off sets your phone notify you of all calls. All sets your phone to ignore all calls. All Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from the numbers stored in your Phonebook. Some Phonebook sets your phone to notify you only of calls from numbers you select from your Phonebook. You may choose up to five Phonebook entries. To choose Phonebook entries that you want your phone to respond to calls from:

1 2 3 4 5 6 From the Call Filter screen, press R to scroll to Phone. Press B under CHANGE. Press R to scroll Some Phonebook. Press B under SELECT. The entries stored in your Phonebook appear. To select a Phonebook entry as one you want to your phone to respond to calls from, press S to scroll the Phonebook entry and press B under SELECT. A check mark appears next to each selected Phonebook entry. You may select up to five Phonebook entries. To remove a selected Phonebook entry from the list, press S to scroll the name and press B under SELECT. 7 When you have selected the Phonebook entries you want, press A under DONE. 154 www.motorola.com/iden

Shortcuts Setting Private and Group Call Filtering Setting Prvt/Grp to On sets your phone to ignore all Private and Group calls. Setting Prvt/Grp to Off sets your phone to respond to all Private and Group calls. Setting Alert Filtering Setting Alerts to On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts. Setting Alerts to Off sets your phone to respond to all call alerts. Setting Message Notification Filtering Call Filter enables you to set your phone to notify you of some types of messages, all types of messages, or no messages:

Off allows your phone to notify you of all messages. Voice Messages allows your phone to notify you of Voice Mail messages. Text Messages allows your phone to notify you of Text Messages messages. All prevents your phone from notifying you of all messages. Call Filter can prevent your phone from ringing or vibrating when you receive a message. Your display screen will still indicate that you have messages. Shortcuts The Shortcuts feature enables you to access most menu or submenu options in your phone by pressing a numeric button on the keypad or speaking a voice name for the shortcut. You create the shortcut to the menu by assigning a number to it and then access the menu by pressing the number. Creating a Shortcut 1 Navigate to the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. For example, if you wanted to create a shortcut to Ring/Vibe. From the Ready screen, press m, then press R to scroll to Settings. Press B under SELECT. Ring/Vibe is now highlighted in the Settings screen. 2 Press and hold m for about 2 seconds. 155

3 A confirmation screen displays showing the name of the menu item to which you want to create a shortcut. To proceed with assigning the shortcut, press A under YES. 4 A screen displays showing the assigned shortcut number. If you want to change the shortcut number:

Press B under CHANGE. Press A under DELETE to erase the assigned number. Enter the desired number on your keypad and press B under OK. 5 If you want to record a voice name for that shortcut:

Press R to highlight the Voice field. Press B under RECORD. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the shortcut. Speak clearly into the microphone. An ) icon appears in the Voice field indicating that the voice name has been recorded. USER TIP: For best results, record in a quiet environment. 6 Press A under DONE. Using a Shortcut To use a shortcut to access a menu:

From the Ready screen, press m. Press the number assigned to the shortcut. You have 2 seconds to do this after pressing m. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 156 Shortcuts Or, 1 2 3 4 5 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. Press B under SELECT. Press S to scroll to the shortcut you want to use. Press B under GOTO. Or, if you have assigned the shortcut a voice name:

1 2 From the Ready screen, press and hold t on the side of your phone until the Say Name Now screen appears. Say the voice name assigned to the shortcut into your phones microphone. 3 Your phone will play the voice name back to you. Using the Shortcut Menu The Shortcut Menu enables you to manage your shortcuts with the following options. New view instructions for assigning a shortcut. Edit edit a shortcut name and key number. Reorder assign existing shortcuts to a different key number. Delete delete any highlighted Shortcut. Delete All delete all stored Shortcuts. To access the Shortcut menu:

1 2 From the Ready screen, press m. Press R to scroll to Shortcuts. 157

3 4 Press B under SELECT. Press m. 158 www.motorola.com/iden Accessories To order additional accessories, log on to our Web site at: www.motorola.com/

store/iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. This section includes the following topics:

Wearable Carrying Solutions Batteries Travel Charger Data Accessories Wearable Carrying Solutions Swivel Carry Clip Page 159 Page 161 Page 162 Page 164 The Swivel Carry Clip provides a convenient means by which to carry your i88s phone with you. It consists of the Phone Clip and the Belt Clip. Phone Clip Belt Clip 159 Using the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Attach the Phone Clip to the phone. USER TIP: Start with the antenna side of the clip. 2 Slide the Belt Clip onto the Phone Clip until you hear it click. 3 Attach the Swivel Carry Clip (Phone Clip and Belt Clip) to your belt. 4 To release phone from belt clip, push the button on the top of the belt clip. Removing the Swivel Carry Clip 1 Hold the phone securely in your left hand. Curl the right hand index finger and place the outer edge of the finger against the knob of the Phone Clip. Place the thumb of your right hand on the side of the phone, directly below the left side of the Phone Clip. www.motorola.com/iden 2 3 160 Batteries 4 5 Squeeze the right hand thumb and index finger together until the clip snaps out of the retaining slot on the left side Remove the clip. Batteries For best results, charge the batteries within the temperature range of 10oC to 40oC (50oF to 104oF). Prolonged charging is not recommended. For battery charging guidelines, see Table below. Charging Lithium Ion Batteries Table 1 provides the approximate time to fully charge a battery using a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger. Check the kit number on your battery and charger to determine the appropriate charging time. Table 1: Battery Charging Times MOTOROLA BATTERIES Description/Chemistry Rapid Charger Charging Time to 100%

Slim Li Ion 2 hours 30 minutes High Performance Li Ion 2 hours 30 minutes Extra Capacity Li Ion 2 hours 30 minutes Maximum Capacity Li Ion 3 hours Mid-Rate Charger 4 hours 5 hours 7 hours 8 hours NOTE: Charging times are based on a fully discharged battery. For optimal battery life, use a Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion battery charger with your Motorola iDEN Lithium Ion battery. Other chargers may not fully charge your Lithium Ion battery. Battery Operating Instructions Extreme temperatures will degrade battery performance. Do not store your battery where temperatures exceed 60C (140F) or fall below -20C (4F). 161

Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate and without use, will lose about 1% of its charge per day. The battery capacity will be degraded if stored for long periods while fully charged. If long term storage is required, store at half capacity. The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion chargers will provide optimum performance. Other chargers may not fully charge your iDEN Lithium Ion battery or may yield reduced number of lifetime charge cycles. If the battery appears inoperative, the internal protection circuitry may have been activated. Remove the battery from the phone and put it into the charger for several minutes to reset the circuitry. When batteries are not in use, always store them in the plastic safety tray. Travel Charger You can charge a battery from an AC outlet. On one end of the Travel Charger, an accessory connector attaches to the bottom of the phone. At the other (AC outlet) end of the device, there is a compact housing that contains the plug-in power supply. NOTE: Additional adaptor plugs to accommodate various International power outlets can be purchased separately. Accessory connector 162 www.motorola.com/iden

Travel Charger Using the Travel Charger 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Plug the Travel Charger transformer into an AC wall outlet. 163 Data Accessories Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable The Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable allows you to transfer data between your i88s phone and a laptop or desktop computer. This cable accommodates both circuit and packet data applications. The cable features a charging port which enables you to charge the phone while transferring data. To use the USB cable, your laptop or desktop computer must have a driver installed for this purpose. The USB cable is authorized for use with the following operating systems only when used in conjunction with Motorola/iDEN created or approved PC applications and one of the following operation systems: Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, Windows ME. Using the USB 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Insert the data plug directly into your laptop or desktop computer. 164 www.motorola.com/iden Data Accessories RS232 Data Cable The RS232 Data Cable facilitates quick and easy data synchronization between your i88s phone and a PC. This cable accommodates both circuit and packet data applications. The cable also features a charging port. Any applicable phone charger may be used to charge the phone simultaneously. Port for charging source Using the Data Cable 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Insert the data plug directly into your PC or one of the many other data compatible iDEN accessories. 165 Dual Port Adapter Cable The Dual Port Adapter Cable enables in-vehicle communications and charging of the i88s phone via the Hands-Free Car kit, while being simultaneously connected for data operations. C A R K I T D A T A Using the Dual Port Adapter Cable Insert the flat end of the Dual Port Adapter Cable cord into the bottom connector of the i88s phone. Make sure the Motorola logo is facing upward. Insert the round end of the RS232 Data Cable into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Data. Insert the Hands-Free Car Kit into the receptacle on the Dual Port Adapter Cable labeled Car Kit. www.motorola.com/iden 1 2 3 166 Data Accessories PDA Converter Plugs The PDA (Pocket Digital Assistant) plug is a convenient way to connect your i88s phone to many types of PDA devices, both PC and Windows CE compatible. Below is the list of adapters which can be used with your i88s phone:

Palm IIITM/VIITM Cable Adapter Palm VTM Cable Adapter Generic Pocket Digital Assistant (PDA) Male-Female Serial Adapter (Not Shown) Plam III/IV or Palm V Type Plug Using the PDA Converter Plug 1 While holding the phone with its keypad facing up, insert the accessory connector (with the Motorola logo facing you) into the bottom of the phone until you hear a click. 2 Connect the opposite end of the data cable to the PDA converter. 167

3 4 Connect other end of PDA converter to the mating connector of the PDA device. If you are using the NTN8993 PDA adapter, connect the other end of the adapter to the PDAs supplied data synchronization cradle and place the PDA into the cradle. 168 www.motorola.com/iden Other Important Information This section includes the following topics:

Understanding Status Messages Safety and General Information Limited Warranty Information Patent and Trademark Information Page 169 Page 172 Page 188 Page 196 Understanding Status Messages The following table lists and describes the status messages. Status Messages Message Description Number Not in Service The number that you entered is not valid. User Not Available The phone that you called is either busy, out-of-coverage, or turned off. Please try again later. User Not Authorized The person that you called has not purchased this service. Please Try Later This service is temporarily not available. Please try again later. User Busy in Private The phone that you called is busy in a Private call. User Busy in Data Service Restricted Service Not Available The phone that you called is busy in a Dial-Up call. This service was restricted by your service provider, or this service was not purchased. This feature is not available on the current network. 169 Status Messages Message Description System Busy Try Later The system is experiencing heavy traffic. Please try again later. Service Conflict Please Try Again Self Check Error Self Check Fail PIN Blocked Call Your Provider Insert SIM Check SIM Card Wrong PIN Wrong Code Enter PIN This service cannot be enabled because an incompatible service has already been turned on. An error occurred. Please try again. A fault was detected with your phone. If this error recurs, note the error code and contact Customer Care. An operational fault was detected with your phone. Note the numeric code, turn your phone off, and contact Customer Care. The incorrect PIN was entered three consecutive times. You will be unable to place or receive calls on your i88s phone. Call your service provider to have them obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code. Your SIM Card is not being detected. Please check to ensure that you have inserted the SIM Card. Please check your SIM Card to make sure it has been inserted properly. You have entered an incorrect PIN number. Your phone will not accept a SIM card that is not from your carrier. Please enter your 4-8 digit SIM Pin code. Enter Unlock Code Auto Phonelock is activated. Enter your unlock code. New Browser Message Memory Full!

170 Warns of low memory for Net Alerts www.motorola.com/iden Understanding Status Messages Status Messages Message Description Scanning for Satellites Searching for GPS satellites. Unable to Located Sats For Update Visit:

Technical Error Could not find GPS satellites. Directs you to update GPS satellite almanac data. A problem occurred phones GPS circuitry. If this error occurs, contact Customer Care. 171 Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE PORTABLE RADIO. RF Operational Characteristics Your radio product contains a radio frequency transmitter to convey the information you wish to send as well as occasional automatic signals used to sustain connection to the wireless network, and a receiver which enables you to receive communication and connection information from the network. PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply with the following RF exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999. Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications

(Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2001 ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular and PCS product certification. To assure optimal radio product performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:

www.motorola.com/iden 172

PORTABLE RADIO PRODUCT OPERATION AND EME EXPOSURE Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your radio product as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Two-way radio operation When using your radio product as a traditional two-way radio, hold the radio product in a vertical position with the microphone one to two inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the lips. Body-worn operation To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your body when transmitting, always place the radio product in a Motorola approved clip, holder, holster, case or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a Motorola approved body-worn accessory and are not using the radio product in the intended use positions along side the head in the phone mode or in front of the face in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the antenna and the radio product are kept the following minimum distances from the body when transmitting Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5 cm) Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5 cm) Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio product and may violate FCC regulations. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio product is IN USE. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the radio product to operate at a higher power level than needed. 173

Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, visit our website at www.mot.com/iden, or look in the accessory section of this manual. ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5815 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.* Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.24 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.267 W/kg during voice transmission using Phone Mode and 0.85 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.) While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://

www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5815. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. ______________________________________

* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 174 www.motorola.com/iden Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio product must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association (AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio product and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6 inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the radio product is turned ON. Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radio products may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. 175

Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio products in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using the radio product while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. 176 www.motorola.com/iden

Operational Warnings

W A R N I N G Operational Warnings For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not place a portable radio product in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio product prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless it is a radio product type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved). Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. NOTE: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio product when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. 177 Operational Cautions

C a u t i o n Antennas Do not use any portable radio product that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Cleaning and Drying Considerations Using a leather carry case may help protect the surfaces and help prevent liquids

(e.g., rain) from entering into the interior of the radio product. This product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit. If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a dryer as this will damage the radio product and void the warranty. Instead, do the following:

Immediately power off the radio product. 1. 2. Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped) from radio product. 3. 4. Shake excess liquid from radio product. Place the radio product and battery in an area that is at room temperature and has good air flow. 178 www.motorola.com/iden Operational Cautions 5. Let the radio product, battery, and SIM card dry for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery and/or powering on the radio product. If the radio product does not work after following the steps listed above, contact your dealer for servicing information. Clean the external surfaces of the radio product with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of dishwashing detergent and water. Some household cleaners may contain chemicals that could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners. Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio product. 179 Accessory Safety Information IMPORTANT:

SAVE THESE ACCESSORY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Before using any battery or battery charger, read all the instructions for and cautionary markings on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which may include a separate wall-mounted power supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product using the battery. Do not expose any battery charger to water, rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or in-vehicle use only.

W A R N I N G To reduce the risk of injury, charge only the rechargeable batteries listed in the Accessories section of this manual. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and damage. To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug, pull by the plug rather than the cord when you disconnect the battery charger from the power source outlet. Do not operate any battery charger with a damaged cord or plug replace them immediately. Battery chargers may become warm during operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the touch, unplug it from the power outlet immediately and discontinue its use. Use of a non-recommended attachment to a battery charger may result in a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons. Make sure the battery charger power cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or subjected to damage or stress. An extension cord should not be used with any battery charger unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure that:

The pins on the plug of the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the plug of the charger. The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition. The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100 feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet. 180 www.motorola.com/iden

US FDA Consumer Update Do not operate any battery charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or has been damaged in any way; take it to a qualified service technician. Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to a qualified service technician when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire. Maximum ambient temperature around the power supply or transformer of any battery charger should not exceed 40C (104F). The output power from the power supply or transformer must not exceed the rating given on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger. The disconnection from the line voltage is made by unplugging the power supply from the AC receptacle. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any battery charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. For optimum charging performance, turn off the radio product while charging it in any battery charger. 181

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health Consumer Update on Mobile Phones FDA has been receiving inquiries about the safety of mobile phones, including cellular phones and PCS phones. The following summarizes what is known--

and what remains unknown--about whether these products can pose a hazard to health, and what can be done to minimize any potential risk. This information may be used to respond to questions. Why the concern?

Mobile phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (i.e., radiofrequency radiation) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF), considered non-significant, when in the stand-by mode. It is well known that high levels of RF can produce biological damage through heating effects (this is how your microwave oven is able to cook food). However, it is not known whether, to what extent, or through what mechanism, lower levels of RF might cause adverse health effects as well. Although some research has been done to address these questions, no clear picture of the biological effects of this type of radiation has emerged to date. Thus, the available science does not allow us to conclude that mobile phones are absolutely safe, or that they are unsafe. However, the available scientific evidence does not demonstrate any adverse health effects associated with the use of mobile phones. What kinds of phones are in question?

Questions have been raised about hand-held mobile phones, the kind that have a built-in antenna that is positioned close to the user's head during normal telephone conversation. These types of mobile phones are of concern because of the short distance between the phone's antenna--the primary source of the RF--

and the person's head. The exposure to RF from mobile phones in which the antenna is located at greater distances from the user (on the outside of a car, for example) is drastically lower than that from hand-held phones, because a person's RF exposure decreases rapidly with distance from the source. The safety of so-called "cordless phones," which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in a house and which operate at far lower power levels and frequencies, has not been questioned. 182 www.motorola.com/iden US FDA Consumer Update How much evidence is there that hand-held mobile phones might be harmful?

Briefly, there is not enough evidence to know for sure, either way; however, research efforts are on-going. The existing scientific evidence is conflicting and many of the studies that have been done to date have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of RF exposures characteristic of mobile phones have yielded conflicting results. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals. In one study, mice genetically altered to be predisposed to developing one type of cancer developed more than twice as many such cancers when they were exposed to RF energy compared to controls. There is much uncertainty among scientists about whether results obtained from animal studies apply to the use of mobile phones. First, it is uncertain how to apply the results obtained in rats and mice to humans. Second, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had already been treated with cancer-causing chemicals, and other studies exposed the animals to the RF virtually continuously--up to 22 hours per day. For the past five years in the United States, the mobile phone industry has supported research into the safety of mobile phones. This research has resulted in two findings in particular that merit additional study:

1. In a hospital-based, case-control study, researchers looked for an association between mobile phone use and either glioma (a type of brain cancer) or acoustic neuroma (a benign tumor of the nerve sheath). No statistically significant association was found between mobile phone use and acoustic neuroma. There was also no association between mobile phone use and gliomas when all types of types of gliomas were considered together. It should be noted that the average length of mobile phone exposure in this study was less than three years. When 20 types of glioma were considered separately, however, an association was found between mobile phone use and one rare type of glioma, neuroepithelliomatous tumors. It is possible with multiple comparisons of the same sample that this association occurred by chance. Moreover, the risk did not increase with how often the mobile phone was used, or the length of the calls. In fact, the risk actually decreased with cumulative hours of mobile phone use. Most cancer causing agents increase risk with increased exposure. An ongoing study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute is expected to bear on the accuracy and 183 repeatability of these results.(1) 2. Researchers conducted a large battery of laboratory tests to assess the effects of exposure to mobile phone RF on genetic material. These included tests for several kinds of abnormalities, including mutations, chromosomal aberrations, DNA strand breaks, and structural changes in the genetic material of blood cells called lymphocytes. None of the tests showed any effect of the RF except for the micronucleus assay, which detects structural effects on the genetic material. The cells in this assay showed changes after exposure to simulated cell phone radiation, but only after 24 hours of exposure. It is possible that exposing the test cells to radiation for this long resulted in heating. Since this assay is known to be sensitive to heating, heat alone could have caused the abnormalities to occur. The data already in the literature on the response of the micronucleus assay to RF are conflicting. Thus, follow-up research is necessary.(2) FDA is currently working with government, industry, and academic groups to ensure the proper follow-up to these industry-funded research findings. Collaboration with the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association

(CTIA) in particular is expected to lead to FDA providing research recommendations and scientific oversight of new CTIA-funded research based on such recommendations. Two other studies of interest have been reported recently in the literature:

Two groups of 18 people were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals under laboratory conditions while they performed cognitive function tests. There were no changes in the subjects' ability to recall words, numbers, or pictures, or in their spatial memory, but they were able to make choices more quickly in one visual test when they were exposed to simulated mobile phone signals. This was the only change noted among more than 20 variables compared.(3) In a study of 209 brain tumor cases and 425 matched controls, there was no increased risk of brain tumors associated with mobile phone use. When tumors did exist in certain locations, however, they were more likely to be on the side of the head where the mobile phone was used. Because this www.motorola.com/iden 1. 2. 184 US FDA Consumer Update occurred in only a small number of cases, the increased likelihood was too small to be statistically significant.(4) In summary, we do not have enough information at this point to assure the public that there are, or are not, any low incident health problems associated with use of mobile phones. FDA continues to work with all parties, including other federal agencies and industry, to assure that research is undertaken to provide the necessary answers to the outstanding questions about the safety of mobile phones. What is known about cases of human cancer that have been reported in users of hand-held mobile phones?

Some people who have used mobile phones have been diagnosed with brain cancer. But it is important to understand that this type of cancer also occurs among people who have not used mobile phones. In fact, brain cancer occurs in the U.S. population at a rate of about 6 new cases per 100,000 people each year. At that rate, assuming 80 million users of mobile phones (a number increasing at a rate of about 1 million per month), about 4800 cases of brain cancer would be expected each year among those 80 million people, whether or not they used their phones. Thus it is not possible to tell whether any individual's cancer arose because of the phone, or whether it would have happened anyway. A key question is whether the risk of getting a particular form of cancer is greater among people who use mobile phones than among the rest of the population. One way to answer that question is to compare the usage of mobile phones among people with brain cancer with the use of mobile phones among appropriately matched people without brain cancer. This is called a case-control study. The current case-control study of brain cancers by the National Cancer Institute, as well as the follow-up research to be sponsored by industry, will begin to generate this type of information. What is FDA's role concerning the safety of mobile phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as mobile phones before marketing, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if mobile phones are shown to emit radiation at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of mobile phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions at this time, FDA has urged the mobile phone industry to take a number of steps to assure public safety. The agency has recommended that the industry:

185 support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the type emitted by mobile phones;

design mobile phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that is not necessary for device function; and cooperate in providing mobile phone users with the best possible information on what is known about possible effects of mobile phone use on human health. At the same time, FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of mobile phone safety to ensure a coordinated effort at the federal level. These agencies are:

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Environmental Protection Agency Federal Communications Commission Occupational Health and Safety Administration National Telecommunications and Information Administration The National Institutes of Health also participates in this group. In the absence of conclusive information about any possible risk, what can concerned individuals do?

If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there is--it is probably very small. But if people are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, there are simple steps they can take to do so. For example, time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives. Those persons who spend long periods of time on their hand-held mobile phones could consider holding lengthy conversations on conventional phones and reserving the hand-

held models for shorter conversations or for situations when other types of phones are not available. People who must conduct extended conversations in their cars every day could switch to a type of mobile phone that places more distance between their bodies and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For example, they could switch to:

a mobile phone in which the antenna is located outside the vehicle, a hand-held phone with a built-in antenna connected to a different antenna mounted on the outside of the car or built into a separate package, or a headset with a remote antenna to a mobile phone carried at the waist. 186 www.motorola.com/iden

US FDA Consumer Update Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that mobile phones are harmful. But if people are concerned about the radiofrequency energy from these products, taking the simple precautions outlined above can reduce any possible risk. Where can I find additional information?

For additional information, see the following websites:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safety Program (select

"Information on Human Exposure to RF Fields from Cellular and PCS Radio Transmitters"): http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety . World Health Organization (WHO) International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection (select Qs & As): http://www.who.int/emf United Kingdom, National Radiological Protection Board: http://

www.nrpb.org.uk . Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA): http://

www.wow-com.com . U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Center for Devices and Radiological Health: http://www.fda.gov/cdrh/consumer/ . References:

1. Muscat et al. Epidemiological Study of Cellular Telephone Use and Malig-

nant Brain Tumors. In: State of the Science Symposium;1999 June 20; Long Beach, California. 2. Tice et al. Tests of mobile phone signals for activity in genotoxicity and other laboratory assays. In: Annual Meeting of the Environmental Mutagen Society; March 29, 1999, Washington, D.C.; and personal communication, unpublished results. 3. Preece, AW, Iwi, G, Davies-Smith, A, Wesnes, K, Butler, S, Lim, E, and Varey, A. Effect of a 915-MHz simulated mobile phone signal on cognitive function in man. Int. J. Radiat. Biol., April 8, 1999. 4. Hardell, L, Nasman, A, Pahlson, A, Hallquist, A and Mild, KH. Use of cel-

lular telephones and the risk for brain tumors: a case-control study. Int. J. Oncol., 15: 113-116, 1999. 187

Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products N O T E :

This Warranty applies within the fifty (50) United States and the District of Columbia I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications 188 www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole, or any portion of the system not produced by MOTOROLA, under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. 189 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-453-0920 for warranty service location information. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLAS normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. 190 www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 191 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) N O T E :

This Warranty applies in Singapore and the Philippines. I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories (manufactured by or under license from MOTOROLA) Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:

a. b. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications 192 www.motorola.com/iden Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole, or any portion of the system not produced by MOTOROLA, under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. IV. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its 193 normal and customary manner. b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment). f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:

1. Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2. The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the local type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from use of the products in connection with non-MOTOROLA equipment. V. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be www.motorola.com/iden 194 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or sued in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages arising from any claim of patent infringement or alleged infringement. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 195 Patent and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. 2002 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Microsoft and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic Communications. T9 Text Input Patent and Trademark Information This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Direct Protect is a trademark of Signal Insurance Company. All other product names or services mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective trademark owners. 196 www.motorola.com/iden A Accessories 159 batteries 161 Data cable 79, 165, 166 Dual Port Adapter Cable 166 Swivel Carry Clip 159 Travel Charger 162 Accessory safety information 180 Adapter cable 166 Additional Health and Safety 182 Alpha mode, text entry 26 Auto Redial 144 B Backlight timer 144 Battery 7, 161 attaching 7 changing 8 charge strength 9 detaching 8 operating 162 Baud rate 147 C Call Alert Queue 86 Call alerts 84 from Phonebook 84 receiving 85 Call Filtering 153 Call Forwarding 68 turning off 70 turning on 69 Call Hold 66 call information icons 34 Call Timers 63 Index Call Waiting 65, 138 accepting calls 65 declining calls 66 ending active calls 66 switching between calls 65 turning off 66 Charge strength 9 Circuit data 79 Circuit data number 24 CompanionPro 40 Connection status 24 Customizing Java applications 129 Customizing phone 133 D Data cable 79, 165, 166 Datebook 105 set up 114 viewing 106 viewing a day 107 viewing a week 107 viewing event details 108 viewing today 108 Datebook events 108 adding 109 deleting 113 editing 113 Datebook icons 106 Dialing menu 48 Digital cellular 53 Direct dial 54 Display options 35 changing 141 Driving safety 3 197 E email 79 sending and receiving 78 Entering text, see Text entry F Faxes sending and receiving 79 G Getting started 5 GPS Enabled 93 almanac data 99 best results 98 making emergency calls 95 map software 101 privacy options 99, 129 security 100 viewing location 96 GPS, see GPS Enabled Group calls 88 I Icons context sensitive 32 Datebook 106 main menu 36 Phonebook 40 status 32 icons call information 34 In Call Setup 138 Initial Setup 142 Initial SIM PIN number 13 International calls 52, 58 IP Address 24 J Java applications 127 deinstalling 132 downloading 129 installing 128 memory 131 K Keypad Lock 139 L Language 146 M Main menu 38 icons 36 options 36 reordering 140 Making call alerts 84 Making phone calls 53 Making Private calls 81 Master Reset 140 Memo 117 adding 117 calling number 118 deleting 118 editing 118 storing number to Phonebook 50, 119 viewing 117 Memory Java 131 Voice Notes 125 Menu icon 34 Menus 34, 35, 48 main menu 38 Shortcut 157 Styles Actions menu 153 198 www.motorola.com/iden Styles menu 151 Message Center 73 Messages 73 Net Mail 78 text and numeric 76 voice mail 74 Messages, Net Mail receiving 78 Messages, text and numeric viewing 77 Modem, phone as 79 Motorola 2 Mute 64 My Information 24 N Net Mail 78 Notifications 138 setting 136 Numeric mode, text entry 29 P Packet data 79 Password security code 139 SIM PIN 139 unlock code 139 Patent information 196 Pause digit entry 51 Personalize 140 Phone modem 79 off 10 on 9 status 24 Phone calls 53 ending 59 from Phonebook 54 from Recent Calls list 56 international calls 58 receiving 59 speed dial 56 Turbo Dial 57 voice names 57 Phone Lock 138 Phone Setup 137 Phonebook 39 capacity 44 CompanionPro 40 making call alerts 84 making calls 54 Private calls 82 storing Recent Calls 61 with non-i88s phones 40 with other i88s phones 39 Phonebook entries 42 adding 44 deleting 51 editing 50 sorting 43 viewing 42 Plus dialing 52 Power button 9 Powering phone on or off 9 Private calls 81 from Phonebook 82 from Recent Calls list 82 making 81 receiving 83 voice names 83 Private ID 81 R Radio frequency 172 Ready screen 31 Recent Calls 56, 59 199 deleting 62 details 61 Private calls 82 storing to Phonebook 61 viewing 60 Recent Calls list storing numbers from 49 Ring styles 137 Ring/Vibe 134 S Safety 172 accessory 180 electromagnetic interference 175 medical devices 175 radio frequency 172 Scrolling 146 Security 11, 138 Settings In Call Setup 138 Initial Setup 142 Personalize 140 Phone Setup 137 Ring/Vibe 134 Security 138 VoiceVolume 148 Shortcuts 155 creating 155 using 156 SIM card 12, 39 inserting and removing 18 unblocking 15 with non-i88s phones 40 with other i88s phones 39 SIM PIN 12, 139 changing 14 default 13 disabling 16 enabling 16 entering 13 Speakerphone 64 Speed Dial numbers 40, 46, 56 Status light 24, 145 Status messages 169 Status of connection 24 storing numbers Memo 50 Recent Calls list 49 Styles 150 activating 152 creating 151 turning off 153 Swivel Carry Clip 159 Symbols mode, text entry 29 T T9 Text Input 25 also see Text entry Talkgroups 88 joining 90 naming 88 Text and numeric messages 76 Text display area 34 size 145 Text entry Alpha mode 26 Numeric mode 29 Symbols mode 29 Word mode 26 Three-Way Calling 67 Time and date format 143 Trademark information 196 Travel Charger 162 TTY devices 79 200 www.motorola.com/iden making calls 58 setting baud rate 148 setting mode 147 Turbo Dial 57 Turning phone on or off 9 Two-way radio, see Private calls Typing text, see Text entry U Unblocking SIM PIN 15 V Viewing Datebook 106 Voice Activated dialing 57, 83 also see Voice names Voice Mail 74 logging in 75 receiving messages 74 transferring calls to 74 Voice names 41 creating 47, 156 making calls 57, 83 Phonebook 47 shortcuts 156, 157 Voice Notes 62, 121 adding 123 deleting 124 labeling 123 locking 124 memory 125 playing 122 recording 122 W Warranty 192 Word mode, text entry 26 201 202 www.motorola.com/iden

exhibit
download
text

1 2 3

users manual

Users Manual

pdf

1.08 MiB

Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 1 Mini Keyboard Users Guide Guide de lutilisateur du mini-clavier Gua del usuario del mini teclado Guia do Usurio do Mini-teclado Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 2 Contents The Motorola Mini Keyboard Setting Phones Baud Rate Attaching the Mini Keyboard to the Phone Using the Mini Keyboard Yellow/Lock Key Green/Lock Key Upper Case Letters Using Mini Keyboard Key Shortcuts Navigation Keys Extended Character Set Other Special Characters Frequently Asked Questions More Information 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 9 10 11 12 14 15 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 3 The Motorola Mini Keyboard The Motorola Mini Keyboard is a convenient, portable solution to typing text and commands quickly and easily into your i50sx, i55sr, i58sr, i60c, i85s, i88s, i90c, or i95cl phone. This compact, fully functional keyboard lets you:

Type text for Phonebook and Datebook entries, and almost anywhere else you enter text into your phone. Create and answer email and other types of text messages. Enter commands and access options with simple key commands. Note: The features Datebook, Voice Record, Styles, Shortcuts and Java Applications are not supported on the i60c phones. green/lock key yellow/lock key navigation keys back space key/back one page left option key/

begin phone call right option key/

end/home accesses next available menu/Caps/Space key 1 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 4 Setting Phones Baud Rate Before using your phone with the Motorola Mini Keyboard, ensure that the phones baud rate is set to 9600 or Auto without keyboard attached:

1. Access the phones main menu. A quick way to do this is to press the phones end key e and then press the phones menu key m. 2. Use the phones four-way navigation key to scroll to Settings and press the option key B under SELECT. 3. Scroll to Initial Setup and press the option key B under SELECT. 4. Scroll to Baud Rate and press the option key B under CHANGE. 5. If the baud rate shown is not 9600 or Auto, scroll to 9600 or Auto and press the option key B under SELECT. 2 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 5 Attaching the Mini Keyboard to the Phone When the keyboard is attached to the phone the device attached message is displayed. This may take up to 5 seconds from the time the phone is attached to the Mini Keypads accessory connector. Attaching Mini Keyboard Insert the Mini Keyboard into the phones bottom connector. 3 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 6 Typing If you have attached the Mini Keyboard correctly you can begin typing. Using the Mini Keyboard Here are important points to remember when using the Motorola Mini Keyboard:

Your phone accepts a maximum of 512 characters in its largest input fields. Some of your phones functions cannot be used simultaneously, just as when you are using your phone without the Mini Keyboard. 4 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 7 Letters and functions shown in white are the default keys. Note: All letters are lower case by default, pressing the

"Q" key displays "q". The "BKSP" key will perform as the Back Space key when typing a message. The SPACE key will perform as the space bar key. Yellow/Lock Key Press the Yellow key once. The next key pressed will display the Yellow character on that key, then the keyboard will return to the default keys. Press the Yellow key followed by the "Q" key, a "1" will display. If "Q" is pressed again, a "q" will display. Press the Yellow key twice. All subsequent keys will display the Yellow character. The keys that do not have Yellow functions (Left Option key, Right Option key, BKSP, Navigation keys) will still operate in the default (white) mode. To Unlock: Press the Yellow key again. Green/Lock Key Press the "Green" key once. The next key pressed will display the Green character on that key, then the keyboard will return to the default keys. 5 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 8 Press the Green key followed by the "U" key, a "{" will display. If "U" key is pressed again, a "u" will display. Press the Green key + BKSP key during web browsing to retun to the previous page. Press the Green key twice. All subsequent keys will display the Green character or operate the Green function (SEND, CAPS & END/HOME). To Unlock: Press the Green key again. Upper Case Letters Press the Green Key followed by the CAPS (MENU) key. The next key pressed will display the upper case of the white character. Pressing Green + CAPS + W, will display "W". To Lock: Press Green + CAPS + CAPS. All subsequent characters will be displayed as upper case. To Unlock: Press the CAPS key again. Pressing the Green

(or Yellow) key will also unlock CAPS. The next character will be the Green or Yellow function of that key. 6 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 9 Standard Yellow Function Q W E R T Y U I O P A S D F G H J K L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Green Function APOSTROPHE

ACCENT

F G H J

7 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 10 Standard Yellow Function Green Function Z X C V B N M MINUS UNDERSCORE PERIOD

COMMA

Right Option Key Space Left Option Key 8 Right Option Key Menu Left Option Key

END CAPS SEND Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 11 Using Mini Keyboard Key Shortcuts You can perform most of your phones functions with the keys on the Motorola Mini Keyboard. Note: For more on your phones functions and features, refer to your phones users guide. Basic Function Keys Phone Key Action Menu accesses next available menu Left option Right option chooses current left display option chooses current right display option Keyboard Equivalent Space key Left Option key Right Option key Send End begins phone call ends phone call*

Green Send

Green End

*/back arrow returns to previous page in browser Back 9 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 12

*Also returns to phones idle screen. Returns to home page when you are using the Wireless Web. Navigation Keys The arrow keys on the Mini Keyboard perform the function of your phones four-way navigation key. Action scroll up Keyboard Equivalent up arrow key scroll down scroll right down arrow key right arrow key scroll left left arrow key 10 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 13 Extended Character Set The Mini Keyboard enables you to type special characters using a combination of keystrokes. Accent example Description Keystrokes acute accent (for letters a,e,i,o,u,y) circumflex (for letters a,e,i,o,u) single quote, then letter

+ Y + letter Green umlaut (for letters a,e,i,o,u) shift and quote, then letter grave accent (for letters a,e,i,o,u) tilde (for letters a,n,o) nordic A-ring (for letter a only) grave accent, then letter

+ ~ + letter Green Green

+ X Accent Marks To create a letter with an accent mark over it, type the keystrokes listed in the table above. If your phone is displaying a language other than English, you 11 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 14 must press the right arrow after a single quote, double quote,

~, `, /, -, or ^ for the character to appear. Other Special Characters To create other special characters, type the keystrokes listed in the table below. Accent example Description Keystrokes sharp s, German sz ligature

+ C Green diphthong, AE ligature cedilla icelandic thorn icelandic eth

+ B Green single quote, then c or C

+ V Green dash and d or dash and D nordic O-Slash

/, then o or O upside down ?

upside down !

+ M Green

+ Z Green or or or 12 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 15 Special Character Considerations When your phone is displaying a language other than English, these characters do not appear immediately when typed:

single quote, double quote, tilde (~), grave accent (`), slash (/), dash (-), and circumflex (^). Detaching the Mini Keyboard from the Phone Pull the Mini Keyboard from the phones bottom connector. 13 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 16 Frequently Asked Questions What should I do when I type on the Mini Keyboard and nothing happens?

Check to make sure phone is on and enter your SIM PIN correctly before connecting the phone to the Mini Keyboard. Check to make sure that your phone is properly connected to the Mini Keyboard. Check to make sure that your phones baud rate is set to 9600 or Auto. Check your phones batteries. Remove keyboard and reattach. Can I do everything with the Mini Keyboard that I can do with my phones keypad?

Edit the information in My Information. Search through the names in your Phonebook by typing the first few letters of the name. Begin editing a Phonebook entry by pressing any key, instead of choosing CHANGE. Set a date or time in your Datebook by pressing the desired number keys. 14 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 17 More Information Technical Support For technical support, please contact our iDEN Customer Care team at www.motorola.com/iden/support. Important Safety Information Read the safety information in your phones user guide before using the Mini Keyboard. Communication Regulations Information To maintain compliance with United States FCC radio frequency exposure guidelines, ensure the antenna and the radio product is kept a minimum distance of one inch (2.5 cm) from the body when transmitting. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

15 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 18 Reorient or move the T.V. or radio receiving antenna Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV expert. You may also find helpful the FCC booklet: How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems, available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington D.C. 20402. Changes and Modifications not expressly approved by Motorola can void your authority to operate this equipment under FCC rules. DOC Class B Compliance Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference casing equipment standard entitles, Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of the Department of Communications. Warranty Information Refer to your phones user guide for warranty information relating to your phone. This Motorola Original Accessory has been manufactured to Motorolas quality standards and to meet the performance requirements of your Motorola limited warranty. Ask your sales representative for complete details on this warranty. Motorola, Radio Products and Services Division (Motorola) warrants the Motorola Mini Keyboard against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from shipment. Items will be replaced or 16 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 19 repaired free of charge for the full warranty period. Freight charges to and from the place where warranty replacement is provided shall be the Customers responsibility. The warranty does NOT cover defects or damages to the Motorola Mini Keyboard resulting from (a) use in a manner other than normal operation as specified in the Users Guide,

(b) misuse, accident, or neglect, (c) improper assembly, testing, operations, maintenance, installation, adjustment, alteration, repair or any modification by the customer or any other person without the prior written consent of Motorola. If replacement under warranty is necessary:

To obtain technical information, call Motorola iDEN Customer Care at 1-800-453-0920 or 1-954-723-4910. TTY: 954-723-

5486. To obtain Warranty Service, call Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD) at 1-800-422-4210. Send defective material, within 45 days of confirming warranty order to:

Motorola Radio Products and Services Division 1313 E. Algonquin Road Schaumburg, IL 80196 Attn: Warranty Dept. 17 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 20 The Customer will not be invoiced for the replacement item if original, identical items are shipped to the Warranty Department within 45 days. Copyright, and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. & Tm. Off. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. All other product or service names are the property of their respective trademark owners. 2003 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or 18 Mini Keyboard Multi_Language.qxd 7/25/2003 3:45 PM Page 21 reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. 19

		frequency	equipment class	purpose
1	2003-09-26	896 ~ 902	TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear	Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment
2	2002-08-22	896 ~ 902	TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear
3	2001-12-21	896 ~ 902	TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear	Original Equipment

app s	Applicant Information
1 2 3	Effective	2003-09-26
1 2 3		2002-08-22
1 2 3		2001-12-21
1 2 3	Applicant's complete, legal business name	Motorola Solutions, Inc.
1 2 3	FCC Registration Number (FRN)	0003778479
1 2 3	Physical Address	8000 West Sunrise Blvd
1 2 3		Ft Lauderdale, Florida 33322
1 2 3		United States

app s	TCB Information
1 2 3	TCB Application Email Address	T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
1 2 3	TCB Scope	B2: General Mobile Radio And Broadcast Services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 22 (non-cellular) 73, 74, 90, 95, 97, & 101 (all below 3 GHz)

app s	FCC ID
1 2 3	Grantee Code	AZ4
1 2 3	Equipment Product Code	89FT5815

app s	Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact
1 2 3	Name	D**** Z**
1 2 3	Title	Regulatory Compliance Manager
1 2 3	Telephone Number	95472********
1 2 3	Fax Number	--********
1 2 3	E-mail	d******@motorolasolutions.com

app s	Technical Contact
1 2 3	Firm Name	Motorola Inc
1 2 3	Name	M****** R****
1 2 3	Physical Address	8000 West Sunrise Blvd
1 2 3		Ft. Lauderdale, Florida 33322
1 2 3		Ft.Lauderdale, Florida 33322
1 2 3		United States
1 2 3	Telephone Number	954-7********
1 2 3	Fax Number	954-7********
1 2 3	E-mail	m******@motorola.com

app s	Non Technical Contact
		n/a

app s	Confidentiality (long or short term)
1 2 3	Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?:	No
1 2 3		Yes
1 2 3	Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?:	No
	if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant.

app s	Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc
1 2 3	Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization?	No
1 2 3	Equipment Class	TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear
1 2 3	Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant)	iDEN i88s, i85s, i58sr, i55
1 2 3		iDEN i88s, i58sr
1 2 3	Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application?	No
1 2 3	Modular Equipment Type	Does not apply
1 2 3	Purpose / Application is for	Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment
1 2 3	Purpose / Application is for	Original Equipment
1 2 3	Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization?	No
1 2 3	Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization?	No
1 2 3	Grant Comments	Power listed is conducted. Device must operate with a maximum duty factor not exceeding 67.5% in packet data mode. SAR compliance for body-worn operations is restricted to belt-clips, holsters and accessories supplied or designated for this product. Class II filing adds mini keyboard accessory to device. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations and Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable supplied for this device must provide at least 2.5 cm separation between the device, including its antenna, whether extended or retracted, and the users body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are - Head: 1.21 W/kg, Push-to-Talk mode: 0.17 W/kg, Body-worn: 0.85 W/kg.
1 2 3		Output is maximum peak conducted. Device must operate with a maximum duty factor not exceeding 67.5% in packet data mode. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific Motorola leather carry-case/belt-clip configurations tested for this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Class II filing adds GPS receiver to device. The highest reported SAR values are - Head: 1.21 W/kg, Push-to-Talk mode: 0.17 W/kg, Body-worn: 0.59 W/kg.
1 2 3		Output is maximum peak conducted. Device must operate with a maximum duty factor not exceeding 67.5% in packet data mode. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific Motorola leather carry-case/belt-clip configurations tested for this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance The highest reported SAR values are - Head: 1.2 W/kg, Push-to-Talk mode: 0.11 W/kg, Body-worn: 0.5 W/kg.
1 2 3	Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application?	No
1 2 3	If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded?	No

app s	Test Firm Name and Contact Information
1 2 3	Firm Name	Motorola
1 2 3	Name	W****** E**
1 2 3	Telephone Number	954-7********
1 2 3	Fax Number	954-7********
1 2 3	E-mail	F******@motorolasolutions.com

Equipment Specifications
	Line	Rule Parts	Grant Notes	Lower Frequency	Upper Frequency	Power Output	Tolerance	Emission Designator	Microprocessor Number
1	1	9	BJ	806	825	0.7	1.9 ppm	18K3D7W
1	2	9	BJ	896	902	0.7	0.5 ppm	18K3D7W
	Line	Rule Parts	Grant Notes	Lower Frequency	Upper Frequency	Power Output	Tolerance	Emission Designator	Microprocessor Number
2	1	9	BJ	806	825	0.7	1.9 ppm	18K3D7W	Power is variable 35-50% of value listed
2	2	9	BJ	896	902	0.7	0.5 ppm	18K3D7W	Power is variable 35-50% of value listed
	Line	Rule Parts	Grant Notes	Lower Frequency	Upper Frequency	Power Output	Tolerance	Emission Designator	Microprocessor Number
3	1	9	BJ	806	825	0.7	1.9 ppm	18K3D7W
3	2	9	BJ	896	902	0.7	0.5 ppm	18K3D7W

FCC ID: AZ489FT5815 iDEN i88s, i85s, i58sr, i55

by: Motorola Solutions, Inc. latest update: 2003-09-26 model: 89FT5815

Application Forms